JP7418784B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that can execute a display performance using a display device when a game ball enters a winning opening (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Such gaming machines can perform display effects using character images, symbols, and the like.

JP2016-202930A Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-198339 Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-182376

However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of technology for increasing the interest of gaming.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to improve the interest of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application examples. Note that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later to aid understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
A display means that is visible through an opening formed in the front frame;
A gaming machine comprising a plurality of movable members provided in front of the display means,
The plurality of movable members can each move from a retracted position to a predetermined position and gather at the same timing without covering the front frame,
When the plurality of movable members gather, in the assembled state, the light emission mode of the first specific movable member among the plurality of movable members and the light emission mode of the front frame become the same light emission mode,
When the plurality of movable members are assembled, in the assembled state, a light emission mode of a second specific movable member among the plurality of movable members and a light emission mode of the front frame are different,
When the plurality of movable members are assembled, they are further activated in the assembled state, and then, when the assembled state is released, the light emission mode of the second specific movable member and the light emission mode of the front frame are the same. be the mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. It is an explanatory view showing details of the second grand prize winning device. It is an enlarged view of display devices. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining various types of random numbers used in gaming machines. It is a diagram for explaining a special symbol hit determination table and the like. FIG. 2 is a first diagram for explaining a hit type determination table. It is a 2nd diagram for explaining a hit type determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern determination table. It is a diagram for explaining a normal symbol hit determination table and the like. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an electric chew opening pattern determination table. It is a diagram for explaining a big winning opening pattern determination table. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of main side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of starting port sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of normal operation processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol hit determination processing. It is a 1st flowchart of special symbol variation pattern selection processing. It is a second flowchart of special symbol variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state management processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessories processing 1. It is a flowchart of gaming state setting processing. It is a figure for explaining the setting table of a time-saving counter. It is a 1st flowchart of the special electric accessory process 2. It is a 2nd flowchart of the special electric accessory process 2. It is a flowchart of V opening/closing member control processing. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. 3 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart of a fluctuating production start process. It is a flowchart of a fluctuating performance end process. It is a flowchart of ending performance pattern determination processing. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a mode status setting table. It is a diagram for explaining a time-saving effect scenario determination table. It is a figure for explaining the specific content of a time-saving production scenario. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating the expected performance of V. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning game performance when special figure 2 is won. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation performance at the time of special drawing 2 lottery. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a countdown effect. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a one-time performance of crying. It is an explanatory view illustrating movement of the first movable accessory 14 in the advancing direction. It is an explanatory view illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. It is an explanatory view illustrating a combination effect of the first movable accessory 14 and an image. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rotational movement of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first light emitting mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second light emitting mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. It is an explanatory view illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rotational movement of the second movable accessory 15. FIG. It is an explanatory view illustrating a first combination effect of first and second movable accessories. It is an explanatory view illustrating a second combination effect of the first and second movable accessories. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation timing change effect A. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation timing change effect B; It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation timing change effect C. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a symbol direction change effect A. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a symbol direction change effect B. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a symbol direction change effect C. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of accessory symbol cooperation production A. It is an explanatory view illustrating an example of accessory symbol cooperation production B. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of accessory symbol cooperation production C. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific image pattern cooperation effect A. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific image pattern cooperation effect B. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific image pattern cooperation effect C. It is an explanatory view illustrating a decorative pattern mode change effect A. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern mode change production B. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a decorative pattern mode change effect C. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a decorative pattern variable area effect A. It is an explanatory view illustrating a decorative pattern variation region effect B. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a decorative pattern variable area production C. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of operation promotion performance A. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of operation promotion performance B; It is an explanatory diagram illustrating operation promotion performance C. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning/losing notification effect A. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning/losing notification effect B. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning/losing notification effect C. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an operation unit image display effect A. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of operation unit image display effect B; FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an operation unit image display effect C. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating an appearance/disappearance effect A of a effect button. It is an explanatory view illustrating an appearance/disappearance effect B of a effect button. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating an appearance/disappearance effect C of a effect button. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning notification effect A. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning notification effect B. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning notification effect C. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an inside/outside effect A of a stereoscopic image. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an outer/outer outer appearance B of a stereoscopic image. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an outer-interior rendering C of a three-dimensional image. It is an explanatory view illustrating a selective display prevention effect A of the effect mode. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating selection display prevention performance B of the performance mode. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a selection display prevention effect C of the effect mode. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a game ball image effect A. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a game ball image effect B. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a game ball image production C. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific edge effect A of a stereoscopic image. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific edge effect B of a stereoscopic image. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific edge effect C of a stereoscopic image. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a combination production A of movable accessories. It is an explanatory view illustrating a combination production B of movable accessories. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a combination production C of movable accessories.

<First embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine The structure of a gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention will be explained based on FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing details of the second grand prize winning device 36. In the following, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be explained so as to correspond to the left-right direction as seen from the player facing the gaming machine 1. Further, the forward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be explained as the direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the backward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be explained as the direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that fires game balls based on a player's firing operation, and when a game ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached to the inside of the game machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes, in addition to a front frame (front frame part) 53, an outer frame (base frame part) that forms the outer shell of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. We are prepared. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit disposed on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and an excess ball tray (lower tray). ) 62, a performance button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a select button 68. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the gaming area 3 of the gaming board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53, and causes the game ball to be launched at a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotation angle. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 61. The performance button 63 is an operation unit disposed near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player during a performance performed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation part imitating the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during performances performed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation part provided at the upper end of the sword member 64, that is, at the end of the sword handle, and is operated (pressed) by the player during performances performed as the game progresses. Ru. The sword member 64 is configured to be able to perform two different operations: a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward, and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and performs a light emitting effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged at the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and perform sound production during games and the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, and an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. , a fixed winning device (belly button) 19, a normal variable winning device (electronic chew) 22, a first gate (through chucker) 28, a second gate (through chucker) 29, and a first big winning device (first attacker). ) 31, a second big winning device (second attacker) 36, a general winning opening (normal winning opening) 27, an out opening 16, and display devices 40.

The game area 3 is an area where game balls shot by operating the handle 60 flow down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game balls are provided protrudingly. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball launched by operating the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and emits light from the back side of the game area 3. Here, some of the board lamps 5 are also provided inside each of the first board movable body 14 and the second board movable body 15. is configured to be able to produce light emission in a specific manner.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the gaming area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a production pattern display area where production patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, 8R) are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a storage image display area where storage images 9A and 9B are displayed. It has a display area and a pending digested image display area where the pending digested image 9C is displayed. The pending images 9A and 9B are images representing pending status, and are also referred to as pending icons. The pending digest image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also referred to as the pending icon. The hold icon and the hold icon are collectively referred to as simply hold icons.

The performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas: "left," "middle," and "right." A left performance symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area. A medium effect pattern 8C is displayed in the medium pattern display area. A right production symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays a first special symbol and a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, by a combination of effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of variable display of the second special symbol (big win/small win lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player.

For example, in the case of winning a jackpot, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed as a zero number such as "777". If it is a miss, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed with a miss, such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the results of the large winning/small winning lottery through the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b. Note that the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, the manner in which the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner may be a manner in which they are scrolled in the vertical direction, or may be in any other manner. Further, when winning a small hit, the performance symbols may be stopped and displayed at a predetermined chance such as "135", or the performance symbols may be stopped and displayed at the winning number. The combination of performance symbols to be stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the performance that displays the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will also be referred to as "fluctuation performance of performance symbols" or simply "fluctuation performance" and "fluctuation display." In addition, for this decorative pattern fluctuation performance, the performance during the period from when the special symbol starts changing until it stops fixed (also called special symbol fluctuation period) is counted as one fluctuation performance (one cycle of fluctuation performance). . Therefore, even if there is a case where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special pattern starts to fluctuate until it is fixed and stopped, the performance of the temporary stop is included in the fluctuating performance of the decorative pattern.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a, in addition to the performance symbol variation performance, a jackpot performance performed in parallel with the jackpot game (second special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc. In the performance symbol variation performance, performance images such as background images and character images may also be displayed in addition to the performance symbols. In addition to the production pattern, the image display device 7 also includes an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can indicate that the special pattern is changing or indicate the lottery result of the special pattern. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that the identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area is a first reserved display area that displays reserved images 9A according to the number of stored first special figures reserved, which will be described later, and a reserved image 9B that displays reserved images 9B according to the number of stored second special figures reserved, which will be described later. and a second hold display area. By displaying the holding images 9A and 9B, the stored number of first special figure holdings displayed on the first special figure holding display 43a, which will be described later, and the number of second special figure holdings displayed on the second special figure holding display 43b are determined. The number of memories can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays the pending digest image 9C. The pending digesting image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently being changed on the display screen 7a, and depending on the display of the pending digesting image 9C, the first special symbol pending or the second special symbol pending It is possible to clearly display to the player that the special drawing reservation has been completed ("extinction of special drawing reservation" to be described later).

On the left and right sides of the image display device 7, a first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that two half-ring-shaped members arranged on the left and right sides are movable in the left-right direction. The first movable accessory 14 normally remains stationary at retracted positions on the left and right sides of the image display device 7 (FIG. 1), and moves from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a so as to approach each other ( (Advance) and stand still at the advance position in front of the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14 forms a ring-shaped decorative part when the left and right members are combined at the advanced position, and covers a part of the image display device 7.

A second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided above the image display device 7. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decoration part) written with "OARO" is movable in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 normally remains stationary at a retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and moves (advances) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a for display. It can stand still at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage section 11 is formed at the bottom of the image display device 7. The stage part 11 has a shape that can guide a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage part 11 to a first starting port 20, which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decorative body 10. The warp section 12 includes an entrance section through which game balls flow in and an exit section through which game balls flow out, and allows the game balls that flowed in from the entrance section to flow out to the stage section 11 from the exit section.

The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is a transparent flat plate member attached to the central opening of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 is visible through the illumination panel 18. That is, the illumination panel 18 is arranged in front of the image display device 7, and the image displayed on the image display device 7 is visible through the illumination panel 18. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a predetermined image on its main surface by irradiating LED light from the end surface. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display several types of images in multiple types of colors depending on the irradiation direction and color of the LED light.

The fixed winning device (belly button) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the gaming area 3, and includes a first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first ball entry opening, fixed starting opening) 20. The winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 is an opportunity for a first special symbol lottery (big win/small win lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 is an opportunity to obtain a random number per special symbol and to determine a jackpot.

The normal variable prize winning device (electronic chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting hole 20 in the gaming area 3, and includes a second starting hole (second starting winning hole, second ball entering hole, variable starting hole) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 is an opportunity for a second special symbol lottery (big win/small win lottery). The electric chew 22 includes a movable member 23 that can move forward and backward, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric solenoid 24 . A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state (advancing state). Note that the electric chew 22 only needs to enter the second starting port 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state (retracted state); 2. The ball may be allowed to enter the starting port 21.

The first gate (through chucker) 28 is placed on the right side of the image display device 7 in the gaming area 3, and the second gate (through chucker) 29 is placed on the left side of the image display device 7 in the gaming area 3. Each of them is configured so that a game ball can pass through them. Passage of the game ball to the gates (first gate 28 and second gate 29) is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not to release the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gates 28 and 29 is a trigger for obtaining a random number per symbol and determining a hit.

Here, "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, a random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and this acquired random number is used as a predetermined random number. It is a process of determining whether or not it is a big win and whether or not it is a small win by comparing it with the value corresponding to the "big win" or "small win". The lottery results of this "big hit" and "small win" are not immediately notified to the player, but a variable display of special symbols is performed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later. Then, after a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game is performed in which performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of special symbols, and the jackpot lottery result is more effectively notified to the player by this pattern matching game.

In addition, "normal symbol lottery" means that when a game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, a random number for normal symbol determination is obtained, and this obtained random number is used as a predetermined "winning". ” refers to the process of determining whether or not it is a hit by comparing it with the value corresponding to . Regarding the lottery result of this normal symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, but the normal symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner on the normal symbol display 42, which will be described later. is carried out, and after a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as confirmed (lit or unlit), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged below the first gate 28 in the gaming area 3, and includes a first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. There is. The first big prize opening 30 includes an opening/closing member (first special winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that allows or inhibits reception of game balls through a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first big prize opening solenoid 33. A game ball can enter the first big prize opening 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged below the first big winning hole 30 in the gaming area 3, and the second big winning hole (second special winning hole) 35 We are prepared. The second big winning hole 35 includes an opening/closing member (second special winning hole opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that obstructs or allows reception of game balls by a shutter-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by the second big prize opening solenoid 38. A game ball can enter the second big prize opening 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state.

The second big winning device 36 internally includes a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a, a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, a non-V area sensor 70a, and a second big winning opening sensor. 35a, a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured as areas through which the game ball that has passed through the second grand prize opening 35 can pass inside the second grand prize winning device 36. . The second big winning hole sensor 35a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects winning of a game ball into the second big winning hole 35. The V area sensor 39a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game balls that have passed through the second big prize opening 35 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71. The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates clockwise from the origin position to move the game ball to the V. A first state (rotating state) in which game balls are distributed to the region 39 is entered, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, a second state (stopping state) is entered in which the balls are located at the origin and are distributed to the non-V region 70. In addition, the V opening/closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, but may have the function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first big prize opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70, for example, It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V area 39 in a retracted state (first state), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V area 70 in the advancing state. (Second state).

FIG. 2(A) shows a state in which the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized. When the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening/closing member 71 is in a state (first state) in which the game ball is allowed to pass through the V area 39. When the V opening/closing member 71 is in the first state, the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 35 passes through the second big winning hole sensor 35a and then passes through the V area 39 (as shown in FIG. 2(A)). A route). This route of the game ball is called the "first route." FIG. 2(B) shows a state in which the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. When the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is de-energized, the V opening/closing member 71 is in a state (second state) that prevents the game ball from passing into the V area 39. When the V opening/closing member 71 is in the second state, the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 35 passes through the second big winning hole sensor 35a, then rolls on the upper surface of the V opening/closing member 71 and enters the non-V opening/closing member 71. It passes through area 70 (route B in FIG. 2(B)). This route of the game ball is called the "second route". In addition, in the gaming machine 1, passage of the game ball to the V area 39 is an opportunity to execute a jackpot game (second special game) to be described later. In other words, a jackpot lottery is also performed depending on whether or not the game ball has successfully passed through the V area 39. The jackpot won by the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery described above is also called the "1st type jackpot", and the jackpot won by the passage of the game ball to the V area 39 is also called the "2nd type jackpot".

Returning to FIG. 1, two normal winning holes 27 are provided at the bottom of the gaming area 3. Note that the number of normal winning holes 27 can be set arbitrarily. The out port 16 is provided at the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges game balls that have not won in any of the winning holes to the outside of the game area 3. The display devices 40 are arranged at the lower right part of the game board 2. Details of the display devices 40 will be described later.

The gaming area 3 includes a left gaming area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right gaming area 3B on the right side. A hitting method in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the left game area 3A is called "left-handed hitting." On the other hand, a hitting method in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the right game area 3B is called "right-handed hitting." In the gaming machine 1, the player can aim to pass through the second gate 29 and win a prize in the first starting port 20 by playing left-handed. On the other hand, it is configured so that by hitting right, you can aim to pass through the first gate 28 and win the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35.

FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the displays 40. The displays 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reservation display 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display 43b. , and a general figure reservation display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The first special symbol reservation display 43a displays the number of stored operation reservations (first special symbol reservation) of the first special symbol display 41a. The second special symbol reservation display 43b displays the number of stored operation reservations (second special symbol reservation) of the second special symbol display 41b. The normal symbol reservation display 44 displays the number of stored operation reservations (common symbol reservations) of the ordinary symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the landing of a game ball into the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the landing of a game ball into the second starting port 21. Below, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as a "special symbol." Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as the "special symbol display 41." In addition, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b are also collectively referred to as the "special figure holding display 43."

The special symbol display device 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (fluctuating display) and then stops displaying the special symbol (identification information). , big win, small win lottery). The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (stop symbol, special symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) with a predetermined jackpot stopping pattern, the first jackpot 30 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (the type of jackpot that was won). A jackpot game (second special game) is played in which the player is allowed to open the game. In addition, if the stopping symbol is a special symbol (small winning symbol) with a predetermined small winning stopping mode, an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the small winning symbol that is stopped and displayed (the type of winning small winning) A small winning game (first special game) in which the second big prize opening 35 is opened is played. The opening pattern of the big winning hole (the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35) in the first special game or the second special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you can select one or two from the left as "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: off). , 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display jackpot symbols. Also, if you win a small win (one of the multiple types of small wins described below), the 5th and 6th LEDs from the left will light up like "●●●●○○●●". Display small winning symbols. In addition, in the case of a loss, a losing symbol such as "●●●●●●●○" with only the rightmost LED lit is displayed. A mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (variable display) for a predetermined variable time. For example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighted up display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be such that all the LEDs blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, various random number values (numeric information ) is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 6). Specifically, if the winning is in the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special drawing holding storage area 85a (FIG. 6) as the first special drawing holding, and if it is winning in the second starting opening 21, it is stored in the first special drawing holding storage area 85a (FIG. 6). , is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 6) as a second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit in this embodiment is four for the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and four for the second special figure reservation storage area. There is one 85b. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is consumed when variable display of special symbols based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Extinguishing the special symbol reservation" refers to determining the random number etc. per special symbol corresponding to the special symbol reservation and executing a variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, if the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if a prize is won during execution of a medium or special game (big win game or small win game), the right to draw a big win or small win for that prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number of prizes. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation display 43. The first special figure holding display 43a is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and the second special figure holding display 43b is composed of, for example, one LED. Each special figure reservation display 43 displays the number of special symbols reserved by lighting up LEDs corresponding to the number of special symbols reserved.

The variable display of normal symbols is triggered by the passing of a game ball to the first gate 28 or the second gate 29. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 by displaying the normal symbols variably (variably displaying) and then stopping. The normal pattern that is stopped and displayed (the normal pattern that is stopped and the normal pattern that is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one normal pattern that is selected from among a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stopping pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (normal pattern with a predetermined stopping pattern, that is, a normal winning pattern), assistance is provided to open the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current gaming state. A game is played. Note that the opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display 42 is composed of three LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if the lottery result is a win, a normal winning symbol with the first and second LEDs from the left lit, such as "○○●" (○: lit, ●: off), is displayed. If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss symbol such as "●●○" with only the right LED lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off as a normal losing symbol may be adopted. Before the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time. For example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode, and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be such that all the LEDs blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, the value of the random number per normal symbol acquired for that passage is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area 86 (FIG. 6). It is temporarily stored as a reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of regular symbols that can be stored in the regular symbol reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit in this embodiment is one. The general symbol reservation stored in the ordinary symbol reservation storage area 86 is consumed when the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the ordinary symbol reservation becomes possible. The extinguishing of a normal symbol reservation means to determine a random number per normal symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol reservation, and to execute a variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, if the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, when the variable display of the normal symbols is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed, winnings will be won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right to draw a normal symbol lottery for the passing of a predetermined number of symbols as an upper limit. The number of general drawings on hold is displayed on the general drawing holding display 44. The common picture reservation display 44 is composed of, for example, one LED, and displays the number of common pictures pending by lighting up the LEDs for the number of common pictures pending.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 4), a sub-control board 90 (FIG. 5), an image control board 100 (FIG. 5), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 5), and an audio control board 106 (FIG. 5). FIG. 5) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 4). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls gaming profits such as large winning/small winning drawings and transition of gaming states, and constitutes a main control section. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effects to be executed as the game progresses, and together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the audio control board 106, constitutes a sub-control unit. Note that the sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. Contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 sends and receives data to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs a signal to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the first starting port sensor 20a, the second starting port sensor 21a, the first gate sensor 28a, the second gate sensor 29a, the first big winning port sensor 30a, and the second starting port sensor 20a. The big prize opening sensor 35a, the V area sensor 39a, the non-V area sensor 70a, and the normal winning opening sensor 27a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chew solenoid 24, the first big winning hole solenoid 33, the second big winning hole solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The first starting port sensor 20a is provided inside the first starting port 20, and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided inside the second starting port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 21. The first gate sensor 28a is provided inside the first gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the first gate 28. The second gate sensor 29a is provided inside the second gate 29 and detects a game ball that has passed through the second gate 29. The first big winning hole sensor 30a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30, and detects a game ball that has won in the first big winning hole 30. The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided inside the second big winning hole 35, and detects the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 35. The V area sensor 39a is provided in the V area 39 inside the second big prize opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the second big prize opening 35, and detects the game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70. The normal winning hole sensor 27a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the normal winning hole 27. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31. The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the second big prize opening 35.

Display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol pending display 43a, a second special symbol pending display 43b, and a normal symbol pending. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for monitoring payout. A prize ball payout device 120, a rental ball payout device 130, and a card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and a shooting device 112 is connected via a shooting control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out prize balls. The paid out prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball payout device 130 pays out rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the ball rental motor 131 of the rental ball payout device 130 based on a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out rental balls. The paid-out rental balls are detected by the rental ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The firing device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the firing device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114, and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the firing volume 115. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

A sub-control board 90 (FIG. 5) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a communication direction regulating means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The production control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the production of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub-ROM that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. It includes a CPU 92. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The performance control microcomputer 91 sends and receives data to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built into the production control microcomputer 91. An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 , and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub-control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to programs for display control, the ROM 103 stores still image data and video data displayed on the image display device 7, including characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. image data such as background images, etc.) are stored. RAM 104 is used as a memory for developing image data. CPU 102 executes a program stored in ROM 103. The performance control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs audio, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. etc. is output. Acoustic data such as audio output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. Note that the voice control board 106 may include a CPU, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be equipped with a ROM, and may store acoustic data in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may be caused to perform audio control. Furthermore, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

A frame lamp 66, a board lamp 5, a first movable accessory 14, and a second movable accessory 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and controls these. The production control microcomputer 91 controls the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 (the lamps of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15) via the lamp control board 107 based on commands received from the main control board 80. control the lighting of lamps such as In other words, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, light emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5, and creates a light emission pattern. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The performance control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The production control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of each of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15, and controls the movement of these movable accessories according to the motion pattern data. Control behavior. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may include a CPU, and may cause the CPU to control the lighting of the lamp and control the operation of the movable accessory based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a ROM, and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

A production button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108. The production button detection switch 63a detects that the production button 63 has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. Further, the sub control board 90 can cause the effect button 63 and the select button 68 to perform a light emitting effect via the relay board 108.

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. 6(A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 6(B) is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 7(A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 7(B) is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 6(A)) includes a special symbol hit determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a special symbol hit type determination table T3, a special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, and a normal symbol hit determination table T5. , a normal symbol per type determination table T6, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T7, an electric chew opening pattern determination table T8, and a big winning opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) that the game control microcomputer 81 executes. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 6(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure reservation storage area 85, and a general figure reservation memory. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) where commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main processing (described later), and includes a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, and an opening command. Command, Round designation command, Ending command, Game state designation command, V passing command, Advance judgment command, Customer waiting standby command, Pending ball count command, Normal symbol fluctuation start command, Normal symbol fluctuation stop command, Normal symbol opening command, Normal Design ending commands etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the status of the gaming machine and the gaming status are set in the main control main processing (described later), and include the jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, small win flag, small win end flag, V A flag, a time saving flag, a V opening/closing member operation flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in main control main processing (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a first time saving counter, a second time saving counter, etc. are set. The special operation status setting area 84d is an area in which the status in special operation processing (FIG. 20), which will be described later, is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which a first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which a second special figure reservation is stored. The first special figure reservation storage area 85a stores a group of random numbers (reservation information) such as random numbers per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storage. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b is provided with a first storage area for storing a random number group (reservation information) corresponding to the first piece of the second special figure reservation. The normal pattern reservation storage area 86 is provided with a first storage area for storing a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per normal symbol corresponding to the first normal pattern reservation. In addition to the above-mentioned areas, the main RAM 84 is provided with a winning type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, a drive data buffer in which drive data for driving the decorative movable body 15 is set, and the like. It is being

The sub ROM93 (FIG. 7(A)) includes a variable performance pattern determination table T51, a stop symbol pattern determination table T52, a mode status setting table T53, a time-saving performance scenario determination table T54, and a look-ahead performance pattern determination table T55. is stored. These decision tables are referred to by the production control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) that the production control microcomputer 91 executes. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 7(B)) is provided with a command storage area 94a, a production command set area 94b, a preliminary determination information storage area 94c, a counter set area 94d, and a mode status set area 94e. . The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) where commands input from the main control unit are stored in sub-control main processing (described later), including a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, and a round designation command. , ending command, game state designation command, V passing command, advance judgment command, customer waiting standby command, number of pending balls command, normal symbol fluctuation start command, normal symbol fluctuation stop command, normal symbol opening command, normal symbol ending command, etc. Stored. The production command set area 94b is an area (output buffer) where commands to be output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, lamp control board 107, and audio control board 106 are set in sub-control main processing (described later). Yes, variable production start command, variable production end command, opening production start command, round production start command, ending production start command, normal symbol variation production start command, normal symbol variation production end command, normal symbol opening production start command, normal symbol Ending production start commands etc. are set. The preliminary determination information storage area 94c stores preliminary determination information in sub-control main processing (described later). The counter setting area 94d is an area where counters used in the sub-control main processing (described later) are set, including a random number counter, a first special symbol reservation performance counter, a second special symbol reservation performance counter, and a regular symbol reservation performance counter. , a first time saving effect counter, a second time saving effect counter, etc. are set. In the mode status setting area 94e, a mode status (described later) indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine 1 (a time-saving state or a non-time-saving state, which will be described later) is set.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining various types of random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 8(A) shows a random number obtained by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control section side, and FIG. 8(B) shows a random number obtained by the production control microcomputer 91 on the sub control section side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 inputs "random numbers per special symbol", "type random number per special symbol", "reach random number", "fluctuation pattern random number", "random number per normal symbol", and "type per normal symbol". random numbers" are acquired at timings described later. The "special symbol per random number" is a random number used for a lottery to determine whether it is a big hit or a small win (big win/small win lottery), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "special symbol winning type random number" is a random number used for lottery (winning type determination) of the winning jackpot or small winning type, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. "Reach Random Number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the performance symbol variation performance that indicates the result when the jackpot/small hit judgment is a loss, and ranges from 0 to 127. takes the value of Reach is a state in which there is only one fluctuating performance symbol remaining among multiple performance symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the fluctuating performance symbol is stopped and displayed. This is a state in which a combination of performance symbols indicating a jackpot, small win, or winning (for example, a state of "7↓7") occurs. Note that the performance symbols that are displayed in a stopped state in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if they are shaking within the display screen 7a. The "variation pattern random number" is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "random number per normal symbol" is a random number used for a winning lottery (normal symbol lottery) to determine whether or not to play an auxiliary game that opens the electric chew 22, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. "Normal symbol per type random number" is a random number used for lottery of the winning type (win type determination) in the normal symbol lottery, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. "Random number per special symbol", "Type random number per special symbol", "Reach random number", "Variation pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the starting hole (first starting hole 20 or second starting hole 21) be done. The random number group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a. It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The "random number per normal symbol" and the "type random number per normal symbol" are acquired based on passing through a gate (first gate 28 or second gate 29). The acquired random number value per normal symbol and type random number value per normal symbol are stored in the regular symbol retention storage area 86.

The performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "fluctuation performance pattern random number", a "time-saving performance scenario random number", and a "preread performance random number" at timings to be described later. The "variable effect pattern random number" is a random number used to determine the variable effect pattern, and takes a value in the range from 0 to 127. The "time saving effect scenario random number" is a random number used to determine the change scenario of the remaining number of time savings (remaining number of display time savings) displayed on the image display device 7 during the time saving state, and has a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. The "pre-read effect random number" is a random number used to determine the pre-read effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "variation effect pattern random number" is acquired based on the output of a variation start command from the main control section to the sub control section. The obtained random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94. The "time-saving effect scenario random number" is acquired based on the output of the ending command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The "pre-read effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a preliminary determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The obtained random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit determination table T1 and the reach determination table T2. FIG. 9(A) shows a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit determination table T1, and FIG. 9(B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2.

The special symbol winning determination table T1 indicates whether the special symbol winning random number value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) is a "big hit", "small hit", or "loss". This is a table that is referenced to determine which of the following applies. In FIG. 9(A), in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), if the random value per special symbol is "0 to 210", it is determined as a "jackpot", and the random value per special symbol is " 10,000 to 10,500", it is determined to be a "small hit", and if the random number per special symbol is a value other than the above from 0 to 65,535, it is determined to be a "loss". . In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), if the random number per special symbol is "0 to 210", it will be determined as a "jackpot", and if the random number per special symbol is "10,000 to 16,500". In this case, it is determined to be a "small hit", and if the special symbol winning random number value is a value other than the above among 0 to 65535, it is determined to be a "lose".

The reach determination table T2 indicates whether the reach random value (one of 0 to 127) obtained by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to "reach exists" or "reach does not exist". This is a table that is referenced to determine whether the In FIG. 9(B), in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 13", it is determined that there is a "reach", and if the reach random value is "a number other than 0 to 13 (14 to 127), it is determined that there is no reach. In addition, in the "time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is a "reach", and if the reach random value is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)", it is determined that there is a reach. It is shown that it is determined that there is no reach. The contents of the "time-saving state" and "non-time-saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, it is harder to reach when losing in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. This is because in the time saving state, more no-reach loses with short fluctuation times are selected, thereby increasing the speed at which special symbols are reserved.

The special symbol hit type determination table T3 will be explained based on FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol winning type determination table T3 in the lottery of the special symbol 1. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol winning type determination table T3 in the special symbol 2 lottery. The special symbol winning type determination table T3 is a "jackpot type" or "jackpot type" according to a special symbol winning type random value (any one from 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later). This table is referred to in order to determine the "small hit type" and the "special symbol type." In Figure 10, when a "big hit" is won in the lottery of special symbol 1 in "non-time saving state", if the special symbol per type random number is "0 to 15", the jackpot type is "15R time saving 99 times jackpot". A", and the stop symbol of special symbol 1 (special symbol 1 halt symbol) that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a is determined to be "time-saving symbol 1." When the special symbol hit type random number value is "16 to 63", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 99 times jackpot B", and the special symbol 1 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 2". When the special symbol hit type random number value is "64 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 5 times jackpot A", and the special symbol 1 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 3". On the other hand, if a "small hit" is won in the lottery of special symbol 1 in "non-time saving state", the small win type is It is determined as "16R normal small hit A (substantially impossible to pass through 5R/V)", and the special symbol 1 stop symbol is determined as "small win symbol 1 without time saving".

When you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery in the "time saving state", if the special symbol winning type random number is "0 to 63", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 99 times jackpot C". , the special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be the "time saving symbol 4". When the special symbol hit type random number value is "64 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 5 times jackpot B", and the special symbol 1 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 5". On the other hand, if a "small hit" is won in the lottery of special symbol 1 in "time saving state", the small win type is " 16R normal small hit B (substantially impossible to pass through 5R/V)", and the special symbol 1 stop symbol is determined to be "small winning symbol 2 without time saving".

In Figure 11, when a "big hit" is won in the lottery of special symbol 2 in "non-time saving state", if the special symbol winning type random number is "0 to 63", the jackpot type is "15R time saving 5 times jackpot". C", and the stop symbol of the special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 halt symbol) that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b is determined to be the "time-saving symbol 6." When the special symbol hit type random number value is "64 to 95", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 15 times jackpot A", and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 7". When the special symbol hit type random number value is "96 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time-saving 99 times jackpot D", and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is determined to be "time-saving symbol 8". On the other hand, when a "small hit" is won in the special drawing 2 lottery in "non-time saving state", if the special symbol per type random number is "0 to 63", the small winning type is "16R time saving 5 times small". It is determined that the winning symbol is "win A (substantially 15 R/V can be passed)", and the special symbol 2 stop symbol of the special symbol 2 on the second special symbol display 41b is determined to be "small winning symbol 1 with time saving". If the special symbol hit type random number is "64 to 127", the small hit type is determined to be "16R time saving 99 times small hit A (actually 15R/V can be passed)", and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is "time saving". It is determined that there is a small winning symbol 2.

When you win a jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery in the "time saving state", if the special symbol winning type random number is "0 to 79", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 5 times jackpot D". , the special figure 2 stop symbol is determined to be the "time saving symbol 9". When the special symbol hit type random number value is "80 to 95", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 15 times jackpot B", and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 10". When the special symbol hit type random number value is "96 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 99 times jackpot E", and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 11". On the other hand, when a "small hit" is won in the special drawing 2 lottery in "time saving state", if the special symbol winning type random number is "0 to 63", the small winning type is "16R time saving 5 times small winning". B (substantially 15R/V can be passed)", and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is determined to be "time-saving small winning symbol 3". If the special symbol hit type random number is "64 to 95", the small hit type is determined to be "16R time saving 10 times small hit (actually 15R/V can be passed)", and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is "time saving available". It is determined that the small winning symbol is 4. If the special symbol hit type random number is "96 to 111", the small hit type is determined to be "16R time saving 15 times small hit (actually 15R/V can be passed)", and the special symbol 2 stop pattern is "time saving available". It is determined that the small winning symbol is 5. If the special symbol per type random number is "112 to 127", the small hit type is determined to be "16R time saving 99 times small hit B (actually 15R/V can be passed)", and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is "time saving". It is determined that there is a small winning symbol 6. In addition, by referring to the special symbol hit type determination table T3, in addition to the "special symbol stop symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stop symbols (special symbol 1 stop symbol and special symbol 2 stop symbol), the "opening" of the special game (OP) command,” “round designation command,” and “ending (ED) command.” The specific details of each jackpot and each small win will be described later.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4. The special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the acquired fluctuation pattern random value (0 to 127). It is. In FIG. 12, for example, if a prize is won in the first starting hole 20 in a non-time saving state, it is determined to be a "jackpot" in the special symbol hit determination table T1, and the fluctuation pattern random value is "111 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P2". Also, for example, if a prize is entered in the first starting slot 20 in a non-time saving state, it is determined as a "lose" in the special symbol hit determination table T1, it is determined as "no reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of reserved balls is "1". ~2'', it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P6" regardless of the fluctuation pattern random value (any of 0 to 127). Also, for example, if you win at the second starting port 21 in the time saving state and it is determined to be a "small hit" in the special symbol hit determination table T1, regardless of the fluctuation pattern random value (any of 0 to 127) ), it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P17". As shown in FIG. 12, once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when reaching a reach, it is also determined whether the reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). In addition, in the case of super reach, it is also determined whether there is a pseudo link or not.

FIG. 13(A) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T5, and FIG. 13(B) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit type determination table T6. 13(C) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7. The normal symbol winning determination table T5 indicates whether the acquired normal symbol winning random number value (any of 0 to 255) corresponds to a "win" or a "loss" in the main control main processing (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. This is a table that is referenced to determine whether the item is applicable. In FIG. 13(A), in both the "non-time-saving state" and the "time-saving state", when the random number per normal symbol is "0 to 254" in the drawing of a normal symbol (common symbol), It is shown that if it is determined to be a "win" and the random number per symbol is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)", it is determined to be a "loss".

The normal symbol winning type determination table T6 determines the "winning type" and "win type" according to the normal symbol winning type random value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later). This is a table that is referred to to determine the type of normal symbol. In FIG. 13(B), when winning in the lottery of regular symbols in "non-time saving state", if the random number per symbol per symbol is "0 to 30", the winning type is determined to be "Long Open 1". Then, the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42 is determined to be "winning symbol 1". If the normal symbol per type random number value is "100 to 170", the winning type is determined to be "short open 1", and the regular symbol stop symbol is determined to be "winning symbol 2". If the normal symbol per type random number value is a value other than the above from 0 to 65535, it indicates that the winning type is determined to be "short open 2" and the regular symbol stop symbol is determined to be "winning symbol 3". has been done. On the other hand, if you win in the lottery of a regular symbol in the "time saving state", the winning type is determined to be "long open 2" regardless of the random number per symbol type (any number from 0 to 65535). It is shown that the normal stop symbol is determined to be "winning symbol 4". In addition, by referring to the normal symbol hit type determination table T6, it is possible to specify "normal symbol stop symbol data" (not shown) corresponding to the ordinary symbol stop symbol.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T7 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) to determine the fluctuation time of the common symbol according to the lottery result and winning type of the common symbol. It is. In FIG. 13(C), for example, when the lottery result of the ordinary figure in the non-time saving state is "win" and the winning type is "long open 1", the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure is determined to be "30 seconds". It has been shown that Further, for example, it is shown that when the lottery result of the common symbol in the time saving state is "lose", the fluctuation time of the common symbol is determined to be "1 second".

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T8 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the regular figure stop symbol (general figure stop symbol data). This is the table being referenced. In FIG. 14(A), for example, when the normal pattern stopping pattern is "winning pattern 1", the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be "opening pattern 11", and for example, when the normal pattern stopping pattern is "winning pattern 1", the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be "opening pattern 11", and 4, the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 14." FIG. 14(B) shows the contents of each open pattern 11 to 14. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once with an opening (OP) time of 6 seconds, an opening time of 5 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 1 second. In opening patterns 11 and 12, the electric chew 22 is opened once with an opening (OP) time of 0.01 seconds, an opening time of 0.02 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 seconds. In the opening pattern 14, the electric chew 22 is opened once with an opening (OP) time of 0.01 seconds, an opening time of 3 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 seconds. However, the opening of this electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls are won (regular number of winnings, maximum 2).

FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening pattern determination table T9. The big winning hole opening pattern determination table T9 is based on the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole opening pattern determined by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) according to the special pattern stopping pattern (special pattern stopping pattern data). This table is referred to in order to determine the opening pattern of the winning opening 35. In FIG. 15(A), the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", "13H", "15H", "16H", "21H", "22H", "23H", "31H", " 32H" or "33H", the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 21", and the special figure stop symbol data is "14H" or " 17H", the opening pattern is determined to be "Opening pattern 22", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "24H", "25H", "34H", "35H", "36H", or "37H" , it is shown that the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23". FIG. 15(B) shows the contents of each open pattern 21-23. In the opening pattern 21, after the opening (OP) for 6 seconds, in the 1st to 15th R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened once for the opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, after the opening (OP) for 4 seconds, in the 1st round, the second big prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 1.6 seconds, and in the 2nd to 6th rounds, the number of openings is increased. Open the first grand prize opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) once, and from 7th to 16th R, open the first grand prize opening 30 once with an opening time of 0.1 seconds. Perform opening (short opening). In the opening pattern 23, after the opening (OP) for 0.01 seconds, in the 1st round, the second grand prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 1.6 seconds, and in the 2nd to 16th rounds, The first big prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening). However, the first grand prize opening 30 and the second grand prize opening 35 will be opened even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls are won (regular number of prizes, maximum 9). Closed.

4. Explanation of Jackpot etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "big wins", "small wins", and "losses" as a result of special symbol drawings (big winning/small winning drawings). In the case of a "jackpot", the "jackpot symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of a "small win", the "small win symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "losing", the "losing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When a jackpot is won, a ``jackpot game (second special game)'' is executed to open the first jackpot 30 in an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (jackpot type) that is stopped and displayed. "Small winning game (first special game)" in which when a small winning is won, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once in an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed (small winning type). is executed. When a game ball enters the V area 39 inside the second big prize opening 35 during execution of a small winning game, the first big winning opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of small winning that has been won. A "jackpot game (second special game)" to open the game is executed. Incidentally, a jackpot game that is executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a jackpot win is also referred to as a "type 1 jackpot game." Further, the jackpot game executed based on the passage of the game ball to the V area 39 is also referred to as a "type 2 jackpot game." In addition, jackpot games and small win games are also called "special games." This special game may include a round in which the big prize opening is opened multiple times in one round.

The jackpot game includes multiple round games that open the first big prize opening 30 (unit opening game), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and after the final round game ends. It includes an ending (ED). Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the first big winning hole 30 between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The small winning games include a small winning opening game in which the second large winning opening 35 is opened, an opening (pre-opening interval) before the small winning opening game starts, and an ending (closing) after the small winning opening game ends. (post-interval).

There are multiple types of jackpots. Here, the jackpot types are set as "15R time saving 99 times jackpot A to E", "15R time saving 15 times jackpot A, B", and "15R time saving 5 times jackpot A to D". All of these jackpots are jackpots in which the game state is controlled to the "time saving state and high base state" described later after executing a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) in which the first big prize opening 30 is opened for 15R. . On the other hand, these wins differ in the number of times the "time saving state and high base state" ends after the jackpot game. Here, the "time saving number" is the number of variable displays (variable display) of special symbols that can be executed in the "time saving state and high base state" after the jackpot game, and is set in advance for each jackpot type. For example, in "15R Time Saving 99 Jackpots A to E", the number of time savings is 99 times, and in "15R Time Saving 15 Jackpots A, B", the number of time savings is 15 times. Note that the "time saving state and high base state" ends when a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed even before the time saving number is achieved.

There are multiple types of small wins. Here, the small win types are "16R normal small win A, B", "16R time saving 5 times small win A, B", "16R time saving 10 times small win", "16R time saving 15 times small win", "16R time saving small win" 99 small wins A and B are set. In these small wins, first, a small win game is executed, and when a game ball passes through the V area 39 (V passage), a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) is executed. Therefore, in a small win, the opening of the second big winning hole 35 as a small winning game corresponds to the 1R, and the jackpot game that opens the first big winning hole 30 over 15R, which is executed after that when V passes, is This corresponds to 2Rth to 16thR. If V does not pass in the small winning game, the jackpot game will not be executed. Here, the "16R (actually 5R) normal small win" is a small win that is virtually impossible to pass through V. On the other hand, "16R time saving 5 times small win", "16R time saving 10 times small win", "16R time saving 15 times small win", "16R time saving 99 times small win" are small wins that can pass V. . Whether or not it is possible to pass the V during the small winning game can be set by the operation pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 and the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. Specifically, the details are as follows.

For each of the above-mentioned small wins, the second large winning opening 35 is opened once for 1.6 seconds in the small winning game after winning (FIG. 15). On the other hand, the opening time in the small win game differs depending on the type of small win. Specifically, "16R normal small win" (opening pattern 22) has an opening time of 4 seconds, "16R time shortened 5 times small win", "16R time shortened 10 times small win", "16R time shortened 15 times small win" The opening time for "win" and "16R time saving 99 small wins" (opening pattern 23) is 0.01 seconds. The reason why the opening time of the small winning game differs depending on the small winning type is that the opening timing of the second big prize opening 35 for the V opening/closing member 71, which is moving in a constant motion from the start of the opening, is changed. It's for a reason. Here, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for 4 seconds after opening for 0.01 seconds when the small winning game is started. Since the opening pattern 22 is such that the second big prize opening 35 is opened 4 seconds after the start of the small winning game, the V opening/closing member 71 closes 0.01 seconds after the second big winning opening 35 is opened. become. Therefore, in the "16R normal small win", it is virtually impossible to pass V during the small win game. On the other hand, in the opening pattern 23, the second big prize opening 35 and the V opening/closing member 71 are opened at the same time 0.01 seconds after the start of the small winning game, and both continue to be opened for 1.6 seconds, leading to the second big prize winning. The V opening/closing member 71 closes 2.4 seconds after the opening 35 closes. Therefore, in "16R time-saving 5 times small win", "16R time-saving 10 times small win", "16R time-saving 15 times small win", and "16R time-saving 99 times small win", it is possible to pass V during the small win game. ing.

"16R time-saving 5 times small win", "16R time-saving 10 times small win", "16R time-saving 15 times small win", "16R time-saving 99 times small win" is a jackpot if the jackpot game is executed after the small win game. This is a win that controls the gaming state after the game to the "time saving state and high base state" which will be described later. "16R time saving 5 times small win", "16R time saving 10 times small win", "16R time saving 15 times small win", "16R time saving 99 times small win" are the number of time savings in "time saving state and high base state" respectively. different. For example, in "16R time saving 10 times small win", the number of time savings is 10 times, and in "16R time saving 15 times small win", the time saving number is 15 times. On the other hand, the "16R normal small win" is a win that, when a jackpot game is executed, controls the gaming state to the "non-time saving state and low base state" described later after the jackpot game. However, since the "16R normal small win" is a small win that is virtually impossible to pass through V, a jackpot game is almost never executed.

All small wins in the special drawing 1 lottery during the non-time saving state are "16R normal small wins" in which it is virtually impossible to pass V. On the other hand, the distribution ratio of small wins in the special drawing 2 lottery during the time-saving state is 50% for "16R time-saving 5 times small win", 25% for "16R time-saving 10 times small win", and "16R time-saving 15 times small win". ” was 12.5%, “16R time saving 99 small wins” was 12.5%, and “16R regular small wins” were not included. Since the probability of winning a jackpot is the same between the special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 drawing, the probability of winning either a "big hit" or a "small win where a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) is executed" is: The price of the special drawing 2 lottery in the time saving state is higher than that of the special drawing 1 drawing in the non-time saving state. In this way, in the gaming machine 1, the game ball is hit to the right and placed in the second starting port 21 during the time saving state, rather than the game ball being hit to the left and placed in the first starting port 20 in the non-time saving state. The setting is such that it is more advantageous for the player to win a prize.

In the gaming machine 1, there are "wins" and "losses" as a result of normal symbol drawings (winning drawings). In the case of "winning", the "winning symbol" is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 42. At the time of "losing", the "losing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 42. When a win is won, a "win game (normal game)" as an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 is executed in an opening pattern according to the type of the stopped and displayed normal symbol (type of win). In this winning game (normal game), the electric chew may be released multiple times during one round. A winning game (normal game) includes one round game (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the round game ends. . There are multiple types of hits. Here, "Long Open 1", "Long Open 2", "Short Open 1", and "Short Open 2" are set as the winning types. These wins have different variable times, opening times, opening times, and ending times.

5. Explanation of the gaming state The gaming control microcomputer 81 of the gaming machine 1 can execute "variable time reduction control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42, respectively. It is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 to shorten the fluctuation time is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the fluctuation time is not shortened is simply "non-time saving state". ”. In the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the variable display to the time of derivation and display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12) that is determined so that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is selected more often in a time saving state than in a non-time saving state. The fluctuation pattern is determined using In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the variable time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, compared to the case where the variable time reduction control is not executed, the variation of the special symbol A short variation time is more likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special drawings are consumed becomes faster, and effective winnings in the starting opening (winnings that can be stored as reserved special drawings) are more likely to occur. Therefore, players can aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the variable time reduction control for normal symbols when in the time saving state, and does not execute it when in the non-time saving state. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 13) that is determined so that a fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time is selected more often in a time-saving state than in a non-time-saving state. The fluctuation pattern is determined using In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the variable time reduction control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, compared to the case where the variable time reduction control is not executed, the variation of the normal symbol A short variation time is more likely to be selected as the display variation time.

Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game tends to be longer than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 13). Even in a non-time saving state, if you win "Long Open 1" in the normal symbol lottery, the opening pattern of the electric chew will be "Open Pattern 11" and the long opening time will be 5 seconds, but the winning type will be "Long Open 1". The probability of being sorted into "Open 1" is as low as 31/65536, and in most cases, even if you win, the opening time will be 0.02 seconds. On the other hand, in the time-saving state, if a winner is won, the opening time of the electric chew is always 3 seconds, so in fact, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time-saving state. It can be said that it is easy to occur. That is, in the time saving state, it can be said that the game control microcomputer 81 executes open time extension control on the electric chew 22. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42 and the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, there is a case where these controls are not executed. In comparison, the electric chew 22 is opened frequently, and the game ball enters the second starting port 21 frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, a state where these controls are being executed is called a "high base state", and a state where these controls are not being executed is called a "low base state". In a high base state, you can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state does not need to execute all of the above controls. That is, by executing one or more of the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42 and the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, the electric chew 22 It would be good if it were easy to open. Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being associated with the time saving state.

In gaming machine 1, "15R time saving 99 times jackpot A to E", "15R time saving 15 times jackpot A, B", "15R time saving 5 times jackpot A to D", "16R time saving 99 times small win", "16R time saving" The gaming state after a jackpot game executed by winning "15 times small win", "16R time saving 10 times small win", or "16R time saving 5 times small win" is "time saving state and high base state" . In the "time saving state and high base state", the variable display (variable display) of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (5, 10, 15, or 99 times), or when a jackpot is won. The game ends when the jackpot game is executed. The gaming state after winning the "16R normal small win" and playing the jackpot game is "non-time saving state and low base state". This gaming state is also called the "normal gaming state." Note that when playing the gaming machine 1 for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is this normal gaming state. Here, the "time-saving state and high base state" is also simply referred to as the "time-saving state", and the "non-time-saving state and low base state" is also simply referred to as the "non-time-saving state".

In the high base state (time saving state), the game can proceed more advantageously if the game ball enters the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. This is because the electric chew 22 is easier to open compared to the low base state (non-time saving state), and it is easier to win a prize in the second starting port 21 than to win a prize in the first starting port 20. be. Therefore, in the high base state, the game ball is hit to the right in order to enter the second starting port 21 while passing the game ball to the first gate 28 which is the trigger for the normal symbol lottery. This allows you to get more starting prizes (winning into the starting hole) than if you hit left-handed. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, even during the jackpot game, the game is played with the right hand. On the other hand, in the low base state, the game can be progressed more advantageously if the game ball enters the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the ball to the left. This is because the electric chew 22 is more difficult to open than in the high base state, and winning a prize in the first starting port 20 is easier than winning in the second starting port 21. Therefore, in the low base state, the game ball is hit to the left in order to enter the first starting port 20 while passing the game ball to the second gate 29, which is the trigger for the normal symbol lottery. This allows you to win more starting prizes than if you hit right-handed. On the other hand, even in the low base state (non-time saving state), if you win "Long Open 1" by passing the game ball to the second gate 29, the electric chew 22 will be opened for 5 seconds, so the 2. Hit the game ball to the right to make it enter the starting hole 21. After closing the electric chew 22, perform the left-handed shot again.

6. Operation of the game control microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 4) will be described based on FIGS. 16 to 34. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. As explained below, the game control microcomputer 81 reads out the program stored in the main ROM 83 and functions as a win/fail determination means, a symbol control means, a winning game execution means, a game state control means, and a winning type selection means. (See, for example, FIGS. 22, 27-29, 31, and 32).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83. In the main control main processing, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial settings (step S001). Initial settings include, for example, setting the main CPU 82 and resetting various flags, statuses, counters, and the like. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initial settings are executed only once after the power is turned on, and are not executed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits interrupt processing (step S002), and performs normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values (random value per special symbol, type random value per special symbol, reach random value, The fluctuation pattern random value, the random value per normal symbol, the type random value per normal symbol) are updated by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 allows an interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, main side timer interrupt processing (step S005) can be executed. The main side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined period (for example, a 4 msec period). That is, the main side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, every 4 msec). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing ends and until the next main side timer interrupt processing starts, the updating processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating processing is repeatedly executed. . Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the main side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 16: step S005). In the main side timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 8(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 16) described above. In other words, the update processing of various random number counter values is performed during the execution period of the main side timer interrupt processing and other periods (the period from the end of the main side timer interrupt processing until the start of the next main side timer interrupt processing). It is carried out both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data to the main RAM 84 for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning opening. Set in buffer. The various sensors are, for example, the first starting hole sensor 20a, the second starting hole sensor 21a, the first big winning hole sensor 30a, the second big winning hole sensor 35a, and the normal winning hole sensor 27a (FIG. 4).

After the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs starting port sensor detection processing (step S103), normal operation processing (step S104), special operation processing (step S105), V opening/closing member control processing (step S106), and V area control processing. The sensor detection process (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the V area sensor detection process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pending ball number process (step S108). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the special symbol 1 reserved ball number, special symbol 2 reserved ball number, and normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the main RAM 84. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the number of reserved balls command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84. The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the number of reserved balls, and includes information regarding the number of reserved balls for special pattern 1, the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2, and the number of reserved balls for normal symbols. . After setting the number of reserved balls command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

After processing the number of reserved balls, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S109). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the commands and the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the above processes to the sub control board 90. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S110). In other processes, for example, the second special figure holding display 43b is controlled to display the number based on the number of reserved balls for special figure 2, which will be described later, and the first special figure is displayed based on the number of reserved balls for special figure 1. The hold display 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 17: Step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the game ball has passed through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201). This determination is made depending on whether a game ball is detected by the first gate sensor 28a or the second gate sensor 29a. If the game ball has not passed through either the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through either the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "1 (upper limit)" or not. A determination is made (step S202). The number of normal symbols reserved is the number of normal symbols reserved, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of regular symbols reserved. If the number of normal symbols reserved balls is "1" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal symbols reserved balls is "0" (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbols reserved balls (step S203), normal symbol random number acquisition processing is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 controls the value of the random number counter per normal symbol (Figure 8: value of label-TRND-H) and the value of the type counter per normal symbol (value of label-TRND-HS). ), and stores the obtained random number group in the first storage area of the general pattern reservation storage area 86 of the main RAM 84.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 21 or not. This determination is made depending on whether or not a game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 21a. If no game ball has entered the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. If the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of special drawing 2 reserved balls is "1 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special symbols 2 reserved balls is the number of reserved 2nd special symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved 2nd special symbols. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208 ). Here, the value of the random number counter per special symbol (Figure 8: value of label-TRND-A), the value of the type random number counter per special symbol (value of label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (Figure 8: value of label-TRND-AS), FIG. 8: Value of label-TRND-RC) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (FIG. 8: Value of label-TRND-T1) are obtained. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (advance determination buffer) different from the second special figure reservation storage area 85b for the special figure 2 advance determination process to be described later. hold). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). In the special figure 2 preliminary determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary jackpot determination with reference to the jackpot determination table T1. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires the jackpot random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reference jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value to pre-determine whether or not it is a jackpot. If the result of the jackpot preliminary determination is "jackpot", the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot type preliminary determination. In the jackpot type preliminary determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires the jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires the fluctuating pattern random value and the reach random value as the determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer through the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process. do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a preliminary determination command. The preliminary determination command includes a jackpot preliminary determination result (in the case of a jackpot, a jackpot type preliminary determination result), and a fluctuation pattern preliminary determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created advance determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or not. This determination is made depending on whether a game ball is detected by the first starting port sensor 20a. If no game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "4 (upper limit)" ( Step S211). The number of reserved special symbols 1 is the number of reserved first special symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved first special symbols. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is ended. When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, similarly to the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208), the value of the random number counter per special symbol, the value of the type random number counter per special symbol, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are obtained. get. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores (retains) the acquired random number group in a buffer (advance determination buffer) different from the first special figure holding storage area 85a for the special figure 1 preliminary determination process. let After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). The special figure 1 preliminary determination process is similar to the above-mentioned special figure 2 preliminary determination process.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 17: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process moves to step S540. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a stopped state (has the variable stop time elapsed) (step S502). If the normal symbol is being displayed in a stopped state (step S502: YES), the process moves to step S531. If the normal symbols are not being displayed in a stopped state (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbols are changing (step S503). If the normal symbol is changing (step S503: YES), the process moves to step S521. If the normal symbols are not changing (step S503: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls of the normal symbols is "0" (step S504). If the number of reserved pitches is "0" (step S504: YES), this process ends. If the number of reserved balls is not "0" (step S504: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S505). Therefore, when a game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 with the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol being "0", the normal symbol is temporarily The number of reserved balls becomes "1", and then, in this step S505, the reservation is exhausted and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes "0". This also applies to the number of reserved balls in the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 18), the number of reserved special symbols becomes "1", and then in step S1404 and step S212 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21), which will be described later. In S1410, the reservation is exhausted and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Incidentally, the decrement of the number of normal symbols reserved balls (the extinguishment of the ordinary symbols reserved) is executed together with the clearing process to clear the reservation information (various random values) stored in the first storage area of the ordinary symbols reserved storage area 86. Ru.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T5 (FIG. 13(A)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first generates a random number value per normal symbol as a judgment value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first normal symbol pending) of the normal symbol pending storage area 86. Read out. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a win using the normal symbol win random number value, the gaming state (whether it is a time saving state or not), and the normal symbol win determination table T5. For example, in a non-time saving state, if the random number per normal symbol is "0" to "254", it will be determined as a "win", and if the random number per normal symbol is "255" otherwise, it will be determined as a "lost". ” (FIG. 13(A)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the normal symbol per type determination table T6 (FIG. 13(B)) to determine the type of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol stop symbol) (step S507). Specifically, if the game control microcomputer 81 has won the winning determination in the above (step S506), first, the game control microcomputer 81 first selects the winning normal symbol stored in the first storage area of the normal symbol holding storage area 86. Read the type random value. Then, the winning type and the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol) are determined using the normal symbol per type random number value, the gaming state (whether it is a time saving state or not), and the normal symbol per type type determination table T6. For example, in a non-time saving state, if the random number per normal symbol is between "0" and "30", the winning type is determined to be "long open 1" and the normal symbol is determined to be "winning symbol 1". . If the normal symbol per type random number value is "100" to "170", the winning type is determined to be "short open 1", and the normal symbol is determined to be "winning symbol 2". If the normal symbol per type random value is other than that, the winning type is determined to be "short open 2" and the normal symbol is determined to be "winning symbol 3" (FIG. 13(B)). On the other hand, in the case of a "lose" in the above hit determination, a "lose symbol" is set as a normal symbol.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 13(C)) (step S508). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a normal symbol variation pattern using the gaming state (whether it is a time saving state or not), the winning determination result, the winning type, and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7. do. For example, in a non-time saving state, if the winning type is "Long Open 1", the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds". Further, for example, in the time saving state, if the hit determination is a "lose", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (FIG. 13(C)). The game control microcomputer 81 sets a normal symbol variation start command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of variation of the normal symbols and the variation time (step S509). The normal symbol variation start command includes information regarding the normal stop symbol data and information regarding the normal symbol variation pattern. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the variable display of the normal symbols and ends this process (step S510).

In step S521, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S508 (FIG. 13(C)). If the variable time has not ended (step S521: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the fluctuating display of the normal symbols continues. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes the fluctuation display of the normal symbol to the normal symbol specified in step S507 (the normal symbol for a hit or the normal symbol for a loss). (Step S522). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a normal symbol fluctuation stop command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the normal symbol fluctuation stop (step S523). After that, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the normal symbol stop time and finishes this process (step S524). Here, the normal symbol stop time is 0.5 seconds.

In step S531, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol fluctuation stop time has elapsed. If the stop time has not elapsed (step S531: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the stop display of the normal symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (step S531: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 executes this process if the hit determination in the above (step S506) is a "loss" (step S532: NO). Finish. On the other hand, in the case of "win" in the above hit determination (step S532: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sends the normal symbol opening to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of the opening of the winning game (normal game). The command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S533). Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 81 sets an electric chew opening pattern (step S534). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 14(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the type of normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol data) determined in the above (step S507) and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8 to release the electric chew 22. Select a pattern. Here, for example, when the normal symbol is "winning symbol 1", "opening pattern 11" is selected, and when the normal symbol is "winning symbol 4", "opening pattern 14" is selected (see FIG. 14). . After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts operating the electric chew according to the selected opening pattern (step S535), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, if the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S540). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes entered into the electric chew 22 has reached the specified maximum number of prizes (for example, 2 pieces), or the opening time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the time to close the electric chew 22 has arrived. One of the things that has been achieved is that it has been fulfilled. The opening time of the electric chew 22 is the opening time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S534 (see FIG. 14). If the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S540: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sends the normal symbol ending to the sub-control board 90 in order to inform the sub-control board 90 of the start of the ending of the game (normal game). The command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S541). Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chew 22 to stop its operation (step S542), and ends this process.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 17: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the grand prize device (first grand prize device 31 and second grand prize device 36) is divided into five stages, and each stage is divided into "1" of "special operation status", They are called "2", "3", "4", and "5". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol standby processing (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, special symbol hit determination, special symbol variation pattern selection, etc. are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation process, output of a fluctuation stop command etc. is executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, an opening command is output when a big hit or a small hit occurs. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO, step S1307: YES), special electric accessory processing 1 (jackpot game) is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing 1, a jackpot game (second type special game) is executed. When the "special operation status" is "5" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305, step S1307: NO), special electric accessories processing 2 (small winning game) is performed (step S1309). In the special electric accessory processing 2, a small winning game (first type special game) is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: Step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the number of reserved balls (special symbol 2 reserved) in the second starting port 21 is "0" (step S1401). When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), in other words, the random value group acquired due to the winning in the second starting opening 21 is stored in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. If there is no memory, the process moves to step S1407. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol hit determination processing (step S1402) and special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (step S1403). Execute. Details of these processes will be described later. After the special symbol variation pattern selection process, the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 clears the reservation information (various random numbers) stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (step S1405). Through the above steps, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the pending image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b is shifted to the pending digested image display area side, and is displayed as the pending digested image 9C. be done. Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been used up. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 variation start process, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to start variable display of the second special symbol, and the special operation status is set to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special symbol 2 variation start command) set in the special symbol 2 variation start process includes information regarding the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit determination process (step S1402) and special symbol variation. Information regarding the variation pattern set in the pattern selection process (step S1403) is included.

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of reserved balls for the first starting port 20 (special chart 1 reserved) is "0". It is determined whether or not there is one (step S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to the winning in the first starting slot 20 is stored in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. If there is no memory, the process moves to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol hit determination processing (step S1408) and special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (step S1409). Execute. Details of these processes will be described later. After the special fluctuation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the storage location of the reservation information (various random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a from the current position to the side from which it is read. At the same time as shifting by one, the reservation information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). For example, if pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared and the pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the pending information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. Through the above steps, the first special figure reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It is shifted to the held digested image display area side and displayed as the held digested image 9C. In addition, when there is reservation information in the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, the reservation image 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas (of the four reservation images 9A, the right The second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A) are each shifted one position to the right. Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special symbol reservation has been used up. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 variation start process, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to start variable display of the first special symbol, and the special operation status is set to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the variation start command (special symbol 1 variation start command) set in the special symbol 1 variation start process includes information regarding the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit determination process (step S1408) and special symbol variation. Information regarding the variation pattern set in the pattern selection process (step S1409) is included.

In step S1407, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by turning on/off a demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If it is a standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not a standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for a predetermined standby time to elapse, and then sets a customer waiting standby command to display a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1414), this process ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, the extinguishment of the second special figure reservation is executed in priority to the extinguishment of the first special figure reservation.

[Special symbol hit determination process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol hit determination process (FIG. 21: steps S1402 and S1408). The hit determination process for special figure 2 (step S1402) and the hit determination process for special figure 1 (step S1408) have the same process flow, so they will be explained together. In the special symbol hit determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the special symbol hit determination table T1 (FIG. 9(A)) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a random value per special symbol as a determination value. For example, in the hit determination process for special symbol 2, the random number value per special symbol stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second reserved special symbol) of the second special symbol reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the hit determination process for special symbol 1, the random number value per special symbol stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special symbol reserved) of the first special symbol reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the special symbol winning determination table T1 to refer to and the read special symbol winning random number value to determine whether or not it is a big hit or not and whether or not it is a small hit. In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "properness determination means."

If the result of the special symbol hit determination is "jackpot" (step S1503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1505) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a special symbol per type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the hit determination process for special figure 2, the special symbol hit type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the hit determination process for special figure 1, the special symbol hit type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read special symbol hit type random number value and the special symbol hit type determination table T3 (FIGS. 10 and 11). In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "winning type selection means". After determining the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (jackpot symbol) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the win type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1509), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is not a "big hit" (step S1503: NO) but a "small hit" (step S1510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the small hit flag and (Step S1512), the small hit type is determined (Step S1514). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the special symbol hit type random number value as a determination value, similar to the determination of the jackpot type. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the small winning type based on the read special symbol winning type random number value and the special symbol winning type determination table T3 (FIGS. 10 and 11). After determining the small winning type, the special symbol stop symbol data (small winning symbol) corresponding to the specified small winning type is set in the winning type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1516), and this process ends.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination is not a "big hit" or "small hit" but a "loss" (steps S1503, S1510: NO), special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is provided in the main RAM 84. The winning type is set in the jackpot type buffer (step S1518), and the process ends.

[Special symbol variation pattern selection process]
23 and 24 are flowcharts of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 21: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process of special figure 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1 (step S1409) have the same processing flow, so they will be explained together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the gaming state is a time saving state (step S1600). A determination as to whether or not the time saving state is established is made based on whether the time saving flag is ON or not. If it is in the time saving state (step S1600: YES), the process moves to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (step S1602).

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern by referring to the table for non-time saving state jackpots out of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12). (Step S1603). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a fluctuating pattern random value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process for special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process for the special figure 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reserved) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 and the variation pattern random value. Here, as a table for non-time saving state jackpots, of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. , the part whose variation pattern is "P14" in special drawing 2) is referred to (the address is set). From the read variation pattern random number value, either "P1" or "P2" is selected as the variation pattern in the special figure 1, and "P14" is selected as the variation pattern in the special figure 2 regardless of the variation pattern random value.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the small jackpot flag is ON (step S1604). If the small hit flag is ON (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines the variation pattern by referring to the table for non-time-saving small winnings in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12). A selection is made (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a variable pattern random value as a determination value, similar to step S1603 above. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the portion of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 that corresponds to a small win in a non-time saving state and the variation pattern random value. Here, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the part corresponding to the small hit in the non-time saving state is the part where the variation pattern is "P3" in special figure 1, and the part where the variation pattern is "P15" in special figure 2. Therefore, these are selected regardless of the fluctuation pattern random value.

In step S1604, when the small hit flag is OFF (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the reach random number is a reach established random number (step S1606). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first piece of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure pending) of the first special figure pending storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 9(B)) and the reach random value to determine whether or not there is a reach. Here, since it is a non-time saving state, the reach is determined based on the table for the non-time saving state (the part where the reach judgment value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13") of the reach judgment table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random value is a reach establishment random value (step S1606: YES), that is, in the case of a loss with reach, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the reach in the non-time saving state from the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4. A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for presence/loss (step S1607). Here, as a table for a loss with reach in a non-time saving state, a part of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. ”, “P5” part, and in special figure 2, the variation pattern is “P14” part) are referred to. In the special figure 1, either "P4" or "P5" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value. In special figure 2, "P14" is selected as the variation pattern regardless of the read variation pattern random value.

If the reach random value is not the reach establishment random value (step S1606: NO), that is, if there is no reach and there is no reach, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the reach in the non-time saving state from the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4. A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for no loss (step S1608). Here, as a table for a no-reach loss in a non-time saving state, of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. ”, “P7” part, and in special figure 2, the variation pattern is “P15” part) are referred to. In the special figure 1, either "P6" or "P7" is selected as the variation pattern from the readout variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) for the special figure 1. In special figure 2, "P15" is selected as the variation pattern regardless of the read variation pattern random value. In special figure 1, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of balls on hold, so a shortening variation function is activated according to the number of balls on hold. That is, in special map 1, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", more fluctuation patterns with short fluctuation times are selected than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". It is supposed to be done. Thereby, when the number of reserved balls is large, it is possible to increase the speed at which special symbols are reserved.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (FIG. 24: step S1612). Thereafter, the processing in steps S1613 to S1618 is the same as the processing in steps S1603 to S1608 described above, except for the following points, so a description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processing in steps S1613 to S1618 and the processing in steps S1603 to S1608 is that in steps S1613, S1615, S1617, and S1618, the part of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 that is referred to is the previously described step S1603, S1605, and S1607. , S1608. Specifically, in steps S1603, S1605, S1607, and S1608, the table for the non-time saving state of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 is referred to, whereas in steps S1613, S1615, S1617, and S1618, A table for time-saving states is referenced. For example, in the case of step S1615, the part of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 that corresponds to the small hit in the time-saving state (the part where the fluctuation pattern is "P9" in special symbol 1, and the fluctuation pattern is "P17" in special symbol 2) ) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1617, the part of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 that corresponds to the loss with reach in the short time state (the part where the fluctuation pattern is "P10" in special symbol 1, and the fluctuation pattern is "P10" in special symbol 2) "P18" part) is referred to.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 17: Step S109). This starts the variable display of special symbols.

[Special symbol fluctuation processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 20: Step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The special symbol fluctuation time is a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-mentioned special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 23 and 24) (see FIG. 12). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). . In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the stoppage of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs processing to stop the variable display of special symbols on the special symbol display 41 at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data (stop display of special symbols). In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "symbol control means". In addition, the stop display time of the special symbol can be arbitrarily set according to the lottery result of the special symbol 1 or the lottery result of the special symbol 2. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 20: Step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol stop time has elapsed (step S1800). If the stop time has not elapsed (step S1800: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (step S1800: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for switching the game state according to the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the time saving state, and the contents will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802).

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a jackpot opening pattern according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the big winning hole opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 15), determines the opening pattern of the big winning hole from the special figure stop symbol data, and uses the determined opening pattern. set. Here, no matter what type of jackpot it is (even if the special pattern stop symbol data is 11H to 13H, 15H, 16H, 21H to 23H, 31H to 33H), "Open pattern 21" is used as the opening pattern of the winning hole. " is set. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot won in conjunction with the setting of the opening pattern of the jackpot. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, regardless of the type of jackpot, "15" is set in the round counter (FIG. 15(B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S1804), and if it is ON (step S1804: YES), it is switched to OFF (step S1805). As a result, while the type 1 jackpot game is being executed, the game is in a non-time saving state. Thereafter, in order to start the type 1 jackpot game, an opening command for the type 1 jackpot game is set (step S1806), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (step S1807). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1808), and this processing ends. By setting the special operation status to "4", the process shifts to special electric accessory process 1 (jackpot game).

In step S1802, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the small jackpot flag is ON (step S1810). When the small win flag is ON (step S1810: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an opening pattern for the large winning hole according to the type of small win won (step S1811). Specifically, similar to step S1803 described above, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the big winning hole opening pattern determination table T9, determines the opening pattern of the big winning hole from the special figure stop symbol data, and determines the opening pattern of the big winning hole. Set the opening pattern. Here, for example, when the small hit type is "16R normal small win A" (special figure stop symbol data is "14H"), "opening pattern 22" is set as the opening pattern of the winning hole. Further, for example, when the small win type is "16R time saving 5 times small win A" (special figure stop symbol data is "24H"), "opening pattern 23" is set as the opening pattern of the winning hole. Together with the setting of the opening pattern of the big prize opening, the value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of small winning won. Here, regardless of the type of small win, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 15(B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V opening/closing member operation flag to ON (step S1812). The V opening/closing member operation flag is a flag indicating that it is the period in which the V opening/closing member 71 is to be operated. In the V opening/closing member control process (FIG. 33), when the V opening/closing member operation flag is ON, the V opening/closing member 71 is operated in a predetermined operation pattern. Here, in any small winning game, the V opening/closing member 71 operates so as to be closed for 0.01 seconds as an opening after the small winning game, then opened for 4 seconds, and then closed. In addition, when the small hit flag is ON, unlike when the jackpot flag is ON, even if the time saving flag is ON, it is not switched to OFF. Thereafter, in order to start the small winning game, a small winning opening command is set (step S1813), and the opening of the small winning game is started (step S1814). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "5" (step S1815), and the present process ends. By setting the special operation status to "5", the process shifts to special electric accessory process 2 (small winning game).

In step S1810, when the small hit flag is OFF (step S1810: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1820) and ends this process. As a result, neither the jackpot game nor the small win game is started, and the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) again, and the special symbol hit determination for the next hold is executed.

[Game state management processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 26: Step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the time saving flag is ON or not. If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), that is, in a non-time-saving state, the process skips to step S2040. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), that is, in the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the second special symbol (step S2010). When the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the second special symbol (step S2010: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the values of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2 by 1 (step S2010: YES). S2015). The "first time saving counter C1" counts the number of changes in the second special symbol executed during the time saving state. The "second time saving counter C2" counts the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the time saving state (the total number of changes in the first special symbol and the number of changes in the second special symbol). The initial values respectively set in the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2 are determined based on the setting table of FIG. 30 in the game state setting process (FIG. 29) described later. On the other hand, when the variation is a variation of the first special symbol (step S2010: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements only the value of the second time saving counter C2 by 1 (step S2020).

The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether at least one of the values of the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2 has become "0" as a result of step S2015 or step S2020 (step S2030). If neither value of the first time saving counter C1 nor the second time saving counter C2 is "0" (step S2030: NO), the process skips to step S2040. When the value of at least one of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2 is "0" (step S2030: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2035). Thereby, the gaming state is switched from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. That is, when the number of variations of the special symbols executed in the time saving state reaches the number shown in FIG. 30, the gaming state is switched to the non-time saving state.

In step S2040, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The gaming state designation command includes information regarding the current gaming state just set (whether or not it is a time saving state, the respective values of the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter, etc.).

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (jackpot game)]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 1 (FIG. 20: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "jackpot end flag" is a flag indicating that all openings of the first jackpot winning device 31 based on the opening pattern have been completed in the jackpot game currently being executed. If the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process moves to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first jackpot opening 30 is open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process moves to step S2210.

If the first big winning hole 30 is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the first big winning hole 30 (step S2203). . The time (timing) to open the first big prize opening 30 may be, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot game has passed and it is time to start opening in the first round game, or when it is temporarily closed after opening. This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) until the first big prize opening 30 is opened again has elapsed and the time has come to start opening it again. If it is not the time (timing) to open the first big prize opening 30 (step S2203: NO), the process moves to step S2220.

If it is the time (timing) to open the first big winning hole 30 (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs big winning hole opening processing (step S2207). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the first big winning opening 30 according to the opening pattern (FIG. 15(B)) according to the winning type (big winning type or small winning type). When a type 1 jackpot game is being executed, the first jackpot 30 is opened according to the opening pattern 21 regardless of the jackpot type. When a type 2 jackpot game is being executed, the first jackpot 30 is opened according to the opening pattern 22 or the opening pattern 23 depending on the type of small winning. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the special game (small winning game and jackpot game) being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. do. Thereby, the number of rounds of the special game can be notified to the sub-control board 90. In addition, in this embodiment, the first grand prize opening 30 is not opened multiple times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the first big winning hole 30 is opened multiple times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 controls the first big winning hole 30 to be opened only once. It is also possible to determine whether or not it is the first release in the current round, and set the round designation command only in the case of the first release. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In step S2202 described above, if the first big prize opening 30 is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the first big prize opening 30 is satisfied. (Step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes entered into the first grand prize opening 30 in the round game has reached the prescribed maximum number of prizes (for example, 9 prizes per round), or One of the following conditions is satisfied: the time to close has arrived (that is, a predetermined opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed since the first grand prize winning opening 30 was opened). Then, if the condition for closing the first big prize opening 30 is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the first big prize opening 30 is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the first big prize opening 30 (step S2211), and then closes the first big prize opening 30 (step S2211). Finish processing.

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) to open the first big prize opening 30, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the first big prize opening 30 was closed. This is because, as described above, the time (interval time) during which the first big winning hole 30 is closed between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended, depending on whether a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the first big prize opening 30 was closed. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and checks whether the value of the round counter has become "0" or not. A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the prescribed number of round games has not yet been played, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, if the value of the round counter is "0" (step S2226: YES), as a jackpot ending process to end the jackpot game, the ending command of the jackpot game is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2227). , starts the jackpot ending (step S2228). The ending command includes information regarding the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit determination process (FIG. 21). After the jackpot ending starts, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this process ends.

In step S2200 described above, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status. is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: Step S1302) is executed again. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, and ends this process. The game state setting process (FIG. 29) sets the game state (time-saving state or non-time-saving state) after the jackpot game, and in the case of the time-saving state, the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C1 are set according to the winning type. This is a process of setting an initial value (time saving number) in the counter C2.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state setting process (FIG. 28: Step S2234). The gaming control microcomputer 81 functions as a "gaming state control means" by executing the above-mentioned gaming state management process (FIG. 27) and this gaming state setting process. The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the jackpot game executed this time is a time-saving hit (that is, "15R time-saving 5 times jackpot", "15R time-saving 15 times jackpot", "15R time-saving 99 times jackpot", "16R time-saving 5 times small" It is determined whether or not the game is a jackpot game executed in response to a "win", "16R time saving 10 times small win", "16R time saving 15 times small win", "16R time saving 99 times small win") (step S2301) . If the time saving win is not the trigger (step S2301: NO), that is, if the current jackpot game is being executed by the normal win (ie, "16R normal small win"), the process skips to step S2309. On the other hand, if the current jackpot game is being executed in response to a time-saving win (step S2301: YES), the time-saving flag is turned on (step S2302), and the game control microcomputer 81 controls the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter. Setting values shown in a setting table (FIG. 30) to be described later are set in the counter C2 (step S2303). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game is set to the "time saving state and high base state". This "time saving state and high base state" is a condition that either the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times or the next jackpot (type 1 jackpot or type 2 jackpot) is won. It ends when . In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The gaming state designation command includes information regarding the gaming state that has just been set (whether or not it is a time saving state, the respective values of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2, etc.).

FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining a setting table for the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2. This setting table is referred to by the gaming control microcomputer 81 in step S2303 of the gaming state setting process (FIG. 29) described above. In FIG. 30, for example, if the jackpot game executed this time is triggered by "15R time saving 99 times jackpot" or "16R time saving 99 times small win" (special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H") , "15H", "25H", or "37H"), "99" is set in each of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2. For example, if the jackpot game executed this time is triggered by the "16R time saving 10 times small win" (when the special pattern stop symbol data is "35H"), "10" is displayed in the first time saving counter C1. "15" is set in the second time saving counter C2.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small winning game)]
31 and 32 are flowcharts of the special electric accessory processing 2 (FIG. 20: step S1309). The game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "winning game execution means" by executing the above-mentioned special electric accessory processing 1 (big winning game: FIG. 28) and this special electric accessory processing 2 (small winning game). do. The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the small winning end flag is ON (step S2400). "Small winning end flag" is a flag indicating that opening of the second big winning device 36 based on the opening pattern has ended in the small winning game that is being executed. If the small hit end flag is ON (step S2400: YES), the process moves to step S2420. When the small winning end flag is OFF (step S2400: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second big prize opening 35 is open (step S2402). If it is open (step S2402: YES), the process moves to step S2410.

If the second big prize opening 35 is not open (step S2402: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is the time (timing) to open the second big prize opening 35 (step S2404). . The time (timing) to open the second big prize opening 35 is when the opening time of the small win has passed and the time to start opening has arrived. The opening time for the small win is 4 seconds for the open pattern 22 and 0.01 seconds for the open pattern 23. If it is not the time (timing) to open the second big prize opening 35 (step S2404: NO), this process ends. If it is the time (timing) to open the second big winning hole 35 (step S2404: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs big winning hole opening processing (step S2406). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the second big prize opening 35 according to the opening pattern (FIG. 15(B)) according to the small winning type. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2408). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the special game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. Thereby, the number of rounds of the special game can be notified to the sub-control board 90. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In step S2402 described above, if the second grand prize opening 35 is open (step S2402: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the second grand prize opening 35 is satisfied. (Step S2410). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes entered into the second grand prize opening 35 has reached the specified maximum number of prizes (for example, 10), or that the time has come to close the second grand prize opening 35. (That is, a predetermined opening time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the second big prize opening 35 was opened). If the condition for closing the second big prize opening 35 is not satisfied (step S2410: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the second big winning opening 35 is satisfied (step S2410: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the big winning opening closing process to close (block) the second big winning opening 35. (Step S2412). Here, an ending command for the small winning game is also set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 as a small winning ending process for ending the small winning game. After the big winning opening closing process, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2414). This is because the small winning game corresponds to the 1st round. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the small hit end flag to ON (step S2416) and ends this process.

In step S2400 described above, if the small hit end flag is ON (step S2400: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the post-closure interval time (ending time) has elapsed (step S2420). ). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2420: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2420: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the small hit end flag to OFF (step S2422), and also switches the small hit flag to OFF (step S2424). After that, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V flag is ON or not (step S2430). The "V flag" is a flag indicating that a game ball has passed into the V area 39 during the execution of a small winning game, and is a flag that is turned ON in the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 34), which will be described later. . When the V flag is OFF (step S2430: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round counter to "0" (step S3432) and sets the special operation status to "1" in order to not execute the type 2 jackpot game. ” (step S2434), and the process ends. As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: Step S1302) is executed again.

In step S2430 described above, if the V flag is ON (step S2430: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V flag to OFF (step S2436), and sets the jackpot flag to execute the type 2 jackpot game. is turned ON (step S2437), and the special operation status is set to "4" (step S2438). By setting the special operation status to "4", in the next special operation process (FIG. 20), the process shifts to special electric accessory process 1 (jackpot game). After setting the special operation status, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S2440), and if it is ON (step S2440: YES), it is switched to OFF (step S2442). As a result, the game is in a non-time saving state while the type 2 jackpot game is being executed. Thereafter, in order to start the jackpot game, the game control microcomputer 81 sets an opening command for the type 2 jackpot game (step S2444), and starts the opening of the jackpot game (step S2446). Thereby, the game shifts from a small winning game in which the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a short period of time to a type 2 big winning game.

[V opening/closing member control processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member control process (FIG. 17: Step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the V opening/closing member operation flag is ON (step S2500). If the V opening/closing member operation flag is OFF (step S2500: NO), this process ends. If the V opening/closing member operation flag is ON (step S2500: YES), a "V opening/closing member operation process" is performed to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in a predetermined operation pattern (step S2502), and at the same time, during a predetermined period (timing) A "V validity period setting process" is performed in which the passing of the game ball through the V is considered valid (step S2504). When the V opening/closing member operation flag is ON, the opening of the small winning game is started (FIG. 26: Steps S1812, S1814), so the V opening/closing member operation process and the V validity period setting process are performed in accordance with this small winning game. It will be done.

In the V opening/closing member operation process, a timer is set to measure the operating time of the V opening/closing member 71, and based on the timer, the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is turned on when the opening timing of the V opening/closing member 71 comes. , when the timing for closing the V opening/closing member 71 comes, the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is turned OFF. As a result, the V opening/closing member 71 moves in a constant motion from the start of the opening of the small winning game. Specifically, the V opening/closing member 71 is first controlled to a passage blocking state (closed state) for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small winning game, and then controlled to a passage permitting state (open state) for 4 seconds. After that, the passage is blocked (closed state) for 6 seconds.

In the V valid period setting process, a V valid period is set for the constant operation of the V opening/closing member 71 as described above. The "V valid period" is a period during which, when a game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a, the detection is regarded as valid and the V flag is turned ON. The V effective period is from the start of opening of the V area 39 (the point in time when the V opening/closing member 71 is controlled to be in a passing permissible state) until a predetermined time has elapsed. The predetermined time is set to be longer than the opening time of the V area 39 (the time during which the V opening/closing member 71 is controlled to be in a passing permissible state) (here, the opening time of the V area 39 + 1 second). This is because the time lag until the game ball passes through the arrangement position of the V opening/closing member 71 and reaches the V area 39 is taken into consideration. In the V effective period setting process, a timer is set to measure the V effective period, and based on the timer, when it is time to enable the V area 39, the V effective flag is turned ON, and the V area 39 is activated. When the timing to invalidate comes, the V valid flag is turned OFF. In the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 34), which will be described later, it is determined whether or not the V valid period is in progress, depending on whether or not this V valid flag is ON.

After the V opening/closing member operation process and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the operation of the V opening/closing member 71 has ended (step S2506). Specifically, based on the timer set in the V opening/closing member operation process (step S2502), the total operating time from when the V opening/closing member 71 starts a certain operation until it ends (0.01 seconds + 4 seconds + 6 seconds) ) has passed. If the operation of the V opening/closing member 71 has not been completed (step S2506: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the operation of the V opening/closing member 71 has ended (step S2506: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V opening/closing member operation flag to OFF (step S2508), and ends this process.

Here, the relationship between the operation pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 and the opening pattern of the second big prize opening 35 (opening/closing member 32) in the small winning game will be explained. As described above, the V opening/closing member 71 is closed for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small winning game, then opened for 4 seconds, and then closed for 6 seconds. In "16R normal small win" (opening pattern 22), the second large prize opening 35 is closed for 4 seconds from the start of the opening of the small win game, then opened for 1.6 seconds, and then 4.41 Closed for seconds. Therefore, in the opening pattern 22 of "16R normal small win", the V opening/closing member 71 closes 0.01 seconds after the second big prize opening 35 is opened, and the game ball passes through the V during the small winning game. has become virtually impossible. On the other hand, in "16R time saving 5 times small win", "16R time saving 10 times small win", "16R time saving 15 times small win", "16R time saving 99 times small win" (open pattern 23), the second big prize opening 35 is closed for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small winning game, then opened for 1.6 seconds, and then closed for 3 seconds. Therefore, in the opening pattern 23, the second big prize opening 35 and the V opening/closing member 71 are opened simultaneously 0.01 seconds after the start of the small winning game, and both continue to be opened for 1.6 seconds, leading to the second big prize winning. The V opening/closing member 71 closes 2.4 seconds after the opening 35 closes. Therefore, no matter what winning timing a game ball enters the second grand prize opening 35, the game ball can pass through the V area 39. In addition, here, if you continue to shoot the game ball continuously by hitting the right hand, the second prize is set so that the game ball will definitely enter the second prize opening 35 during the period when the second prize winning opening 35 is open. Various devices such as the grand prize device 36 are arranged. Further, the time required for the game ball passing through the second big prize opening 35 to reach the arrangement position of the V opening/closing member 71 is configured to be shorter than 2 seconds. From this, in "16R time-saving 5 times small win", "16R time-saving 10 times small win", "16R time-saving 15 times small win", and "16R time-saving 99 times small win", it is possible to hit right during the small winning game. If you continue to shoot the game ball continuously, the game ball will definitely pass through the V.

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 17: Step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If no game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is a detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V is in the valid period (step S2602). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (step S2504) of the V opening/closing member control process (FIG. 33). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball brushing period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or after it is closed. Here, 1 second is set as the ball brushing period. If it is not within the V validity period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is within the V validity period (step S2602: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603) and sets the V passing command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 ( Step S2604), this process ends. The “V passing command” is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of V passing.

7. Operation of the production control microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided in the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 5) will be explained based on FIGS. 35 to 43. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94. As explained below, the production control microcomputer 91 functions as a production execution means by reading the program stored in the sub ROM 93.

[Sub control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, settings of the sub CPU 92, reset of various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the production control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interruption of the interrupt process (step S4015), and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the production control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the various random number counter values shown in FIG. 8(B) and updates them. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Furthermore, instead of adding up the random numbers one by one, two or more may be added. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the production control microcomputer 91 allows an interrupt for the interrupt process (step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed between the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process and the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35: step S4035). The production control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis process (FIG. 37) will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the production control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the production button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the production control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the production command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process (FIG. 37) to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the like. It is sent to the lamp control board 107. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute display effects according to the received commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes audio production to output audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp effect that controls the light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in accordance with the received commands. After the command transmission process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number updating processing.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step 4300). The performance control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a preliminary determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). The "pre-reading effect determination process" is a process of determining whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect and the pre-reading effect pattern in the case of executing it. In the prefetch performance determination process, a prefetch performance execution determination is made to determine whether or not to execute the prefetch performance, and a prefetch performance pattern selection is performed. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the pre-read performance random number random number, and performs the pre-read performance by referring to the acquired random number value and the pre-read performance pattern determination table T55 stored in the sub ROM 93. It is determined whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect and the pre-reading effect pattern when performing the pre-reading effect. When it is determined that the pre-read effect is to be executed, the selected pre-read effect pattern is stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c.

On the other hand, if the advance determination command is not received from the main control board 80 (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned pre-read effect determination process is skipped. The look-ahead performance is a performance that suggests that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a jackpot, and is executed during the variable performance.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a command for the number of reserved balls has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), a hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the reservation display process, information is set in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 based on the information regarding the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls included in the number of reserved balls command. The values of the first special symbol reservation performance counter, the second special symbol reservation performance counter, and the regular symbol reservation performance counter are updated. Thereby, information on each number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Furthermore, the production control microcomputer 91 controls the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the hold pitch count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If it has been received (step S4455: YES), a variable effect start process (FIG. 38) is performed (step S4460). "Variation performance start processing" is a process of selecting a fluctuation performance pattern (content) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. Details of the variable performance start process will be described later.
On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-described variable effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it has been received (step S4465: YES), the variable effect end process (FIG. 39) is performed (step S4470). The "variable effect end process" is a process for stopping the variable effect, and the details will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-described fluctuating effect end process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If it has been received (step S4475: YES), opening performance pattern determination processing is performed (step S4480). The "opening performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening performance pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (big win game or small win game). In the opening performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sub-subscribes information regarding the special figure stop pattern data that is included in the opening command and is set when determining whether a jackpot or small win has been won. Set it in RAM94. Then, the opening performance start command for starting the selected opening performance is selected in the performance command set area of the sub-RAM 94 by selecting the performance pattern of the opening performance that has been set in advance in accordance with the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores the predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. The image data is read from the image display device 7 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (for example, FIG. 45). In addition, in step S4475, if the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If it has been received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). The "round performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening game performance pattern (content) to be executed during opening of the big prize opening or during an interval between openings in a special game (big winning game or small winning game). In the round performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. do. Then, select a preset round performance performance pattern corresponding to the winning type and number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data, and send a round performance start command to the sub-RAM 94 to start the selected round performance. Set it in the command set area 94b. When the round performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, if the round designation command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the ending command of the jackpot game has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If it has been received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing (FIG. 40) is performed (step S4500). The "ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game. Details of the ending effect pattern determination process will be described later. When the performance control microcomputer 91 receives the ending command of the small winning game from the main control board 80, it performs processing different from the above-described ending performance pattern determination process. In addition, in step S4495, if the ending command of the jackpot game is not received (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4505). If it has been received (step S4505: YES), normal symbol variation production start processing is performed (step S4510). “Normal symbol variation performance start processing” is a process for selecting a normal symbol variation performance pattern (content) to be executed during normal symbol variation. In the normal symbol variation performance start processing, the production control microcomputer 91 first sets information regarding the regular symbol stop symbol data included in the normal symbol fluctuation start command and information regarding the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (FIG. 13) in the sub-RAM 94. do. The set information includes game state information that indicates the current gaming state, symbol information that indicates the symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process for the common symbol, and the like. The gaming state information and symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the performance control microcomputer 91. The production control microcomputer 91 selects a normal symbol variation production pattern that is preset corresponding to the normal symbol variation pattern, and sends a normal symbol variation production start command to the sub-RAM 94 to start the selected normal symbol variation production. Set it in the production command set area 94b. When the normal symbol variation performance start command set in the production command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined normal symbol variation performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Here, if the winning type is "long open 1" or "short open 1" and the winning type is won in the non-time saving state, the performance control microcomputer 91 executes the "V's expected performance" (FIG. 44), which will be described later. . In addition, in step S4505, if the normal symbol variation start command is not received (step S4505: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol variation performance start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol variation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4515). If it has been received (step S4515: YES), normal symbol variation performance end processing is performed (step S4520). “Normal symbol variation performance end processing” is a process for stopping the normal symbol variation performance. In the normal symbol variation production end processing, the production control microcomputer 91 analyzes the normal symbol variation stop command, and sets the normal symbol variation production end command in the production command set area 94b to end the normal symbol variation production. . In addition, in step S4515, if the normal symbol variation stop command is not received (step S4515: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol variation performance end process is skipped.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4525). If it has been received (step S4525: YES), normal symbol opening performance pattern determination processing is performed (step S4530). The "normal symbol opening performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting a normal game performance pattern (content) to be executed during a winning game (normal game) associated with winning a normal symbol. The normal game performance selected here includes an opening performance executed during the opening and an open game performance executed while the electric chew 22 is opened. In the normal symbol opening production pattern determination process, the production control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the normal symbol opening command, and uses the normal symbol stop symbol data that is included in the normal symbol opening command and is set at the time of determining the winning of the normal symbol. The information is set in the sub RAM 94. Then, select the performance pattern of the opening performance that has been set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the normal symbol stop symbol data, and send the normal symbol opening performance start command to the sub-RAM 94 as a production command to start the selected opening performance. Set it in the set area 94b. When the normal symbol opening performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 starts the predetermined opening performance image. is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, in step S4525, if the normal symbol opening command is not received (step S4525: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol opening performance pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4535). If it has been received (step S4535: YES), normal symbol ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4540). "Normal symbol ending performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an ending performance pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a winning game (normal game) associated with winning a normal symbol. In the normal symbol ending production pattern determination process, the production control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the normal symbol ending command and sets information regarding the regular symbol stop symbol data included in the normal symbol ending command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, select the effect pattern of the ending effect that has been set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the normal pattern stop pattern data, and send the normal pattern ending effect start command to the sub-RAM 94 as the effect command to start the selected ending effect. Set it in the set area 94b. When the normal symbol ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 starts the predetermined ending effect image. is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, in step S4535, if the normal symbol ending command is not received (step S4535: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol ending performance pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processes, for example, when the production control microcomputer 91 receives the gaming state designation command, the production control microcomputer 91 inputs information regarding the gaming state included in the gaming state designation command (whether or not it is in a time saving state, a first time saving counter and a second time saving counter). counter values, etc.) are held in the sub-RAM 94. Furthermore, when the production control microcomputer 91 receives the V passing command, it causes the RAM 94 to hold information about the V passing. Further, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than those mentioned above (customer waiting command, preliminary determination command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing. The performance control microcomputer 91 functions as a "performance execution means" by executing the variable performance end process (step S4470) and the opening performance pattern determination process (step S4480).

[Variable effect start processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the variable performance start process (FIG. 37: Step S4460). The performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub-RAM 94. The set information includes game status information indicating the current gaming status, symbol information indicating the symbol as a determination result of the winning determination process of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2, and the like. The gaming state information and symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the performance control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 refers to the mode status M (step S5005). "Mode status M" indicates the performance mode to be executed. The production mode here refers to the mode of production on the image display device 7, and when the production mode is different, the images (characters, items, background images, etc. that appear) displayed on the image display device 7 are different, resulting in variable production. is also executed in a manner according to the production mode. Here, the mode status M is set to "1" and "2", where "1" corresponds to a non-time saving state and "2" corresponds to a time saving state. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the mode status M is "1" or "2".

When the mode status M is "2" (step S5010: YES), that is, in the time saving state, the production control microcomputer 91 refers to the time saving production scenario (step S5025). The "time saving effect scenario" refers to the remaining number of time saving effects displayed on the image display device 7 (hereinafter referred to as the "display time saving remaining number") in the later-described "countdown effect" (FIG. 47) that is executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game. It shows the change scenario. The time-saving effect scenario is determined in the ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 40), which will be described later. Here, the "remaining number of times of time saving" is the remaining number of variable displays of the second special symbol that can be executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game, and the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol that has already been executed in the time saving state is This is the remaining number of times until reaching the time saving number set according to the winning type. The remaining number of time savings corresponds to the value of the first time savings counter C1 on the main control unit side. When the remaining time saving number becomes "0", the gaming state is switched from the time saving state to the non-time saving state (FIG. 27: Steps S2030 and S2035). The game machine 1 of this embodiment performs a performance in which the remaining display time saving number displayed on the image display device 7 is made different from or coincident with the actual remaining time saving number based on a time saving performance scenario. Specific aspects will be described later. Here, the production control microcomputer 91 specifies the remaining number of display time reductions to be displayed on the image display device 7 this time by referring to the time reduction production scenario. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 specifies the remaining number of display time savings to be displayed this time from the value of a first time saving production counter JC1, which will be described later, and the time saving production scenario. In addition, when the mode status M is "1" (step S5010: NO), that is, when it is in a non-time-saving state, the production control microcomputer 91 skips reference to the time-saving production scenario.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a variable performance pattern determination process (step S5015). In the variable performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first obtains a variable performance pattern random value for performance determination. Then, from the variable performance pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93, the mode status M, the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation start command, the random value of the variable performance pattern, the specified remaining number of display time reductions when time is shortened, and the special performance flag. Set a variable effect pattern corresponding to ON/OFF. The "special effect flag" is a flag indicating whether or not to execute the "one-time crying effect" (FIG. 48), which will be described later, and is set in the flag set area of the sub-RAM 94. When the special effect flag is ON, the effect control microcomputer 91 switches it to OFF and executes a "crying effect" as a variable effect. On the other hand, if the special effect flag is OFF and the variation pattern indicated by the variation start command is "P12" to "P15", that is, if it is a variation of the second special symbol in a non-time saving state, the "V card" described later 44 (G)). When the mode status M is "2", the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a "countdown performance" (FIG. 47), which will be described later. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs this countdown performance, so it functions as a "number of times display performance execution means."

The production control microcomputer 91 further refers to the contents of the preview performances such as the so-called step-up notice production and chance-up notice production, based on the variable production pattern random number value, and also the stop symbol pattern determination table T52. The combination of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to be displayed is determined. Based on these, it is determined what kind of performance will be performed as a variable performance.

The performance control microcomputer 91 sets a variable performance start command in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 so that a variable performance based on the variable performance pattern determined in step S5015 is realized (step S5020). ), this process ends. When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 starts the predetermined variable effect. The image is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Fluctuating performance end processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the variation production end process (FIG. 37: step S4470). The production control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation stop command (step S5100) and refers to the mode status M (step S5105). If mode status M is "1" (step S5110: YES), the process skips to step S5140. When the mode status M is "2" (step S5110: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the second special symbol (step S5115). The production control microcomputer 91 can determine whether the variation is a variation of the first special symbol or a variation of the second special symbol from the information regarding the variation pattern set in the sub-RAM 94. If the change is a change in the second special symbol (step S5115: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the values of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 and the second time-saving effect counter JC2 by 1. (Step S5120). The "first time saving counter JC1" is used to count the number of variations of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state on the sub-control unit side, and the "first time saving counter C1" on the main control unit side. Compatible. "Second time saving production counter JC2" is the number of variations of special symbols executed during the time saving state (total of the number of variations of the first special symbol and the number of variations of the second special symbol) on the sub-control unit side. This counter corresponds to the "second time saving counter C2" on the main control unit side. The initial values set in the first time-saving performance counter JC1 and the second time-saving performance counter JC2 are determined in the ending performance pattern determination process (FIG. 40) described later. On the other hand, when the variation is a variation of the first special symbol (step S5115: NO), only the value of the second time saving effect counter JC2 is decremented by 1 (step S5125).

The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether at least one of the values of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 and the second time-saving effect counter JC2 has become "0" as a result of step S5120 or step S5125. (Step S5130). If the values of both the first time-saving effect counter JC1 and the second time-saving effect counter JC2 are not "0" (step S5130: NO), the process skips to step S5140. When the value of at least one of the first time saving effect counter JC1 and the second time saving effect counter JC2 is "0" (step S5130: YES), the mode status M is switched to "1" (step S5135). When switching the mode status M to "1", the performance control microcomputer 91 also determines whether or not there is a special figure 2 pending, and if there is a special figure 2 pending, sets the special effect flag. Switch to ON. As a result, if special drawing 2 is on hold when transitioning from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state, the "crying effect" (Fig. 48), which will be described later, will be executed as the first variable effect in the non-time-saving state. . In addition, in step S5130, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether it is a time-saving state or a non-time-saving state from the information regarding the gaming state held in the sub-RAM 94, and in the case of a non-time-saving state, sets the mode status M to " 1". The information regarding the gaming state held in the sub-RAM 94 is updated when a gaming state designation command is received from the main control board 80. In step S5140, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a variable performance end command for ending the variable performance. As a result, the fluctuating decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. After that, this process ends.

[Ending production pattern determination process]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 37: step S4500). The performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command (step S5500). The performance control microcomputer 91 sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM 94. Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs mode status setting processing (step S5505). The "mode status setting process" is a process for determining the production mode after the jackpot game. In the mode status setting process, the production control microcomputer 91 sets the mode status M using a mode status M setting table described below.

FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining the mode status setting table T53. The mode status setting table T53 is a table that is referred to in order to determine the mode status M according to the winning type (special figure stop symbol data). The performance control microcomputer 91 determines the mode status from the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command and the mode status setting table T53. For example, when determining the ending performance pattern of a type 2 jackpot game after winning "16R normal small win A", the special pattern stop symbol data included in the ending command is 14H, so the mode status M is "1". is selected. Also, for example, when determining the ending performance pattern of a type 1 jackpot game after winning "15R time saving 99 times jackpot E", the special pattern stop pattern data included in the ending command is 33H, so the mode status M "2" is selected.

Returning to FIG. 40, if the mode status M set in step S5505 is "1" (step S5510: NO), the production control microcomputer 91 skips the process to step S5525. On the other hand, when the set mode status M is "2" (step S5510: YES), the production control microcomputer 91 selects the first time-saving production counter JC1 and the second time-saving production counter JC2 for the type (special figure stop pattern data) Set values corresponding to the respective values (step S5515). The set value set to the first time saving effect counter JC1 is the same as the value set to the first time saving counter C1 on the main control unit side. Further, the set value set to the second time saving effect counter JC2 is the same as the value set to the second time saving counter C2 on the main control unit side. A setting table similar to the setting table in FIG. 30 is stored in the sub ROM 93, and the production control microcomputer 91 can perform the first time saving by referring to the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command and this setting table. Setting values to be set in the performance counter JC1 and the second time saving performance counter JC2 can be specified. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "99" is set to the first time-saving effect counter JC1 and the second time-saving effect counter JC2, respectively. Further, for example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "35H", "10" is set to the first time-saving effect counter JC1, and "15" is set to the second time-saving effect counter JC2. After setting the setting values in the time-saving performance counters JC1 and JC2, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a time-saving performance scenario determination process (step S5520). The "time-saving effect scenario determination process" is the number of remaining time-saving effects (remaining number of display time-saving effects) to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the later-described "countdown effect" (FIG. 47) that is executed in the time-saving state after the jackpot game. ) is a process for determining a change scenario. In the time-saving performance scenario determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a time-saving performance scenario using a time-saving performance scenario determination table T54, which will be described below.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the time-saving effect scenario determination table T54. The time-saving performance scenario determination table T54 is a table that is referred to in order to determine the time-saving performance scenario according to the winning type (special symbol stop symbol data) and the time-saving performance scenario random value. The production control microcomputer 91 first obtains a time-saving production scenario random value. Then, a time-saving performance scenario is determined from the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command, the obtained random number value, and the time-saving performance scenario determination table T54. For example, if it is the ending of a type 2 jackpot game after winning "16R time saving 99 times small win A" (special figure stop pattern data 25H), if the obtained time saving scenario random number is "0 to 63". If "Scenario B" is selected as the time-saving production scenario and the time-saving production scenario random number is "64-95", "Scenario C" is selected as the time-saving production scenario, and if the time-saving production scenario random number is "96-127". If so, "Scenario D" is selected as the time-saving production scenario. Also, for example, if it is the ending of a type 1 jackpot game after winning "15R time saving 5 times jackpot D" (special figure stop pattern data 31H), regardless of the acquired time saving effect scenario random value, it will be used as a time saving effect scenario. "Scenario H" is selected.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the specific contents of the time-saving production scenario. FIG. 43 shows the time saving effect displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the "countdown effect" (FIG. 47) that is executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game in each of the time saving effect scenarios (scenarios A to H). The correspondence relationship between the remaining number of times (remaining display time saving number of times) and the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is shown. For example, in "scenario A", the performance control microcomputer 91 displays the same value as the value of the first time-saving performance counter JC1 on the display screen 7a as the remaining number of display time-savings. In "Scenario B", when the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is "99", "5" is displayed on the display screen 7a as the remaining number of display time saving times, and then the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is "96". ”, the remaining display time saving number is decreased as the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is decreased. That is, when the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 changes from "99" to "96", the remaining number of display time savings changes from "5" to "2". When the first time saving effect counter JC1 is "95", the remaining display time saving number is set to "1" and a display indicating that the remaining display time saving number is increased by 94, for example, "+94" is displayed. Then, the same value as the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is displayed as the remaining display time saving number until the first time saving effect counter JC1 becomes from "94" to "1". In "Scenario E", when the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is "15", "5" is displayed on the display screen 7a as the remaining display time saving number, and then the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is "12". ”, the remaining display time saving number is decreased as the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is decreased. That is, when the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 changes from "15" to "12", the remaining display time saving number changes from "5" to "2". When the first time saving performance counter JC1 is "11", the remaining display time saving number is set to "1" and a display indicating that the remaining display time saving number is increased by 10, for example, "+10" is displayed. Then, the same value as the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is displayed as the remaining display time saving number until the first time saving effect counter JC1 changes from "10" to "1". In this way, by making the remaining number of display time savings different from the actual remaining number of time savings, that is, the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1, the player is given the expectation that the remaining number of display time savings may increase midway through. be able to.

Returning to FIG. 40, in step S5525, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the mode status M and determines the ending effect pattern (step S5530). Multiple types of ending performance patterns are prepared, and the ending performance pattern is determined based on the special symbol stop pattern data included in the ending command. The effect control microcomputer 91 sets an ending effect start command in the output buffer of the sub-RAM 94 so that an ending effect based on the determined ending effect pattern is realized (step S5535), and ends this process.

8. Production example of this embodiment [Expected production of V (when normal symbol is won in non-time saving state)]
FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the expected performance of V. This V expected performance is when you win with a normal symbol while special symbol 1 is changing or stopping in a non-time saving state, and the winning type is "long opening 1" or "short opening 1" (see Figure 13). is executed. The expected production of V is a production that suggests whether or not the long opening of the electric chew 22 will be made, and furthermore, if the game ball enters the electric chew 22, the result of the judgment of the validity of the special figure 2. be.

The expected production of V is during the variation production of the special figure 1 as shown in FIG. This is executed when a game ball passes through the second gate 29 during a ready-to-win state), and a winning is won with a normal symbol, and the winning type is selected as ``Long Open 1'' or ``Short Open 1''. That is, the production control microcomputer 91 receives the normal symbol variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: Step S4505: YES), and in the normal symbol variation production start processing (FIG. 37: Step S4510), the command included in this command is The winning type is determined to be "Long Open 1" or "Short Open 1" from the information regarding the normal stop symbol data, and the variation pattern corresponding to the expected performance of V is selected and executed. As the expected effect of V, first, as shown in FIG. 44(B), the display area of the variable effect corresponding to special figure 1 is reduced and displayed in the display area HR1, and the variable effect of special figure 1 until then is The expected cut-in effect of V is executed using the area where the cut-in effect has been performed, which displays an image GA1 suggesting that the expected effect of V is to be started. Note that the display area HR1 is provided at one corner of the display screen 7a. The performance of the display area HR1 is executed when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives the fluctuation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: Step S4455: YES), and in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 37: Step S4460), executes the fluctuation performance start command. (FIG. 38: Step S5020) is executed by setting.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44(C), a V level challenge performance is executed that displays an image GA2 that prompts the player to press the performance button 63, and an image GA3 that shows an indicator that can represent an increase in points. . In this V level challenge effect, the player can increase the points of the indicator in image GA3 by pressing the effect button 63, thereby increasing the V level. In addition, also in this V level challenge effect, as shown in FIG. 44(C), the variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is continuously shown in the display area HR1.

When the hit type of the normal symbol is "short open 1", the electric chew 22 is short opened for 0.02 seconds (Fig. 14), and then the indicator is displayed as shown in Fig. 44 (D). Displaying an image GA4 that suggests that the points have been lowered and the V level has decreased and the V level could not reach a certain level, and an image GA5 that suggests that the V level has decreased and that a jackpot cannot be expected this time. Perform a level down effect. In addition, in this V level down effect, as shown in FIG. 44(D), a variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is shown subsequent to the display area HR1.

On the other hand, if the hit type of the normal symbol is "Long Open 1", then the electric chew 22 is long opened for 5 seconds (Fig. 14), and the indicator changes as shown in Fig. 44 (E). Image GA6 suggests that the V level has increased and the V level has reached a certain level by increasing the points, and the image GA6 suggests that the V level has increased and you can move on to the next stage, suggesting that you can expect a jackpot. A V level up effect that displays image GA7 is executed. In addition, in this V level up effect, as shown in FIG. 44(E), a variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is shown subsequent to the display area HR1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44(F), an image GA8 is displayed on the right side to prompt the player to hit the game ball to the right in order to enter the electric chew 22 in order to move on to the next stage. Execute the hit suggestion performance. In addition, in this right-hand hitting suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 44(F), the variable effect of the special figure 1 is continuously shown in the display area HR1. This right hit suggestion performance is executed until the variable performance corresponding to the special figure 1 being displayed in the display area HR1 ends. This right hit suggestion performance is executed based on the normal symbol opening command (FIG. 37: Step S4525) that the performance control microcomputer 91 receives from the main control board 80.

If not a single ball enters the electric chew 22, after the above-mentioned right-handed hitting suggestion effect, the above-mentioned V level down effect shown in FIG. 44(D) is executed. This V level down performance is executed based on the normal symbol ending command (FIG. 37: Step S4535) that the performance control microcomputer 91 receives from the main control board 80. On the other hand, if one or more balls enter the electric chew 22, after the above-mentioned right-handed hitting suggestion effect, as a variable effect of special figure 2, as shown in FIG. A V-card shuffle effect is executed to display an image GA9 for shuffling facing cards. In this case, a display area HR2 provided at one corner of the display screen 7a shows the fluctuating state of the decorative pattern. The V-card shuffle effect and the effect in the display area HR2 are executed based on a variation start command received by the effect control microcomputer 91 from the main control board 80, triggered by a winning in the second start opening 21.

If the result of the judgment of special drawing 2 is a big hit or a small hit, after the V card shuffle effect, as shown in Figure 44 (H), the three shuffled by the V card shuffle effect are A V card selection effect is executed in which one of the cards is selected and turned over, and an image GA10 showing that the turned over card is a V card is displayed. In the display area HR2, after a ready-to-win state is shown using a decorative pattern, a pattern arrangement of zeros indicating a small hit or a type 1 jackpot is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44(I), an expected success effect of V is executed, which displays an image GA11 suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed, and a right-handed hitting suggestion image GA12 encouraging right-handed hitting. This expected success performance of V suggests that the expected performance of V is a success and that the expectation level of a jackpot (type 1 jackpot or type 2 jackpot) is high.In other words, the expectation level of the jackpot game being executed is high. This is a performance that suggests this. This expected success performance of V is started after a predetermined time (for example, 0.01 seconds) has elapsed since the zero-th symbol arrangement was stopped and displayed in the display area HR2. In other words, the timing (time) from when the small winning symbol is confirmed to be displayed on the special symbol display 41 to when V's expected success performance starts, and from when the jackpot symbol is confirmed to be displayed to when V's expected success performance starts. It is configured so that the timing (time) until the "Equal" here does not mean a complete match, and there may be an error in timing as long as the player feels they are equal. An example of the error is, for example, about ±2 seconds. In the case of a small win, after the expected success of this V, a small win game is executed, and when the player passes the V by hitting the right hand, it becomes a type 2 jackpot, and the game shifts to the jackpot game. In this way, in this embodiment, when a small hit is made, the variable performance is stopped and a performance that suggests that a jackpot (type 2 jackpot) game will be executed even though V has not been passed (Fig. 44) (I)). Then, during the small winning game, no performance suggesting a small winning game or a performance suggesting V passing is performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small win, the player is not aware of the small win game and can be made to think that he has won a type 1 jackpot. Further, in this embodiment, when the variable performance is stopped, the same performance (FIG. 44(I)) is started in the case of a big hit and the case of a small win. With this configuration, it is possible to make it even more difficult to distinguish between a type 1 jackpot and a type 2 jackpot. Note that even if the numbers stopped and displayed in the display area HR2 are different in the case of a big hit and the case of a small hit, these are naturally included in the same effect. In addition, the expected success performance of V in the case of a jackpot and the case of a small win may be started before the small winning symbol or the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment of special drawing 2 is a loss, after the V-card shuffle effect, one of the three cards shuffled by the V-card shuffle effect is next shown in FIG. 44 (J). A loss card selection effect is executed in which a card is selected and turned over, and an image GA13 showing that the turned over card is a loss card is displayed. Note that in the display area HR2, a ready-to-reach state using decorative symbols is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44(K), V's expected failure performance displays an image GA14 that suggests that V's expected performance is a failure and that the jackpot game is not executed due to a loss rather than a jackpot or small hit. Execute. In this case, the display area HR2 shows a pattern arrangement using decorative patterns to suggest a loss. In addition, when special drawing 2 is on hold, after this V expected failure performance, the V card shuffle performance is again performed (see FIG. 44(G)). If there is no special figure 2 on hold, the process shifts to the normal performance corresponding to the special figure 1.

Incidentally, the variation effects of the special figure 2 shown in FIGS. 44(G), (H), and (I) are examples of effects executed when the variation pattern "P13" (FIG. 12) is selected. The variation effect of the special figure 2 shown in FIGS. 44(G), (J), and (K) is an example of effect executed when the variation pattern "P14" (FIG. 12) is selected.

In addition, V level challenge effect (Figure 44 (C)), V level down effect (Figure 44 (D)), V level up effect (Figure 44 (E)), and right-handed hitting suggestion effect (Figure 44 (F)) ), the variable effect of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 44(A) is shown in the display area HR1, but this is a case where the variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 has ended and the special figure 1 is on hold. In this case, the variable performance corresponding to the next special figure 1 is displayed continuously.

Furthermore, in the expected presentation of V shown in FIG. 44, the display of the pending images 9A, 9B, and the pending digested image 9C is omitted. Furthermore, in the effects shown in FIGS. 45 to 48 and 50, which will be described later, similarly, the display of the held images 9A, 9B and the held digested image 9C is omitted.

[Winning game performance]
FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning game effect when winning the special drawing 2 lottery. This winning game performance is executed when a big hit or a small hit is made in the special drawing 2 lottery. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 receives an opening command for a jackpot game or a small win game from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: Step S4475: YES), and in the opening performance pattern determination process (FIG. 37: Step S4480). When it is determined from the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in this command that the special figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit, the corresponding opening performance start command is set and executed. This winning game performance: Figure 45 (A) is, for example, a performance suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed (V's expected success performance: Figure 44 (I), V roulette success performance: Figure 46 (C), Successful guess effect: Executed following the sequence shown in FIG. 48(C)).

First, at the start of a jackpot game associated with a Type 1 jackpot or at the start of a small win game associated with a small win, it is assumed that the jackpot game will be executed by the actions of a predetermined character, as shown in FIG. 45(A). A suggestive image GB1 and a right-handed hitting suggestive image GB2 are displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 45(B), an image GB3 suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed using a predetermined character and the like, and a right-handed hitting suggestion image GB2 are displayed.

The performances shown in FIGS. 45(A) and 45(B) are continued in the type 1 jackpot game until a predetermined period (hereinafter also referred to as "first game period") has elapsed from the start of the jackpot game. Further, in the small winning game, the small winning game continues from the start of the small winning game until the first game period has elapsed. That is, in both the type 1 jackpot game and the small win game, the same (similar) performance is performed during the first game period. In addition, this first game period includes at least the opening time (here, 0.01 seconds) of the small winning game (opening pattern 23) and the opening time of the second big prize opening 35 (here, 1.6 seconds). (seconds) and the total time (1.61 seconds). Here, the first game period is the period from the start of the small winning game to the end of the small winning game (opening time (0.01 seconds) + opening time of the second big prize opening 35 (1.6 seconds) + ending time (3 seconds)) is set to 4.61 seconds. When the first gaming period has passed since the start of a jackpot game associated with a type 1 jackpot, or when the first gaming period has passed since the start of a small winning game and a type 2 jackpot due to V passing has been confirmed, As shown in FIG. 45(C), an image GB4 that clearly suggests that a jackpot game is in progress and a right-handed hitting suggestion image GB2 are displayed. That is, when a type 2 jackpot is achieved after the small winning game, the effects shown in FIGS. 45(A), (B), and (C) are executed in the same way as when the player wins a type 1 jackpot.

On the other hand, when the first game period has elapsed from the start of the small winning game due to the small winning and it is confirmed that the jackpot game will not be played due to V non-passing, the image shown in FIG. 45(D) is displayed instead of the image GB4. As shown, an image GB5 indicating that the jackpot game will not be executed is displayed.

In the winning game performance in this embodiment, the performance during the type 1 jackpot game and the performance during the small win game accompanying the small win and the performance during the type 2 jackpot game are similar (Figs. 45 (A), (B), ( C)). In other words, the performance from the start of the type 1 jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game and the performance from the start of the small win game to the end of the type 2 jackpot game are configured to be similar. In addition, even if the second type jackpot is not executed after the small winning game due to the small winning, at least during the small winning game, the same effect as in the case of the first type jackpot (Fig. 45 (A), (B) ) is performed, and after the first game period has elapsed, a performance (FIG. 45(D)) that is different from the case of the first type jackpot is performed. "Similar (same) performance" as used herein means that the content is similar enough that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between a big win and a small win, and the performance does not need to be completely the same. . For example, if some of the characters are different, if some aspects of a given character (e.g. clothing, color of clothes, equipment) are different, or if the timing of the appearance of a given character is slightly different, etc. Naturally, it is included in the same production. In addition, in the winning game performance in this embodiment, if a type 2 jackpot occurs after the small winning game, the jackpot game performance (FIGS. 45 (A) and (B)) is started based on passing V by the small winning game. Instead, the jackpot game performance is started at the start of the small win game (that is, based on the confirmed display of the small win symbol). In other words, in this embodiment, in the case of a small win, a performance suggesting a small win game (for example, a performance instructing the player to aim for V) is not performed during the small win game. With this configuration, even in the case of a small win, the player is not aware of the small win game and can be made to think that he has won a type 1 jackpot. In addition, in this embodiment, the timing (time) from when the small winning symbol is confirmed displayed on the special symbol display 41 until the small winning game production (FIGS. 45 (A), (B), and (C)) is started. ) is configured so that the timing (time) from when the jackpot symbol is confirmed to be displayed until the jackpot game production (FIGS. 45 (A), (B), and (C)) starts is equal. . As is clear from the above, the series of performances suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed (V's expected success performance: Figure 44 (I) → Figure 45 (A) → Figure 45 (B)) is small. In the case of a hit and the case of a type 1 jackpot, the content is the same (similar performance) for a predetermined period from the start of a series of performances. The predetermined period is a period longer than the period from the start of V's expected success performance to the end of the small winning game at the time of winning the small winning. For example, if V's expected successful performance time is 5 seconds and the small winning game time is 4.61 seconds, the predetermined period is 9.61 seconds. A series of performances suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed include V's expected success performance: Figure 44 (I), V roulette success performance: Figure 46 (C), and hit success performance: Figure 48 (C)) may be used. Here, both the V roulette success performance time and the hit success performance time are 5 seconds.

[Variation effect during special drawing 2 lottery (during time saving state)]
FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation effect at the time of special drawing 2 lottery. This variable performance at the time of special drawing 2 lottery is executed when special drawing 2 wins a small hit, special drawing 2 hits a jackpot, or special drawing 2 loses in the time saving state. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 receives a variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: Step S4455: YES), and in the variation production start processing (FIG. 37: Step S4460, FIG. 38), this command is When it is determined from the information regarding the included variation patterns that the variation pattern is "P16" to "P19" (Figure 12), the corresponding variation effect start command is set and executed (Figure 38: Step S5020).

In the variable effect at the time of the special drawing 2 lottery, first, as shown in FIG. 46(A), a V roulette effect is executed to display an image GC1 showing how a roulette wheel having a loss zone and a V zone is rotated. In this case, a display area HR3 provided at one corner of the display screen 7a shows the fluctuating state of the decorative pattern.

If the result of the judgment of special drawing 2 is a jackpot or a small win, after the V roulette performance, as shown in FIG. 46(B), the roulette that was spinning in the V roulette performance stops, A V zone selection effect is executed to display an image GC2 indicating that the stop zone is the V zone. In the display area HR3, after a ready-to-win state is shown using a decorative pattern, a pattern arrangement of zeros indicating a small hit or a type 1 jackpot is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46(C), a V roulette success effect is executed in which an image GC3 suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed and an image GC4 suggesting a right-hand hit are displayed. This V roulette success performance suggests that the V roulette performance is successful and that there is a high expectation of a jackpot (type 1 jackpot or type 2 jackpot). In other words, it indicates that the expectation that a jackpot game will be executed is high. It is a suggestive performance. Similar to the expected success performance of V (FIG. 44(I)), this V roulette success performance is performed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.01 seconds) has elapsed since the zero number symbol arrangement was stopped and displayed in the display area HR2. will be started. In other words, the timing (time) from when the small winning symbol is confirmed to be displayed on the special symbol display 41 until the V Roulette successful performance starts, and from the time when the jackpot symbol is confirmed to the start to the start of the V Roulette successful performance. The timing (time) of and are configured to be equal. In the case of a small win, after this V roulette success performance, a small win game is executed, and when the player passes the V by hitting the right hand, it becomes a type 2 jackpot and the game shifts to the jackpot game. In this way, in this embodiment, when a small hit is made, the variable effect is stopped and the effect (Fig. 46 (C)). Then, during the small winning game, no performance suggesting a small winning game or a performance suggesting V passing is performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small win, the player is not aware of the small win game and can be made to think that he has won a type 1 jackpot. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the variable performance is stopped, the same performance (FIG. 46(C)) is started in the case of a big hit and the case of a small win. With this configuration, it is possible to make it even more difficult to distinguish between a type 1 jackpot and a type 2 jackpot. Note that even if the numbers stopped and displayed in the display area HR2 are different in the case of a big hit and the case of a small hit, these are naturally included in the same effect. In addition, the expected success performance of V in the case of a jackpot and the case of a small win may be started before the small winning symbol or the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment of special drawing 2 is a loss, after the V roulette performance, the roulette that was spinning in the V roulette performance stops and the stop zone becomes the loss zone. A loss zone selection effect is executed to display an image GC5 indicating that the loss zone is selected. In the display area HR3, a ready-to-reach state using decorative symbols is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46(E), a V roulette failure performance is executed to display an image GC6 indicating that the V roulette performance has failed and the jackpot game will not be executed. In the display area HR3, a pattern arrangement indicating a loss is shown using decorative patterns. In addition, if the special drawing 2 is on hold, after this V roulette failure effect, the V roulette effect is shifted again (see FIG. 46(A)).

In addition, in the time saving state, if a judgment is made on special drawing 1 and there is a jackpot (Figure 12: when the fluctuation pattern "P8" is selected) or a small hit (Figure 12: when the fluctuation pattern "P9" is selected) In this case, the effects shown in FIGS. 46(A) to 46(C) are executed in the same way as when a big hit or a small hit is made in special drawing 2. In addition, if the special figure 1 is judged to be correct or not, and if it is a loss (Figure 12: when the variation pattern "P10" is selected), the same way as in the case of a loss in the special figure 2, Fig. 46 (A), (D) , (E) is executed. In addition, in the time saving state, if you lose in the judgment of the special figure 2 (Figure 12: When the fluctuation pattern "P19" is selected) or if you lose in the judgment of the validity of the special figure 1 (Figure 12: Variation pattern If "P11" is selected), a variable effect is executed to quickly notify a loss using a decorative pattern.

[Countdown performance (during time-saving state fluctuation performance)]
FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a countdown effect. This countdown performance is a performance that displays an image of the remaining number of times of time saving on the display screen 7a during each variable performance during the time saving state. The countdown performance is started from the first change of the special symbol in a time-saving state after the jackpot game. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 receives a variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: Step S4455: YES), and in the variation production start processing (FIG. 37: Step S4460, FIG. 38), the mode status M When is "2", the corresponding variable effect start command is set and executed (FIG. 38: Step S5020). The "remaining display time saving number" indicated by the time saving remaining number image of the countdown performance is determined with reference to the time saving performance scenario (see FIG. 43) determined based on the time saving performance scenario determination table T56 (see FIG. 42). Therefore, the "remaining number of displayed time savings" shown in the remaining number of time savings images is either the same number of times as the actual remaining number of time savings (actual remaining number of fluctuations) until the end of the time saving state, or a number that is less than the actual remaining number of time savings. is shown as a pseudo time saving remaining number of times. The countdown effect shown in FIG. 47 is an example of a effect corresponding to "scenario C".

In the countdown effect based on "scenario C," first, countdown effect A is displayed as shown in FIG. 47(A). In this countdown effect A, in the first variation after entering the time saving state, the remaining time saving number image GDA is displayed with the "display time saving remaining number" being 5 times, and from the 2nd variation to the 5th variation, the previous variation is displayed. A time saving remaining number image GDA representing the number of times one is subtracted from the displayed remaining display time saving number is displayed. For example, in countdown effect A, in the second variation, the remaining time saving number image GDA is displayed with the "remaining display time saving number" set to 4 times, and in the fifth variation, the "remaining display time saving number" is set to 1 time. The time saving remaining number of times image GDA is displayed.

When the display of the time saving remaining number image GDA of the fifth variation in the countdown effect A is completed, next, as shown in FIG. 47(B), the charge effect A is executed during the variation effect of the fifth variation. In this charging effect A, a charging image CHA is displayed that suggests charging (increasing) the "remaining number of display time reductions" by about 10 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47(C), countdown effect B is executed. In this countdown effect B, in the 6th variation which is the next variation of charge effect A, the charge amount (10 Displays the remaining time saving number image GDB in which the number of times (10 times) increased by 10 times is the "display time saving remaining number of times", and from the 7th variation to the 15th variation, the remaining number of times shown in the previous variation is increased by one. A time saving remaining number image GDB representing the subtracted remaining number of times is displayed. For example, in countdown effect B, in the 6th variation, the remaining time reduction image GDB is displayed with the "remaining number of display time reductions" set to 10, and in the 7th variation, the time reduction image GDB is displayed with the "remaining number of display time reductions" set to 9. The remaining number of times image GDB is displayed, and at the 15th variation, the remaining number of times saving time image GDB is displayed with the "remaining number of times of display time saving" set to one.

When the display of the time saving remaining number image GDB of the 15th variation in the countdown performance B is completed, next, as shown in FIG. 47(D), charge performance B is executed during the variation performance of the 15th variation. In this charging effect B, a charging image CHB is displayed that suggests charging (increasing) the "remaining number of display time reductions" by about 84 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47(E), countdown effect C is executed. In this countdown effect C, in the 16th variation which is the next variation of charge effect B, the charge amount (84 The remaining time saving number image GDC is displayed with the number of times (84 times) increased by the number of times (84 times) as the "display time saving remaining number of times", and from the 17th variation to the 99th variation, the remaining number of times shown in the previous variation is increased by one. A time saving remaining number image GDC representing the subtracted remaining number of times is displayed. For example, in countdown effect C, at the 16th variation, the time saving remaining number image GDC is displayed with the "display time saving remaining number" set to 84, and at the 17th variation, the time saving remaining number image GDC is displayed where the "display time saving remaining number" is set to 83. Display the remaining number of times image GDC.

Note that the countdown effect is executed at a predetermined timing of each variable effect in the time saving state. For example, it may be executed at the start timing of each variable effect, or may be executed at the end timing of each variable effect. Furthermore, the image of the remaining number of time savings may be continuously displayed during each variable performance.

[One-time crying performance (first variation (special figure 2) performance after the end of time saving state)]
FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a crying performance once. This crying one-time performance is a variation performance that is executed in the next variation of the variation when the special drawing 2 is held in the last variation of the time-saving state, that is, the first variation after the time-saving state. It is a variation of the special figure 2 in a non-time saving state. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a fluctuation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: Step S4455: YES), and in the fluctuation performance start processing (FIG. 37: Step S4460, FIG. 38), the special performance flag is set. is ON, the corresponding variable effect start command is set and executed (FIG. 38: Step S5020).

In the crying performance, first, as shown in FIG. 48(A), an image GE1 showing a rotating "target" consisting of a winning zone and a losing zone, and a state advantageous to the player are displayed at the end. A guessing start effect is executed to display an image GE2 indicating that the target is the target. In this case, a display area HR4 provided at one corner of the display screen 7a shows the fluctuating state of the decorative pattern.

If the result of the judgment of special figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit, after the target hit start performance, the arrow hits the hit zone of the target as shown in FIG. 48(B). A hit effect is executed to display an image GE3 indicating that. In the display area HR4, after a ready-to-win state is shown using decorative symbols, a pattern arrangement of zeros indicating a small hit or a type 1 jackpot is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(C), an image GE4 suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed, and a right-hand-hitting suggestion image GE5 encouraging right-hand hitting are displayed, indicating that the hit was a success and the jackpot ( A successful hit performance is performed which suggests that the expectation level is high for a type 1 jackpot or type 2 jackpot, or in other words, that the expectation level is high for a jackpot game to be executed. Similar to the expected success performance of V (FIG. 44(I)), this success performance is performed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.01 seconds) has elapsed since the zero-th mark array was stopped and displayed in the display area HR2. will be started. In other words, the timing (time) from when the small winning symbol is confirmed to be displayed on the special symbol display 41 to when the successful hit performance starts, and from when the jackpot symbol is confirmed to be displayed to when the successful hit performance starts. The timing (time) of and are configured to be equal. In the case of a small win, after this successful performance, a small win game is executed, and when the player hits right and passes V, it becomes a type 2 jackpot, and the game shifts to a jackpot game. In this way, in this embodiment, when a small win is achieved, the variable effect is stopped, and the effect (Fig. 48 (C)). Then, during the small winning game, no performance suggesting a small winning game or a performance suggesting V passing is performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small win, the player is not aware of the small win game and can be made to think that he has won a type 1 jackpot. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the variable performance is stopped, the same performance (FIG. 48(C)) is started in the case of a big hit and the case of a small win. With this configuration, it is possible to make it even more difficult to distinguish between a type 1 jackpot and a type 2 jackpot. Note that even if the numbers stopped and displayed in the display area HR2 are different in the case of a big hit and the case of a small hit, these are naturally included in the same effect. In addition, the expected success performance of V in the case of a jackpot and the case of a small win may be started before the small winning symbol or the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination of the special figure 2 is a loss, after the target start performance, as shown in FIG. 48(D), an image GE6 showing that the arrow has hit the loss zone of the target Execute a hit-or-miss effect that displays. In the display area HR4, a ready-to-reach state is shown using decorative symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(E), a hit failure effect is executed to display an image GE7 indicating that the hit is a failure and the jackpot game is not executed because the hit is not a jackpot or a small hit. . In the display area HR4, a pattern arrangement indicating a loss is shown using decorative patterns.

Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 48(A) to (C) in the one-time crying effect are when the variation pattern P13 (see FIG. 12) is selected in the first variation after transitioning from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. The effects shown in FIGS. 48(A), (D), and (E) above are examples of effects performed in the above-mentioned manner. In the first variation after transitioning from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state, the variation pattern P14 (see FIG. 12) is shown. ) is selected.

9. Operation of the board movable body The operation of the board movable body (first movable accessory 14 and second movable accessory 15) will be explained using FIGS. 49 to 58. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 during a game performance (display performance) or during an initial operation when the power is turned on. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 causes the image display device 7 to display a specific image during the game performance (display performance) or during the initial operation when the power is turned on, etc. 15 in a specific manner.

The operation of the first movable accessory 14 will be explained using FIGS. 49 to 54. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement of the first movable accessory 14 in the advancing direction (moving in the advancing direction). FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a combination effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the image display device 7. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rotational movement of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 53 and FIG. 54 are explanatory diagrams illustrating the light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14.

As shown in FIG. 49, the first movable accessory 14 includes a left side movable accessory 14L and a right side movable accessory 14R. The left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are each configured to be movable in the left-right direction, and halves of ring-shaped decorative parts (the left side decorative part and the right side decorative part) are attached to the tip sides. That is, the left side decorative portion and the right side decorative portion each have an arc shape that is half an annular shape. As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 is in a retracted position (home position) where the left movable accessory 14L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable accessory 14R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a. It can stand still (first aspect). At this time, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R each become partially visible. As shown in FIG. 49, the first movable accessory 14 advances from the state shown in FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a (in a direction in which they approach each other). By moving, the left decorative part and the right decorative part are combined at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 50, and one decorative member (combined accessory) is formed (second mode). Here, the combined accessory forms the outline of the face. In this second aspect, the combined accessory in which the left side decorative part and the right side decorative part are combined covers a part of the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a on the front surface of the image display device 7, and is displayed through an opening formed in the center. The screen 7a stands still in a visible state. That is, the combined accessory forms only the outline of the face and does not have the central part of the face, and is configured so that the display screen 7a can be viewed instead. Then, as shown in FIG. 51, a face image is displayed on the display screen 7a corresponding to the opening formed in the center of the combined accessory, thereby completing the human face as a whole. That is, by displaying the missing part of the combined accessory (for example, the central part of the face) as an image on the display screen 7a, a combination of the accessory and the image is created to complete one object (for example, a human face). can be executed. Note that the object completed by the first movable accessory 14 and the display screen 7a is not limited to a human face. For example, it may be the entire human body, a robot, or the like. That is, the head, body, right arm, and both legs may be completed using combined accessories, and the left arm may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14 can be moved (retracted) from the advanced position shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 through the state shown in FIG. 49 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and stops there. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 52, this combined accessory can be vertically rotated in front of the display screen 7a. That is, the combined accessory can rotate about an axis that is parallel and horizontal to the display screen 7a, and can be stopped at any tilted angle. At this time, the central opening of the combined accessory gradually becomes an elliptical shape that is narrower in the vertical direction when viewed from the player. On the display screen 7a, the image of the person's face to be displayed is deformed in accordance with the deformation of the opening into the elliptical shape. As a result, for example, the first movable accessory 14 and the display screen 7a can produce the impression that a person's face is bowing.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the first movable accessory 14 is configured to be able to emit light. Specifically, a plurality of LEDs are arranged side by side on the surface of the combined accessory (decorative member), and each LED is configured to be able to be turned on and off. For example, as shown in FIG. 53, the right movable accessory 14R can emit light in conjunction with (correspond to) the light emission of the frame lamp 66. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 54, the right side movable accessory 14R and the left side movable accessory 14L can be made to emit light in conjunction with each other.

The operation of the second movable accessory 15 will be explained using FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rotational movement of the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 includes a rectangular decorative part with "OARO" written on it, and is configured to be able to move up and down and rotate left and right. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can stand still at a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable accessory 15 can move downward from the state shown in FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and come to rest at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 55 (second mode) . In this second aspect, the decoration part stops on the front surface of the image display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. Further, as shown in FIG. 56, this decorative portion can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise (clockwise rotation in the drawing) in front of the display screen 7a, and can stop at any tilted angle. The second movable accessory 15 can be moved upward (retracted) from the advanced position shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can come to rest there.

A combination effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 will be explained using FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first combination effect using the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second combination effect using the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. As shown in FIG. 57, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 can perform the first combination effect by both being in the second mode. That is, by moving both the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 to the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 will be in a state where it covers a part of the upper part of the first movable accessory 14. In other words, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 can stand still while partially overlapping and combined. In addition, as shown in FIG. A second combination effect can be performed in which the movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are each tilted at a predetermined angle. This second combination performance is performed after the first combination performance, in which two movable accessories are formed by rotating (tilted) together, and in which they move to the advance position in a tilted state and overlap. There are cases where the second combination effect is directly performed without going through the first combination effect.

10. Other production examples, effect examples, modifications, and mode examples of the present embodiment Each production example (display production example, role object movable production example) of the present embodiment will be described below. In addition, examples of effects, modifications, and aspects of the production example will also be explained. As mentioned above, the performance that will be described below is based on various information (win determination information, winning type information, fluctuation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81. This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). Note that the following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, although the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display performance examples, it is actually displayed unless otherwise specified.

The fluctuation timing change effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 59 to 61. This fluctuating timing change effect may be executed during the fluctuating effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a variable timing change effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the fluctuating performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the fluctuating timing change performance is included, the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory 15 is driven.

[Fluctuating timing change production A]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation timing change effect A. In the variable timing change performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 59(A), two sets of decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r and the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The first decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8l, a middle decorative pattern 8c, and a right decorative pattern 8r, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. The second decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. A white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed at the pending display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Three hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position. A black spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position on the far right. A star-shaped hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position, second from the right. A white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position that is third from the right (in this case, the leftmost position). Here, hold icons of the same color and shape are displayed at the third hold display position and the hold display position. Differences in the shape and color of the pending icons represent differences in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the pending icon. Here, among the three pending icons 9A: the star-shaped pending icon, the black spherical pending icon, and the white spherical pending icon, the star-shaped pending icon has the highest probability of winning, and the black spherical pending icon has the highest probability of winning. The expectation of winning is the highest, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

As shown in FIG. 59(A), in a case where the white ball hold icon reaches the hold display position, the white ball hold icon reaches the hold display position from the first hold display position, and at the same time the two decorative symbols ( The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) start to be displayed in a variable manner. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, a variable effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(B), the first decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8r and the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed simultaneously. Moreover, at this time, at the same time, an effect is executed in which the pending icon 9C disappears (disappears). That is, in the lottery corresponding to the white spherical pending icon 9C, which has a relatively low expectation of winning, the two decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) start changing at the same time, and at the same time, they stop displaying. be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(C), the black sphere hold icon 9A that was at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, the two decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) are maintained in a stopped display. As shown in FIG. 59(D), at the same time as the black ball reservation icon 9A reaches the reservation display position, the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) start variable display. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, a variable effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(E), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed while the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(F), the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. That is, when the hold icon 9C is a black ball hold icon, the two decorative symbols are not stopped and displayed at the same time, but are configured so that the timing of the stop display is shifted. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed before the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, but the opposite may be used. Furthermore, which one is stopped and displayed first may change each time there is a change (it may be random). In this way, in the lottery corresponding to the black spherical pending icon 9C with a relatively medium probability of winning, the two decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) start changing at the same time. , the stop display is not simultaneous, but the timing is different. As shown in FIG. 59(F), simultaneously with the stop display of the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, an effect is performed in which the pending icon 9C disappears (disappears).

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(G), the star-shaped hold icon 9A that was at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, the second decorative pattern among the two decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) starts variable display. The stop display of the first decorative pattern is maintained. That is, the second decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner before the pending icon 9A located at the first pending display position starts moving and reaches the corresponding pending display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 59(H), at the same time as the star-shaped hold icon 9A reaches the hold display position, the first decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner. In this embodiment, the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate before the first decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r, but the opposite may be possible. Furthermore, which one starts changing first may change each time there is a change (it may be random).

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(I), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed while the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(J), the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed before the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, but the opposite may be used. Furthermore, which one is stopped and displayed first may change each time there is a change (it may be random). In this way, in the lottery corresponding to the star-shaped pending icon 9C, which has a relatively high expectation of winning, the fluctuation start timing of the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) and the stop display are determined. The timing is different. After FIG. 59(J), the white ball hold icon 9A that was at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. In a case where the white ball hold icon reaches the hold display position, as shown in FIG. 59(A), the white ball hold icon reaches the hold display position from the first hold display position, and two decorative symbols The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) start to be displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(B), the first decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8r and the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed simultaneously. Moreover, at this time, at the same time, an effect is executed in which the pending icon 9C disappears (disappears).

[Fluctuating timing change effect B]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation timing change effect B. In the variable timing change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 60(A), three sets of decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, first decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8r, second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and third decorative patterns 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are variably displayed. The first decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8l, a middle decorative pattern 8c, and a right decorative pattern 8r, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. The second decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. The third decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8ml, a middle decorative pattern 8mc, and a right decorative pattern 8mr, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop symbols. A white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed at the pending display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Three hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position. A black spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position on the far right. A star-shaped hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position, second from the right. A white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position that is third from the right (in this case, the leftmost position). Here, hold icons of the same color and shape are displayed at the third hold display position and the hold display position. Differences in the shape and color of the pending icons represent differences in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the pending icon. Here, among the three pending icons 9A: the star-shaped pending icon, the black spherical pending icon, and the white spherical pending icon, the star-shaped pending icon has the highest probability of winning, and the black spherical pending icon has the highest probability of winning. The expectation of winning is the highest, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

As shown in FIG. 60(A), in a case where the white ball hold icon reaches the hold display position, the white ball hold icon reaches the hold display position from the first hold display position, and at the same time the three decorative symbols ( The first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern start to be displayed in a variable manner. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, a variable effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60(B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are simultaneously stopped and displayed. Ru. Moreover, at this time, at the same time, an effect is executed in which the pending icon 9C disappears (disappears). That is, in the lottery corresponding to the white spherical pending icon 9C, which has a relatively low probability of winning, the three decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern) start changing at the same time. The display will stop and display at the same time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(C), the black sphere hold icon 9A that was at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, the three decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern) are maintained in a stopped display. As shown in FIG. 60(D), at the same time as the black ball hold icon 9A reaches the hold display position, the three decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern, and third decorative pattern) are displayed in a variable manner. Start. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, a variable effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(E), while the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the third decorative patterns 8ml, 8mc, 8mr continue to be displayed in a variable manner, the first decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8r is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60(F), the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, and 8mr are stopped and displayed at the same time. In other words, when the hold icon 9C is a black ball hold icon, the three decorative patterns are not displayed at the same time, and the timing of the first decorative pattern is different from that of the second and third decorative patterns. It is configured to be out of sync with the timing. In this embodiment, the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed before the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern, but the opposite may be possible. Furthermore, which one is stopped and displayed first may change each time there is a change (it may be random). Furthermore, the three decorative patterns may stop at different timings. In this way, in the lottery corresponding to the black spherical pending icon 9C with a relatively medium probability of winning, three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) are drawn at the same time. While the fluctuations are started, the stop displays are not all at the same time, but the timing is shifted in at least some of them. As shown in FIG. 60(F), simultaneously with the stop display of the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern, an effect is performed in which the pending icon 9C disappears (disappears).

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(G), the star-shaped hold icon 9A that was at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) among the three decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern) start variable display. The stop display of the first decorative pattern is maintained. That is, the two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) start to be displayed in a variable manner before the pending icon 9A that was at the first pending display position starts moving and reaches the corresponding pending display position. do. Then, as shown in FIG. 60(H), at the same time as the star-shaped hold icon 9A reaches the hold display position, the first decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner. In this embodiment, the two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) start changing before the first decorative pattern, but the opposite may be possible. Furthermore, which one starts changing first may change each time there is a change (it may be random). Furthermore, the three decorative patterns may start changing at different timings.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(I), while the two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) continue to be displayed in a variable manner, the first decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed. Ru. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60(J), the two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, the first decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed before the two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern), but the opposite may be possible. Furthermore, which one is stopped and displayed first may change each time there is a change (it may be random). Furthermore, the three decorative patterns may stop at different timings. In this way, in the lottery corresponding to the star-shaped pending icon 9C with relatively high expectation of winning, at least part of the three decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern) In this case, the fluctuation start timing and the stop display timing are different from each other.
After FIG. 60 (J), the white ball hold icon reaches the hold display position from the first hold display position, and at the same time, the three decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern, and third decorative pattern) Start variable display. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60(B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are simultaneously stopped and displayed. Ru. Moreover, at this time, at the same time, an effect is executed in which the pending icon 9C disappears (disappears).

[Fluctuating timing change production C]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation timing change effect C. FIGS. 61(A) and 61(B) of the variable timing change effect C are the same as FIGS. 60(F) and 60(G) of the variable timing change effect B. That is, before the fluctuation timing change effect C shown in FIG. 61(A), FIGS. 60(A) to 60(E) are executed. In FIG. 61(A), after the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, and 8mr are simultaneously stopped and displayed after a delay. . The first decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8l, a middle decorative pattern 8c, and a right decorative pattern 8r, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. The second decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. The third decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8ml, a middle decorative pattern 8mc, and a right decorative pattern 8mr, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop symbols. At this time, at the same time, an effect is executed in which the black spherical hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a disappears (disappears). Two hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position. A star-shaped hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position on the far right. A white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position that is second from the right (in this case, the leftmost position). Differences in the shape and color of the pending icons represent differences in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the pending icon. Here, among the three pending icons 9A: the star-shaped pending icon, the black spherical pending icon, and the white spherical pending icon, the star-shaped pending icon has the highest probability of winning, and the black spherical pending icon has the highest probability of winning. The expectation of winning is the highest, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(B), the star-shaped hold icon 9A that was at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) among the three decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern) start variable display. The stop display of the first decorative pattern is maintained. That is, the two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) start to be displayed in a variable manner before the pending icon 9A that was at the first pending display position starts moving and reaches the corresponding pending display position. do. Then, as shown in FIG. 61(C), the second movable accessory 15 advances downward, comes to rest in the second mode, and then moves to the retracted position (first mode). The first decorative pattern disappears from the display as the second movable accessory 15 moves without starting to fluctuate. This suggests that a pseudo-continuation performance will begin. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61(D), the three decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern) are displayed in a variable manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 61(E), the first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. The two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 61(F), the first decorative pattern starts changing again, and all three decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern, and third decorative pattern) are displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 61(G), the first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed again. The two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, after that, as shown in FIG. 61(H), the first decorative pattern starts to change again, and all three decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern) are displayed in a variable manner. Ru. Next, as shown in FIG. 61(I), the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the winning number "555". The two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61(J), two decorative patterns (a second decorative pattern and a third decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed on the same hit as the second decorative pattern.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the variable timing change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first decorative pattern is, for example, as shown in FIGS. A first effect in which the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after it has been stopped and displayed, and a second effect in which the second decorative pattern is displayed in the next state before the first decorative pattern has started the next variable display after the first effect. A second effect of starting a variable display can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59(G), in the second effect, before the hold icon arrives at the hold display position by shift movement, the hold icon is displayed in the second decorative pattern. A corresponding fluctuation is initiated. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 60 and 61.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60(D) to (H) and 61(D) to (H), in the first effect, after the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, The three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and in the second performance, the third decorative symbol starts the next variable display while the first decorative symbol has not started the next variable display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59(H) to (J), (A), and FIGS. It is possible to execute a third effect in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern simultaneously start the next variable display without performing the effect shown in FIG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59(D) to (H), FIGS. 60(D) to (H), and FIGS. , a second performance is performed after the first performance, and when the hold icon is a white sphere, a third performance is performed after the first performance. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the variation timing change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
The first variation in FIGS. 59(A) and (B), the second variation in FIGS. 59(C) to (F), and the third variation in FIGS. 59(G) to (J) are executed in any order. may be done. For example, the third variation, the second variation, and the first variation may be executed in this order. Further, the same type of variation may be repeatedly executed. For example, the third variation, the third variation, and the first variation may be executed in this order. The same applies to FIGS. 60 and 61. The type of hold icon is not limited to the above embodiment.

[Modification 2]
The relative positional relationship and size of the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern are not limited to the above. These positions and sizes can be arbitrary. The type, shape, and display method of the first decorative pattern 2l, second decorative pattern 8L, and third decorative pattern 8ml are not limited to those described above, as long as they are displayed on the image display device 7.

[Modification 3]
The first decorative pattern 2l, the second decorative pattern 8L, and the third decorative pattern 8ml are not limited to the above-mentioned variation display mode. For example, the variable display may not be displayed on the image display device 7. Further, the numbers may be displayed in such a manner that they move at high speed and cannot be distinguished, or they may be displayed at a speed that is distinguishable. Further, the fluctuation speed may change midway.

[Modification 4]
The first decorative pattern is assumed to start changing when the hold icon reaches the hold display position. However, it may be just before or after that. Immediately before and immediately after are, for example, a range of 2 to 3 seconds before and after.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of first decorative patterns that can notify whether or not it is a hit;
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of second decorative patterns that can notify whether or not it is a hit;
a first effect in which the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed;
After the first performance, a second performance in which the second decorative pattern starts the next variable display while the first decorative pattern has not started the next variable display;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
In the second performance, before the hold icon arrives at the hold display position by shift movement, a change corresponding to the hold icon is started in the second decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1 or aspect A1-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of third decorative patterns that can notify whether or not it is a hit;
In the first performance, after the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the third decorative pattern is stopped and displayed,
In the second performance, the third decorative pattern starts the next variable display while the first decorative pattern has not started the next variable display.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
After the first performance, it is possible to perform a third performance in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern simultaneously start the next variable display without performing the second performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect A1-4 that is subordinate to aspect A1-2,
When the hold icon is in the first mode, the second performance is performed after the first performance,
When the hold icon is in the second mode, the third effect is performed after the first effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The symbol direction change effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 62 to 64. This symbol direction change performance may be executed during the variation performance of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a symbol direction change performance, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. In addition, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the fluctuation performance start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a symbol direction change performance, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory. 15 is driven.

[Design direction change effect A]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect A. In the symbol direction change production A, first, as shown in FIG. 62(A), the left decorative symbol 8L among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. . At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing, but are not in a visible state. The left decorative pattern 8L enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the left. At this time, each number constituting the left decorative pattern 8L moves with the direction (posture) of the number tilted to the right. That is, each number is tilted along the direction of movement, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (lower left direction). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down, and a specific number (here, "2") temporarily stops at a first position near the lower left of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are also referred to as a first decorative pattern, a second decorative pattern, and a third decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(B), a specific image CHA is displayed above this specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. Note that the specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L), making a part of the specific number difficult to see. This specific image CHA also has a tilted direction (posture) similarly to the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA and the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) have the same orientation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(C), an effect is performed in which a specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and specific image CHA change while maintaining their mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move to a second position in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and are oriented along the vertical direction (straight). The second position is located above the first position in the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 62(D), the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation along the vertical direction, and reach the third position. Stop display. . The third position is located vertically lower than the second position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(E), while the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a stopped state, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C is not displayed. In other words, although the medium decorative pattern 8C is changing, it is not in a visible state. The right decorative pattern 8R enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed variably in a direction different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, each number constituting the right decorative pattern 8R moves with the direction (posture) of the number tilted to the left. That is, each number is tilted along the direction of movement, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down and temporarily stops when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the lower right of the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 62(F), a specific image CHA is displayed above this specific number (right decorative pattern 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L, but may be an image with different content. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R), making a part of the specific number difficult to see. This specific image CHA is also tilted in direction like the specific numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(G), an effect is performed in which a specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and specific image CHA change while maintaining their mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move toward the upper left of the display screen 7a while being oriented along the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 62(H), the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation along the vertical direction, and stop displaying at that position. be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(I), while the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner. In other words, the fluctuation of the medium decorative pattern 8C becomes visible. The medium decorative pattern 8C enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves vertically downward. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a varying direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, each number constituting the medium decorative pattern 8C moves with the direction (posture) of the number along the vertical direction (straight state). In other words, each number is oriented along the direction of movement, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (downward). The speed of the fluctuating display gradually slows down and stops temporarily when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 62(J), the specific image CHA is not displayed above this specific number (medium decorative pattern 8C) but is displayed in a stopped state. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixedly displayed.

[Symbol direction change effect B]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect B. In the symbol direction change performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 63(A), the left decorative symbol 8L among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. . At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing, but are not in a visible state. The left decorative pattern 8L enters the frame from near the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. At this time, each number constituting the left decorative pattern 8L moves with the direction (posture) of the number tilted to the left. That is, each number is tilted along the direction of movement, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down, and a specific number (here, "2") temporarily stops at a first position near the bottom center of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are also referred to as a first decorative pattern, a second decorative pattern, and a third decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), a specific image CHA is displayed above this specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. Note that the specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L), making a part of the specific number difficult to see. This specific image CHA also has a tilted direction (posture) similarly to the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA and the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) have the same orientation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(C), an effect is performed in which a specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and specific image CHA change while maintaining their mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move to a second position in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and are oriented along the vertical direction (straight). The second position is located above the first position in the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 63(D), the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation along the vertical direction, and reach the third position. It will stop and be displayed. The third position is located vertically lower than the second position.

In parallel with the stop display, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C is not displayed. In other words, although the medium decorative pattern 8C is changing, it is not in a visible state. The right decorative pattern 8R enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. That is, it is displayed variably in the same direction as the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, each number constituting the right decorative pattern 8R moves with the direction (posture) of the number tilted to the left. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L moves in a state of inclination to the same extent as the inclination of the numbers when changing. Each number is tilted along the direction of movement, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down and temporarily stops when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(E), a specific image CHA is displayed above this specific number (right decorative pattern 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L, but may be an image with different content. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R), making a part of the specific number difficult to see. This specific image CHA is also tilted in direction like the specific numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(F), an effect is performed in which a specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and specific image CHA change while maintaining their mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move toward the upper left of the display screen 7a while being oriented along the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 63(G), the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation along the vertical direction, and stop display at that position. be done. While the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a stopped state, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a fluctuating manner. In other words, the fluctuation of the medium decorative pattern 8C becomes visible. The medium decorative pattern 8C enters the frame from near the upper left of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable direction in the same direction as the variable direction. At this time, each number constituting the medium decorative pattern 8C moves with the direction (posture) of the number tilted to the left. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move in a state of inclination to the same degree as the inclination of the numbers when they change. Each number is tilted along the direction of movement, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down and temporarily stops when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(H), a specific image CHA is displayed above this specific number (medium decorative pattern 8C). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, but may be an image with different content. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (medium decorative pattern 8C), making a part of the specific number difficult to see. This specific image CHA also has a tilted direction (posture) similarly to the specific number (center decoration pattern 8C). The specific image CHA and the specific number (medium decorative pattern 8C) have the same orientation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(I), an effect is performed in which a specific number (medium decorative pattern 8C) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (medium decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining their mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (medium decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA move toward the upper left of the display screen 7a while being oriented along the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 63(J), the specific number (medium decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation along the vertical direction, and stop displaying at that position. be done. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixed and displayed.

[Symbol direction change production C]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect C. In the symbol direction change production C, first, as shown in FIG. 64(A), the left decorative symbol 8L among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. . At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing, but are not in a visible state. The left decorative pattern 8L enters the frame from near the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. At this time, each number constituting the left decorative pattern 8L moves with the direction (posture) of the number tilted to the left. That is, each number is tilted along the direction of movement, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down, and a specific number (here, "2") temporarily stops at a first position near the bottom center of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are also referred to as a first decorative pattern, a second decorative pattern, and a third decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), a specific image CHA is displayed below this specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. Note that the specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. The specific image CHA covers a part of the lower part of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L), making a part of the specific number difficult to see. This specific image CHA also has a tilted direction (posture) similarly to the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA and the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) have the same orientation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(C), an effect is performed in which a specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and specific image CHA change while maintaining their mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move to a second position in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and are oriented along the vertical direction (straight). The second position is located above the first position in the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 64(D), the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation along the vertical direction, and reach the third position. Stop display. The third position is located vertically lower than the second position.

In parallel with the stop display, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C is not displayed. In other words, although the medium decorative pattern 8C is changing, it is not in a visible state. The right decorative pattern 8R enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. That is, it is displayed variably in the same direction as the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, each number constituting the right decorative pattern 8R moves with the direction (posture) of the number tilted to the left. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L moves with the same degree of inclination as the number when it changes. Each number is tilted along the direction of movement, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down and temporarily stops when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(E), a specific image CHA is displayed below this specific number (right decorative pattern 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L, but may be an image with different content. The specific image CHA covers a part of the lower part of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R), making a part of the specific number difficult to see. This specific image CHA is also tilted in direction like the specific numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(F), an effect is performed in which a specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and specific image CHA change while maintaining their mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move toward the upper left of the display screen 7a while being oriented along the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 64(G), the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation along the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 64(H), the display is stopped at that position. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64(I), the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner while the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed. In other words, the fluctuation of the medium decorative pattern 8C becomes visible. The medium decorative pattern 8C enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves downward in the vertical direction. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a varying direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, each number constituting the medium decorative pattern 8C moves with the direction (posture) of the number along the vertical direction (straight state). In other words, each number is oriented along the direction of movement, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (downward). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down and temporarily stops when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the center of the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 64(J), the specific image CHA is not displayed above this specific number (medium decorative pattern 8C) but is displayed in a stopped state. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixed and displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the symbol direction change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 62(A) and 62(B), the left decorative pattern is oriented along the first direction and the left decorative pattern is After the first effect, the left decorative pattern is displayed in a second direction (direction) that is different from the first direction, as shown in FIGS. For example, a second effect that is stopped and displayed in an orientation along the vertical direction) can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62(A), in the second performance, the left decorative pattern reaches the first position in the direction along the first direction (for example, diagonally right direction). After that, as shown in FIG. 62(C), while moving toward a second position located vertically above the first position, the orientation is along the second direction (e.g., vertical direction). After reaching the second position, the third position is located vertically lower than the second position while maintaining the orientation along the second direction, as shown in FIG. move towards a position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 62(B) and (C), in the second performance, the left decorative pattern moves toward the second position after reaching the first position. At this time, a part of the specific image CHA becomes difficult to see. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63(D), after the second performance, the right decorative pattern is newly moved from the undisplayed state to the first direction (for example, diagonally to the right). As shown in FIG. 63 (G), after the third effect, the right decorative pattern is displayed in a direction along the second direction. A fourth effect that is stopped and displayed in the opposite direction can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64(I), after the fourth effect, the inner decorative pattern is oriented in a third direction (e.g., vertical direction) different from the first direction. A fifth effect that is displayed variably in a direction along the third direction can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, the first direction is a direction oblique to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the second direction is a vertical direction. The direction is along the According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the symbol direction change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
Although the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are made of specific numbers, they may not be numbers. It may be a character or graphic symbol. Although it is assumed that only one set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of sets of decorative patterns may be displayed.

[Modification 2]
In FIG. 62, after the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a variable manner, it bounces and becomes a direction along the vertical direction; good. For example, after bouncing, the left decorative pattern 8L may be tilted to the left and displayed stationary, or may be tilted sideways and displayed stationary. Furthermore, after the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative pattern 8L may change its direction without bouncing and be displayed in a stopped state.

[Modification 3]
In the symbol direction change productions A, B, and C, the right decorative symbol may be visible to change (variation display is displayed) before the left decorative symbol stops, or after the left decorative symbol stops, The fluctuation may be visible (a fluctuation display may be displayed). The same applies to the interior decoration design.

[Modification 4]
The contents of the symbol direction change effects A, B, and C may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the symbol direction change effects A and B, the display position of the specific image CHA may be set as in the symbol direction change effect C. Further, for example, in the pattern direction change effects A and B, the fluctuation direction and stopping mode of the medium decorative pattern may be made as in the pattern direction change effect C.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative pattern,
a first effect in which the first decorative pattern is displayed oscillatingly in a direction along the first direction in a direction along the first direction;
After the first performance, a second performance in which the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a direction along a second direction different from the first direction;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
In the second performance, after the first decorative pattern reaches a first position along the first direction, a second decorative pattern is placed on one side of the first position in the vertical direction. While moving toward the position, the orientation becomes along the second direction, and after reaching the second position, the orientation is more vertical than the second position while maintaining the orientation along the second direction. moving towards a third position located on the other side of the direction;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1 or aspect A2-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image,
In the second effect, when the first decorative pattern moves toward the second position after reaching the first position, a part of the first decorative pattern becomes difficult to see due to the specific image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative pattern that together with the first decorative pattern constitutes a set of decorative patterns that can notify whether or not it is a hit;
After the second performance, a third display in which the second decorative pattern is displayed variably in a direction along the first direction from an undisplayed state to a new direction along the first direction. and the performance of
after the third performance, a fourth performance in which the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in an orientation along the second direction;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-4,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative pattern that together with the first decorative pattern constitutes a set of decorative patterns that can notify whether or not it is a hit;
After the fourth performance, a fifth performance in which the third decorative pattern is variably displayed in a direction along the third direction in a direction along a third direction different from the first direction. executable,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-5,
The first direction is a direction oblique to the display means,
The second direction is a direction along the vertical direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The accessory symbol cooperation effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 65 to 67. This accessory symbol collaboration performance may be executed during the fluctuating performance of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable production start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the role model cooperation production, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the accessory symbol cooperation performance is included, the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable character The object 15 is driven.

[Yakuza pattern collaboration production A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the accessory symbol cooperation production A. The accessory symbol collaboration performance A is one of the variation pattern performances including a pseudo-continuation performance, and the sequences shown in FIGS. 65(A) to 65(J) are executed in one variation. In the accessory symbol cooperation performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 65(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative symbols include a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop symbols. A white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed at the pending display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Four hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped state (including a temporary stopped display), and then the pseudo-series start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 65(C) is executed. In the pseudo-association start suggestion performance, the second movable accessory 15 moves (advances) downward from the retracted position above the image display device 7 (FIG. 1) toward the center of the display screen 7a to cover a part of the display screen 7a. It stops at the forward advancing position covering the area. As the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position, the shapes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a change (deform). Here, the shapes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually collapse in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are crushed and deformed by the second movable accessory 15. The player understands that since the statically displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are crushed and distorted by the second movable accessory 15, the statically displayed symbols are not finalized and the fluctuations will be executed again. , that is, it can be noticed that a pseudo-association is executed. Thereby, it is possible to improve interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(D), an image corresponding to the characters "OARO" in the decorative part of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of characters (that is, "OARO") that are the same as the decoration part of the second movable accessory 15 are displayed. Note that the image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image that is related to the specific object (characters, figures, symbols, etc.) represented on the decoration part of the second movable accessory 15, and may be completely the same. It doesn't have to be a color or shape. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and an image with the same content as the decorative part of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, thereby informing the player that this is a special performance. It can make an impression and improve interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(E), variable display is started again. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped state (including a temporary stopped display), and then the pseudo-coupling continuation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 65(G) is executed. The pseudo-sequence continuation suggestion performance is similar to the above-mentioned pseudo-sequence start suggestion performance. That is, the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position. With this movement to the advancing position, the shapes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a change (deform). Here, the shapes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually collapse in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are crushed and deformed by the second movable accessory 15. Note that the mode of transformation may be different from the pseudo-sequence start suggestion performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(H), an image corresponding to the characters "OARO" in the decorative part of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of characters (that is, "OARO") that are the same as the decoration part of the second movable accessory 15 are displayed. Note that the image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image that is related to the specific object (characters, figures, symbols, etc.) represented on the decoration part of the second movable accessory 15, and may be completely the same. It doesn't have to be a color or shape. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(I), variable display is started again. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and displayed. Here, the game is stopped and displayed in the form of a jackpot.

[Yakuza pattern collaboration production B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the accessory symbol cooperation production B. Role symbol cooperation production B is one of the variation pattern productions including pseudo-coupling production, and Figures 66 (A) to (B) are the previous one variation, and Figures 66 (C) to (J) are the previous one variation. This is the next variation that includes a pseudo-connection performance. First, as shown in FIG. 66(A), two sets of decorative patterns are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The first decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. The second decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8l, a middle decorative pattern 8c, and a right decorative pattern 8r, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. A white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed at the pending display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66(B), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are simultaneously displayed in a stopped state (including a confirmed stopped display). Moreover, at this time, at the same time, an effect is executed in which the pending icon 9C disappears (disappears). Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), the hold icon 9A that was at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, of the two decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern), the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r start variable display. The first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R maintain a stop display. That is, the second decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner before the pending icon 9A located at the first pending display position starts moving and reaches the corresponding pending display position.

Next, the pseudo-coupling start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 66(D) is executed. In the pseudo consecutive start suggestion performance, first, in a state where the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r continue to display fluctuations, the first decoration continues to stop at the number "123" that was displayed as a confirmed stop last time. The displays of symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily disappear, and instead, a pseudo-sequence start suggestion display of "Let's go!!!" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 66(E), the second movable accessory 15 moves (advances) downward from the retracted position above the image display device 7 (FIG. 1) toward the center of the display screen 7a and displays the image. It stops at a forward advancing position that covers a part of the screen 7a. After the pseudo series start suggestion display, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a again change their shapes (deformation) as the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position. do. Here, the shapes of the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually collapse in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15. That is, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are crushed and deformed by the second movable accessory 15. The player understands that since the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed are crushed and distorted by the second movable accessory 15, the stopped and displayed symbols are not finalized and the fluctuations are executed again. In other words, you can notice that a pseudo-association is being executed. Thereby, it is possible to improve interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(F), an image corresponding to the characters "OARO" in the decorative part of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of characters (that is, "OARO") that are the same as the decoration part of the second movable accessory 15 are displayed. Note that the image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image that is related to the specific object (characters, figures, symbols, etc.) represented on the decoration part of the second movable accessory 15, and may be completely the same. It doesn't have to be a color or shape. At this time, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, while the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Here, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and an image with the same content as the decorative part of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, which is a special effect for the player. It is possible to give an impression that something is happening, and it is possible to improve interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(G), while the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r continue to be displayed in a variable manner, the variable display of the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is started. As a result, both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66(H), while the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r continue to display fluctuations, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R display a stop display (including a temporary stop display). ), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66(I), the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start varying display again. That is, a pseudo-coupled effect is executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66(J), both the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r are fixed and displayed. Here, the game is stopped and displayed in the form of a jackpot.

[Accessory pattern collaboration production C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the accessory symbol cooperation production C. Role symbol cooperation production C is one of the variation pattern productions including pseudo-coupled production, and Figures 67(A) to (B) are the previous one variation, and Figures 67(C) to (J) are the previous one variation. This is the next variation that includes a pseudo-connection performance. First, as shown in FIG. 67(A), two sets of decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The first decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. The second decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8l, a middle decorative pattern 8c, and a right decorative pattern 8r, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. A white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed at the pending display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67(B), the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r are simultaneously stopped and displayed (including a confirmed stop display). Moreover, at this time, at the same time, an effect is executed in which the pending icon 9C disappears (disappears). Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), the hold icon 9A that was at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, of the two decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern), the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r start variable display. The first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R maintain a stop display. That is, the second decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner before the pending icon 9A located at the first pending display position starts moving and reaches the corresponding pending display position.

Next, the pseudo-coupling start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 67(D) is executed. In the pseudo consecutive start suggestion performance, first, in a state where the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r continue to display fluctuations, the first decoration continues to stop at the number "123" that was displayed as a confirmed stop last time. The displays of symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily disappear, and instead, a pseudo-sequence start suggestion display of "Let's go!!!" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 67(E), the second movable accessory 15 moves (advances) downward from the retracted position above the image display device 7 (FIG. 1) toward the center of the display screen 7a and displays the image. It covers a part of the screen 7a and performs a rotation operation at that position. As a result, the shapes of the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a again after the pseudo-sequence start suggestion display change as the second movable accessory 15 moves downward and rotates. (transform. Here, as the second movable accessory 15 moves downward, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R crack, and their shapes gradually collapse. That is, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are crushed by the second movable accessory 15 and deformed so as to be distorted and cracked. The player understands that the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed are crushed by the second movable accessory 15, distorted, and cracked. You can notice that it is executed, that is, that the pseudo-association is executed. Thereby, it is possible to improve interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(F), an image corresponding to the characters "OARO" in the decorative part of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, when the second movable accessory 15 has returned to the retracted position, the same characters as the decoration part of the second movable accessory 15 (i.e., "OARO") are displayed in large numbers near the center of the display screen 7a. . It should be noted that the image displayed on the display screen 7a only needs to be an image that is related to the specific object (characters, figures, symbols, etc.) represented on the decorative part of the second movable accessory 15, and it may be completely the same. It doesn't have to be a color or shape. At this time, both the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r are not displayed. Here, both the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r are not displayed, and an image with the same content as the decorative part of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. By doing so, it is possible to give the impression to the player that the performance is special, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(G), the variable display of both the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8r is started again. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67(H), while the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r continue to display fluctuations, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R display a stop display (including a temporary stop display). ), and after that, as shown in FIG. 67(I), the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start varying display again. In other words, a pseudo-coupled effect is executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67(J), both the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r are fixed and displayed. Here, the game is stopped and displayed in the form of a jackpot.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the role model cooperation production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(F), the first effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, and the first effect as shown in FIG. 65(G), After the first performance, a second performance in which the shapes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change as the second movable accessory 15 moves to an advanced position covering a part of the display screen 7a. can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(G), in the second performance, the shapes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are distorted as the second movable accessory 15 moves. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(G), the second movable accessory 15 has a decorative part labeled "OARO", and as shown in FIG. 65(H), As shown, after the second performance, a third performance in which "OARO" is displayed on the display screen 7a can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66(C) to (J) and FIGS. 67(C) to (J), the first performance and the second performance are performed during one fluctuation. In the first performance, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the manner in which they were stopped and displayed after the variation immediately before the variation in which the first performance was executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66(G) to 66(J) and FIGS. 67(G) to 67(J), a pseudo continuous effect is executed after the third effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66(C) and 67(C), one of the plurality of types of images is a second image different from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. It is a decorative pattern, and in the first performance, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the accessory symbol cooperation production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the accessory symbol cooperation performance A, it is assumed that FIGS. 65(A) to 65(J) are executed in one variation. However, FIGS. 65(A) to (B) and FIGS. 65(C) to (J) may have different variations. In addition, for accessory symbol collaboration performances B and C, there is a 1 variation in FIGS. 66 (A) to (B) and 67 (A) to (B), and 1 variation in FIGS. It is assumed that (C) to (J) are the following one variation. However, FIGS. 66(A) to (J) and FIGS. 67(A) to (J) may be executed with one variation.

[Modification 2]
The modes of deformation of decorative patterns illustrated in the accessory pattern cooperation productions A to C are just examples, and the present invention is not limited to these modes. That is, the deformation of the decorative pattern when the second movable accessory 15 advances is not limited to a distorted manner. For example, the decorative pattern may collapse into pieces, or may have the same shape but be smaller in size.

[Modification 3]
In the accessory symbol cooperation performance A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are specified as specific numbers, but they may not be numbers. It may be a character or graphic symbol. Although it is assumed that only one set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of sets of decorative patterns may be displayed. While the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being varied, the variable display may temporarily disappear, or the variable display may not be continuously displayed. Here, the fluctuating display refers to a state in which a fluctuating aspect is visibly displayed.

[Modification 4]
The contents of the accessory symbol cooperation effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. For example, in FIG. 66(E) of the accessory symbol cooperation performance B, the presentation of FIG. 67(E) of the accessory symbol cooperation performance C may be performed. Furthermore, for example, in the pseudo-continuous presentation of FIGS. 66(G) to (J) of the accessory symbol cooperation presentation B, the pseudo-continuation presentation of the accessory symbol cooperation presentation A may be executed.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A3-1]
a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images;
A gaming machine comprising a movable accessory movable in front of the display means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first effect in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed;
After the first performance, a second performance in which the shape of the decorative pattern changes as the movable accessory moves to the advanced position covering a part of the display means can be executed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that in the second performance, the shape of the decorative pattern is distorted as the movable accessory moves.
◇[Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2,
The movable accessory has a decorative part representing a specific object,
After the second performance, a third performance can be executed in which the specific target is displayed on the display means;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-3,
After the third performance, a pseudo continuous performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-4,
The first performance and the second performance are executed during one fluctuation,
In the first performance, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the manner in which it was stopped and displayed after the variation immediately before the variation in which the first production is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-5,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative pattern different from the decorative pattern,
In the first performance, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific image symbol cooperation effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 68 to 70. This specific image pattern cooperation production can be executed during the variation production of decorative patterns. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable production start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a specific image symbol cooperation production, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. In addition, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a specific image symbol cooperation performance, the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable character The object 15 is driven.

[Specific image design cooperation production A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining specific image design cooperation effect A. In the specific image pattern cooperation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 68(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. A white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed at the pending display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Four hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (including a temporary stop display) at the off-line "123". The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up horizontally" includes not only lines lined up strictly horizontally but also lines lined up generally horizontally. That is, all the items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being lined up in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in the items lined up in the horizontal direction.

Thereafter, the pseudo-coupling start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 68(C) is executed. In the pseudo sequence start suggestion effect, the specific image CHA is newly displayed from above the display screen 7a by frame-in, and moves downward on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. Note that the specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(D), the specific image CHA moves to a position overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed, and then moves back and forth in the horizontal direction. Here, "moving back and forth along the horizontal direction" includes not only moving strictly horizontally but also moving roughly horizontally. That is, all objects that a person skilled in the art can recognize as moving in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in objects moving in the horizontal direction. Since the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are being stopped and displayed are lined up along the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA moves back and forth along the arrangement direction of the decorative patterns. At this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, when an image is "displayed in front" of another image, it is displayed as if it is located on the near side (front side) when two images are displayed overlapping each other. More specifically, it refers to a state in which two images are displayed without being missing in the overlapping area. On the other hand, when two images are displayed overlapping each other, the image appears to be located at the back (rear side), and the area where the two images overlap is partially displayed. , the image is said to be "displayed behind" other images.

By reciprocating in the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, as shown in FIG. 68(D), and is displayed on the front side thereof. As shown in (E), an effect is performed that overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L and repeats the manner in which they are displayed on the front side. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(F), the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed, and moves back and forth in the horizontal direction on the back side of these. By reciprocating the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the back side, as shown in FIG. 68(F), the medium decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are overlapped and displayed on the back side thereof; As shown in FIG. 68(G), an effect is performed in which the pattern overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L and is displayed on the back side thereof.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(H), a fade-out effect is performed. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA are gradually faded in a state where the specific image CHA is located on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. It becomes difficult to see (fade out). As a result, it becomes increasingly difficult for the player to see the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed on the wrong side, so this does not mean that the stopped and displayed symbols are fixed, but the variations are executed again. In other words, it can be noticed that a pseudo-association is executed. Thereby, it is possible to improve interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(I), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start variable display again. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and displayed. Here, the game is stopped and displayed in the form of a jackpot.

[Specific image design cooperation production B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining specific image design cooperation effect B. In the specific image pattern cooperation production B, first, as shown in FIG. 69(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R after the fluctuating display are displayed as "789", which is an outlier. A stop display (including a temporary stop display) is displayed. The decorative symbols include symbol images of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop symbols. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up horizontally" includes not only lines lined up strictly horizontally but also lines lined up generally horizontally. That is, all the items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being lined up in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in the items lined up in the horizontal direction. A white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed at the pending display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Four hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

Thereafter, pseudo-association suggestion effects shown in FIGS. 69(B) and 69(C) are executed. In the pseudo series start suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 68(C) of specific image symbol cooperation performance A, the specific image CHA is newly displayed by frame-in from the top of the display screen 7a, and moves downward on the display screen 7a. do. The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. Note that the specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(B), the specific image CHA moves to a position overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed, and then moves back and forth along the horizontal direction. Here, "moving back and forth along the horizontal direction" includes not only moving strictly horizontally but also moving roughly horizontally. That is, all objects that a person skilled in the art can recognize as moving in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in objects moving in the horizontal direction. Since the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are being stopped and displayed are lined up along the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA moves back and forth along the arrangement direction of the decorative patterns. At this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, when an image is "displayed in front" of another image, it is displayed as if it is located on the near side (front side) when two images are displayed overlapping each other. More specifically, it refers to a state in which two images are displayed without being missing in the overlapping area. On the other hand, when two images are displayed overlapping each other, the image appears to be located at the back (rear side), and the area where the two images overlap is partially displayed. , the image is said to be "displayed behind" other images.

By reciprocating in the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 68(E) of symbol cooperation performance A, a performance is performed in which the mode overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L and is displayed on the front side thereof. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(C), the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed, and moves back and forth in the horizontal direction on these back sides. By reciprocating the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the back side, as shown in FIG. 69(C), the medium decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L are overlapped and displayed on the back side thereof; As shown in FIG. 68(F) of the specific image design cooperation performance A, a performance is performed in which the mode overlaps with both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R and is displayed on the back side thereof.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(H) of specific image symbol cooperation effect A, a fade-out effect is performed. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA are gradually faded in a state where the specific image CHA is located on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. It becomes difficult to see (fade out). As a result, it becomes increasingly difficult for the player to see the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed on the wrong side, so this does not mean that the stopped and displayed symbols are fixed, but the variations are executed again. In other words, it can be noticed that a pseudo-association is executed. Thereby, it is possible to improve interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(D), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing display again. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(E), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and displayed. Here, the game is stopped and displayed in the form of a jackpot.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(F), the specific image CHA and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB are displayed. The jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB is an image that suggests to the player that a jackpot has been confirmed, and here the words "You did it!" are displayed. Here, two jackpot confirmed suggestion images CHB are displayed. Both the specific image CHA and the jackpot confirmed suggestion image CHB are newly displayed by frame-in from the top of the display screen 7a, and move downward on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA and the jackpot confirmed suggestion image CHB move to positions overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed on the jackpot. The specific image CHA and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB are both displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB is displayed on the front side of the specific image CHA. That is, the specific image CHA is displayed in front of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and furthermore, the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB is displayed in front of the specific image CHA. In this way, by overlapping a plurality of images, it is possible to create a three-dimensional effect in the depth direction, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(G), the jackpot confirmed suggestion image CHB disappears from the display screen 7a, and the specific image CHA is moved along the horizontal direction while overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed. Move back and forth. Since the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are being stopped and displayed are lined up along the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA moves back and forth along the arrangement direction of the decorative patterns. At this time, the specific image CHA is continuously displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. By reciprocating in the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L, as shown in FIG. 69(G), and is displayed on the front side thereof. As shown in (B), an effect is performed that overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R and repeats the manner in which they are displayed on the front side. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(H), the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed, and moves back and forth in the horizontal direction on these back sides. By reciprocating the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the back side, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 69(C), an effect is performed that overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L and repeats the manner in which they are displayed on the back side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(I) of specific image symbol cooperation effect A, a fade-out effect is performed. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the specific image CHA are gradually faded so that the specific image CHA is located on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the images gradually become lighter. It becomes difficult to see (fade out). As a result, the player can notice that the jackpot game will start after this because the stop-displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the jackpot will gradually become difficult to see. Thereby, it is possible to improve interest. After that, as shown in FIG. 69(J), the right-handed game image MGU is displayed, and then the jackpot game is executed.

[Specific image design cooperation production C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the specific image design cooperation effect C. In the specific image pattern cooperation production C, first, as shown in FIG. 70(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative symbols include symbol images of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop symbols. A white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed at the pending display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Four hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position. A specific image CHA is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a variable manner. The specific image CHA is newly displayed by frame-in from above the display screen 7a, and moves to a position overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a variable manner. The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. Note that the specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(B), the specific image CHA moves back and forth in the horizontal direction while overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a variable manner. Here, "moving back and forth along the horizontal direction" includes not only moving strictly horizontally but also moving roughly horizontally. That is, all objects that a person skilled in the art can recognize as moving in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in objects moving in the horizontal direction. At this time, the moving specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, when an image is "displayed in front" of another image, it is displayed as if it is located on the near side (front side) when two images are displayed overlapping each other. More specifically, it refers to a state in which two images are displayed without being missing in the overlapping area. On the other hand, when two images are displayed overlapping each other, the image appears to be located at the back (rear side), and the area where the two images overlap is partially displayed. , the image is said to be "displayed behind" other images.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(C), the fluctuation speed of the left decorative pattern 8L among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R slows down, and it begins to fluctuate (move) in the vertical direction while the numbers are visible. . Since the specific image CHA continues to move back and forth in the horizontal direction, it overlaps with a plurality of moving number images forming the left decorative pattern 8L. Also at this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the number image forming the left decorative pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(D), the fluctuation speed of the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R slows down, and it begins to fluctuate (move) in the vertical direction while the numbers are visible. . On the other hand, the variation speed of the left decorative pattern 8L is further reduced, and the display is stopped at a specific number (here, "1"). Since the specific image CHA continues to move back and forth in the horizontal direction, it overlaps with a plurality of moving number images forming the right decorative pattern 8R. It also overlaps with the left decorative pattern 8L that is being displayed in a stopped state. Also at this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the number image forming the right decorative pattern 8R. Moreover, it is displayed on the front side of the left decorative pattern 8L during stop display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(E), the fluctuation speed of the medium decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R slows down, and it begins to fluctuate (move) in the vertical direction while the numbers are visible. . On the other hand, the variation speed of the right decorative pattern 8R is further reduced, and the display is stopped at a specific number (here, "7"). Since the specific image CHA continues to move back and forth in the horizontal direction, it overlaps with a plurality of moving number images forming the medium decorative pattern 8C. It also overlaps with the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R which are being stopped and displayed. Also at this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the number image forming the middle decorative pattern 8C. Moreover, it is displayed on the front side of each of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R which are being displayed in a stopped state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(F), after the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the off-center mark "167", a change effect in which the shape of the specific image CHA changes is performed. Here, as one of the change effects, the specific image CHA is made larger, but the mode of change is not limited to this. For example, the content of the specific image CHA may change to a different content. Even during the change performance, the specific image CHA continues to move back and forth in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a stopped state. This change effect can make the player expect that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were stopped and displayed on a miss, will change again, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(G), a plurality effect is executed in which a plurality of specific images CHA are displayed. Here, as one of the pluralization effects, an effect is performed in which one new specific image CHA is additionally displayed, but the mode of pluralization is not limited to this. For example, two or more specific images CHA may be additionally displayed. Even during the pluralization effect, the specific image CHA before being added continues to move back and forth in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a stopped state. The newly added specific image CHA is moving back and forth on the back side of the stationary displayed decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. This multiplication effect can further heighten the expectation that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were stopped and displayed on a miss, will change again, thereby increasing the interest.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(H), an effect is performed in which the two specific images CHA are out of frame. Here, one of the two specific images CHA moves upward, the other moves downward, and goes out of frame at the same time. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(I), a pseudo-coupling suggestion image NKM is displayed, which suggests that the decorative pattern will start changing again (the start of a pseudo-coupling). Here, in the pseudo-coupling suggestion image NKM, characters "2nd time!!" indicating the number of pseudo-couplings are displayed. At this time, the display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(J), when the pseudo-coupling suggestion image NKM disappears, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are again displayed in a variable manner.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of specific image design cooperation production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. As shown in 68(F) to (G), after the first effect, a second effect can be executed in which the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68(D) to (G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped state in the first performance and the second performance. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which can notify whether or not there is a hit or not. In the first production, as shown in FIG. 68(D), the specific image CHA is one or more of the symbol images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. After that, as shown in FIG. 68(E), it is displayed superimposed on one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68(B) to 68(G), in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in line in the horizontal direction. , the specific image CHA moves back and forth along the horizontal direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(B), in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed while the specific image CHA is not displayed. , as shown in FIGS. 68(C) to 68(D), includes an effect in which the specific image CHA is newly displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R by frame-in. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(H), after the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA become difficult to see due to fading out. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the specific image design cooperation effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In specific image symbol cooperation productions A and B, the specific image CHA is assumed to overlap two symbol images at the same time. However, the specific image CHA may sequentially overlap with only one symbol image, or may overlap with three symbol images at the same time.

[Modification 2]
In the specific image symbol cooperation performances A to C, the specific image CHA is assumed to move along the horizontal direction. However, the specific image CHA may draw an arc or meander. It may also move left and right while swinging up and down. Furthermore, it may be stopped midway.

[Modification 3]
In the specific image pattern cooperation effects A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are specified as specific numbers, but they may not be numbers. It may be a character or graphic symbol. Although it is assumed that only one set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of sets of decorative patterns may be displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may temporarily disappear from being displayed while changing, or may not be continuously displayed. Here, the fluctuating display refers to a state in which a fluctuating aspect is visibly displayed.

[Modification 4]
The contents of the specific image design cooperation effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. For example, after FIGS. 68(A) to (I), FIGS. 70(A) to 70(J) may be executed. Further, for example, after FIGS. 70(A) to (J), FIGS. 69(D) to (J) may be executed.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image,
a first effect in which the specific image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern;
after the first performance, a second performance in which the specific image is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1,
In the first performance and the second performance, the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-2,
The decorative pattern includes a plurality of pattern images that can notify whether it is a hit or not,
In the first effect, the specific image is displayed overlapping with one or more of the plurality of symbol images, and then displayed overlapping with one or more of the other one or more of the plurality of symbol images.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-3,
In the first performance, the symbol images are displayed stationary in line in a first direction, and the specific image moves back and forth along the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-4,
The first effect includes an effect in which, after the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed while the specific image is not displayed, the specific image is newly displayed in front of the decorative pattern by frame-in. There is,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-5,
After the second effect, the decorative pattern and the specific image become difficult to see due to fading out.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern mode change effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 71 to 73. This decorative pattern change performance may be executed during a decorative pattern variation performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable production start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a decorative pattern change production, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and executes the main command. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Decorative pattern change effect A]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern mode change production A. In the decorative pattern change performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 71(A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative pattern variation performance ( (variable display) is performed. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner at such high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. In addition, after being fluctuated and displayed at high speed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be made to disappear once or may not be made to disappear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L moves along a curved trajectory that draws an arc so as to curve rightward from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a while the movement speed becomes slow. It is displayed fluctuatingly. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed gradually smaller as it moves toward the back of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), the moving speed of the left decorative pattern 8L is further slowed, and one of the left decorative patterns 8L (in this embodiment, the image of the number "9") is moved to the left decorative pattern 8L. It rotates horizontally at the stop display position where 8L is stopped and displayed. The rotation direction of the left decorative pattern 8L is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be the vertical direction or the diagonal direction. Further, the number of rotations of the left decorative pattern 8L may be one time or a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(D), after the left decorative pattern 8L is horizontally rotated at the stop display position, the aspect of the image of the number "9" changes. Specifically, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the image of the number "9" becomes slightly smaller and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "9". It changes in a different manner. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in a state where the aspect thereof is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the left decorative patterns 8L other than the left decorative pattern 8L at the stop display position disappear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative pattern 8R appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R moves along a curved trajectory that draws an arc so as to curve leftward from the back side of the display screen 7a toward the front side while the movement speed becomes slow. It is displayed fluctuatingly. That is, the right decorative pattern 8R is variably displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed gradually larger as it moves toward the front side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(F), the moving speed of the right decorative pattern 8R becomes even slower, and one of the right decorative patterns 8R (in this embodiment, the image of the number "5") moves to the right decorative pattern 8R. It rotates horizontally at the stop display position where 8R is stopped and displayed. At this time, the rotation direction of the right decorative pattern 8R is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be the vertical direction or the diagonal direction. Further, the number of rotations of the right decorative pattern 8R may be one time or a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(G), after the right decorative pattern 8R is horizontally rotated at the stop display position, the aspect of the image of the number "5" changes. Specifically, in the right decorative pattern 8R, the image of the number "5" becomes a little smaller and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "5" from the image of the number "5". It changes in a different manner. Then, the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the right decorative symbols 8R other than the right decorative symbol 8R at the stop display position disappear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(H), an effect is performed in which a medium decorative pattern 8C appears. Specifically, the medium decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed while moving downward from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while the moving speed becomes slow. That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C does not change as it moves. In addition, the medium decorative pattern 8C may be displayed gradually larger or smaller as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(I), the moving speed of the medium decorative pattern 8C is further slowed, and one of the medium decorative patterns 8C (in this embodiment, the image of the number "3") It rotates horizontally at the stop display position where 8C is stopped and displayed. At this time, the rotation direction of the middle decorative pattern 8C is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be the vertical direction or the diagonal direction. Further, the number of rotations of the medium decorative pattern 8C may be one time or a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(J), after the medium decorative pattern 8C is horizontally rotated at the stop display position, the aspect of the image of the number "3" changes. Specifically, in the medium decorative pattern 8C, the image of the number "3" is slightly smaller than the image of the number "3", and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "3". It changes in a different manner. Then, the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C other than the medium decorative pattern 8C at the stop display position disappears. In this way, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing mode (losing pattern). Note that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed may be at the same or different positions in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern change effect B]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern mode change effect B. In the decorative pattern change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 72(A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative pattern variation effect ( (variable display) is performed. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner at such high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. In addition, after being fluctuated and displayed at high speed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be made to disappear once or may not be made to disappear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L is variably displayed while moving diagonally upward to the left from the front side of the display screen 7a toward the back side along a linear trajectory while the movement speed becomes slow. . At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed gradually smaller as it moves toward the back of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), the moving speed of the left decorative pattern 8L becomes even slower, and one of the left decorative patterns 8L (in this embodiment, the image of the number "9") moves to the left decorative pattern 8L. It rotates horizontally at the stop display position where 8L is stopped and displayed. The rotation direction of the left decorative pattern 8L is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be the vertical direction or the diagonal direction. Further, the number of rotations of the left decorative pattern 8L may be one time or a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), after the left decorative pattern 8L is horizontally rotated at the stop display position, the aspect of the image of the number "9" changes. Specifically, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the image of the number "9" becomes slightly smaller and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "9". It changes in a different manner. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in a state where the aspect thereof is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the left decorative patterns 8L other than the left decorative pattern 8L at the stop display position disappear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative pattern 8R appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable manner while moving diagonally downward to the left from the back side of the display screen 7a toward the front side along a linear trajectory while the movement speed becomes slow. . That is, the right decorative pattern 8R is variably displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed gradually larger as it moves toward the front side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(F), the moving speed of the right decorative pattern 8R becomes even slower, and one of the right decorative patterns 8R (in this embodiment, the image of the number "5") moves to the right decorative pattern 8R. It rotates horizontally at the stop display position where 8R is stopped and displayed. The rotation direction of the right decorative pattern 8R is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be the vertical direction or the diagonal direction. Further, the number of rotations of the right decorative pattern 8R may be one time or a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(G), after the right decorative pattern 8R is horizontally rotated at the stop display position, the aspect of the image of the number "5" changes. Specifically, in the right decorative pattern 8R, the image of the number "5" becomes a little smaller and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "5" from the image of the number "5". It changes in a different manner. Then, the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the right decorative symbols 8R other than the right decorative symbol 8R at the stop display position disappear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(H), an effect is performed in which a medium decorative pattern 8C appears. Specifically, the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner while moving downward from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while the movement speed becomes slow. That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C does not change as it moves. Note that the medium decorative pattern 8C may be displayed gradually larger or smaller as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(I), the moving speed of the medium decorative pattern 8C is further slowed, and one of the medium decorative patterns 8C (in this embodiment, the image of number "3") It rotates horizontally at the stop display position where 8C is stopped and displayed. At this time, the rotation direction of the medium decorative pattern 8C is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be the vertical direction or the diagonal direction. Further, the number of rotations of the medium decorative pattern 8C may be one time or a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(J), after the medium decorative pattern 8C is horizontally rotated at the stop display position, the aspect of the image of the number "3" changes. Specifically, in the medium decorative pattern 8C, the image of the number "3" is slightly smaller than the image of the number "3", and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "3". It changes in a different manner. Then, the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C other than the medium decorative pattern 8C at the stop display position disappears. In this way, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing mode (losing pattern). Note that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed may be at the same or different positions in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern change production C]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern mode change production C. In the decorative pattern change production C, first, as shown in FIG. 73(A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative pattern variation production ( (variable display) is performed. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner at such high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. In addition, after being fluctuated and displayed at high speed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be made to disappear once or may not be made to disappear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L moves along a curved trajectory that draws an arc so as to curve rightward from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a while the movement speed becomes slow. While the display is changing. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed gradually smaller as it moves toward the back of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), the moving speed of the left decorative pattern 8L is further slowed down, and one of the left decorative patterns 8L (in this embodiment, the image of the number "9") is moved to the left decorative pattern 8L. The aspect changes at the stop display position where 8L is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the image of the number "9" in the left decorative pattern 8L changes from blue to red. Note that the left decorative pattern 8L may have any color, and the color may change from any color to any color.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(D), in the left decorative pattern 8L, the aspect of the image of the red number "9" changes. Specifically, in the left decorative pattern 8L, from the aspect of the image of the red number "9", the image of the red number "9" becomes a little smaller and the lower right of the image of the red number "9" The image of the character changes to be attached to the image of the character. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in a state where the aspect thereof is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the left decorative patterns 8L other than the left decorative pattern 8L at the stop display position disappear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative pattern 8R appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R moves along a curved trajectory that draws an arc so as to curve leftward from the back side of the display screen 7a toward the front side while the movement speed becomes slow. While the display is changing. That is, the right decorative pattern 8R is variably displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed gradually larger as it moves toward the front side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(F), the moving speed of the right decorative pattern 8R becomes even slower, and one of the right decorative patterns 8R (in this embodiment, the image of the number "5") The mode changes at the stop display position where 8R is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the image of the number "5" on the right decorative pattern 8R changes from blue to red. The color of the right decorative pattern 8R may be any color, and the color may change from any color to any color.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(G), in the right decorative pattern 8R, the aspect of the image of the red number "5" changes. Specifically, in the right decorative pattern 8R, from the aspect of the image of the red number "5", the image of the red number "5" becomes a little smaller and the lower right of the image of the red number "5" The image of the character changes to be attached to the image of the character. Then, the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the right decorative symbols 8R other than the right decorative symbol 8R at the stop display position disappear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(H), an effect is performed in which a medium decorative pattern 8C appears. Specifically, the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner while moving downward from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while the movement speed becomes slow. That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C does not change as it moves. Note that the medium decorative pattern 8C may be displayed gradually larger or smaller as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(I), the moving speed of the medium decorative pattern 8C becomes slower, and one of the medium decorative patterns 8C (in this embodiment, the image of the number "3") The aspect changes at the stop display position where 8C is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the image of the number "3" in the medium decorative pattern 8C changes from blue to red. Note that the color of the medium decorative pattern 8C may be any color, and the color may change from any color to any color.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(J), the mode of the image of the red number "3" in the middle decorative pattern 8C changes. Specifically, in the medium decorative pattern 8C, from the image of the red number "3", the image of the red number "3" becomes a little smaller and the lower right corner of the image of the red number "3" The image of the character changes to be attached to the image of the character. Then, the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C other than the medium decorative pattern 8C at the stop display position disappears. In this way, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as losing patterns (losing patterns). Note that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed may be at the same or different positions in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern mode change effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner in a first manner (for example, numbers, etc.), and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are The display changes from the first mode to the second mode (for example, numbers + characters, etc.), and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the second mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the first mode to the second mode at the stop display position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the first mode to the second mode while rotating laterally at the stop display position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a variable manner while moving along a predetermined direction, and the right decorative pattern 8R is different from the left decorative pattern 8L. It is displayed fluctuating while moving along different directions. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 73, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a variable manner while moving along a curved trajectory, and the right decorative pattern 8R is It is displayed in a fluctuating manner while moving along a curved trajectory that resembles an arc. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed gradually smaller as it moves, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed gradually larger as it moves. Ru. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the decorative pattern mode change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed in a variable manner while moving in different directions, but two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move. The directions may be the same. For example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed in a variable manner while moving in the same direction, and the middle decorative pattern 8C may be displayed in a variable manner while moving in a different direction from the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. .
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, after the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position, the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R other than the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R at the stop display position disappear. However, for example, after the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the stop display position, the left decorative pattern 8L other than the left decorative pattern 8L at the stop display position is produced so that it remains and is displayed without disappearing. Good too.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed variably in a first mode (for example, numbers, etc.), and change from the first mode to a second mode (for example, numbers + characters, etc.). The display is stopped and displayed in the second mode, and the mode here includes various modes such as the type, color, and shape of the image representing the decorative pattern. It may change from any aspect to any aspect. Further, the number of changes may be one time or multiple times.
[Modification 4]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed variably in this order, change from the first mode to the second mode, and are stopped, but the variable display and mode The order of change, stop display, etc. is not limited to this, and may be any order.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first effect in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed in a first manner;
a second effect in which the decorative pattern is displayed changing from the first mode to the second mode different from the first mode;
a third effect in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the second mode;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-2,
In the second performance, the decorative pattern changes from the first mode to the second mode at the stop display position.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1 or aspect A5-2,
In the second performance, the decorative pattern changes from the first mode to the second mode while rotating in a predetermined direction at the stop display position.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-3,
The decorative pattern has a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern,
In the first presentation of the first decorative pattern, the first decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner while moving along a first direction;
In the first presentation of the second decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed while moving along a second direction different from the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-4,
In the first presentation of the first decorative pattern, the first decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner while moving along a curved trajectory like an arc;
In the first presentation of the second decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner while moving along a curved trajectory like an arc.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-4 or aspect A5-5,
In the first presentation of the first decorative pattern, the first decorative pattern is displayed gradually smaller as it moves;
In the first presentation of the second decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern is displayed gradually larger as it moves.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Decorative pattern variation area effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 74 to 76. This decorative pattern variable area presentation may be executed during the decorative pattern variation presentation. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the decorative pattern variable area effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and executes the main command. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Decorative pattern variation area production A]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern variation area effect A. In the decorative pattern variation area production A, first, as shown in FIG. It is stopped and displayed with a symbol). The positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a may be the same or different. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The first display area R1 is provided in the lower part of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in a second display area R2 that is larger than the first display area R1. In this embodiment, the second display area R2 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), in the first display area R1, a decorative pattern variation effect (variable display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner at such high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), in the first display area R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which were being displayed in a variable manner, disappear from the first display area R1, and the left decorative pattern 8R disappears from the first display area R1. The variable displays of the pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L that once disappeared appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a) and moves downward in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. The display stops at an intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74(A)). That is, the enlarged left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Moreover, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper left part of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the left decorative pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative pattern 8R that once disappeared appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74(A)). Then, while moving further slowly downward at a position slightly above the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, a check is made as to whether or not to form a reach state in conjunction with the left decorative symbol 8L (number "3" symbol). Perform reach-inciting performances.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(F), the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) does not stop at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, but moves downward as it is. . That is, a ready-to-win state is not formed in combination with the left decorative symbol 8L (number "3" symbol). The right decorative pattern 8R is displayed so that a portion thereof overlaps (straddles) the right end portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative pattern 8R. In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, and together with the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3" pattern) forms a reach state. If so, another reach effect may be performed from there.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(G), the right decorative pattern 8R (number "4" pattern) slowly descends from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a) to the bottom. The image is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the 2 display area R2. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74(A)). That is, the enlarged right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(H), an effect is performed in which the medium decorative pattern 8C that once disappeared appears. Specifically, the medium decorative pattern 8C (number "2" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and moves downward in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. The display stops at an intermediate position. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74(A)). That is, the enlarged medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Moreover, the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper center part of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(I), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R move from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1 while gradually becoming smaller (shrinking).

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R gradually become smaller from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1 ( move (while zooming out). Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed within the first display area R1 (returned). In this way, in the first display area R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing mode (losing pattern).

[Decorative pattern variable area production B]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern variation area production B. In the decorative pattern variation region production B, first, as shown in FIG. The symbol is stopped and displayed. The positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a may be the same or different. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The first display area R1 is provided in the lower part of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in a second display area R2 that is larger than the first display area R1. In this embodiment, the second display area R2 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), in the first display area R1, a decorative pattern variation effect (variable display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner at such high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(C), in the first display area R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which were displayed in a variable manner, disappear from the first display area R1, and the left decorative pattern 8R disappears from the first display area R1. The variable displays of the pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L that once disappeared appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a) and moves downward in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. The display stops at an intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75(A)). That is, the enlarged left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Moreover, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper left part of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 is displayed so as to be visible through the transparent left decorative pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative pattern 8R that once disappeared appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75(A)). Then, while moving further slowly downward at a position slightly above the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, a check is made as to whether or not to form a reach state in conjunction with the left decorative symbol 8L (number "3" symbol). Perform reach-inciting performances.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(F), the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) does not stop at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, but moves downward as it is. . That is, a ready-to-win state is not formed in combination with the left decorative symbol 8L (number "3" symbol). The right decorative pattern 8R is displayed so that a portion thereof overlaps (straddles) the right end portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative pattern 8R. In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, and together with the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3" pattern) forms a reach state. If so, another reach effect may be performed from there.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(G), the right decorative pattern 8R (number "4" pattern) slowly descends from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a) to the bottom. The image is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the 2 display area R2. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75(A)). That is, the enlarged right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 is displayed so as to be visible through the transparent right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(H), an effect is performed in which the medium decorative pattern 8C that once disappeared appears. Specifically, the medium decorative pattern 8C (number "2" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and moves downward in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. The display stops at an intermediate position. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75(A)). That is, the enlarged medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Moreover, the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper center part of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 is displayed so as to be visible through the medium decorative pattern 8C having transparency.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(I), in the second display area R2, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that have been stopped and displayed disappear from the second display area R2, and the left decorative pattern The pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(J), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which have disappeared again, appear again. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a reduced state within the first display area R1. In this way, in the first display area R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing mode (losing pattern).

[Decorative pattern variable area production C]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern variation area production C. In the decorative pattern variation region production C, first, as shown in FIG. The symbol is stopped and displayed. The positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a may be the same or different. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The first display area R1 is provided in the lower part of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in a second display area R2 that is larger than the first display area R1. In this embodiment, the second display area R2 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B), in the first display area R1, a decorative pattern variation effect (variable display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner at such high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(C), in the first display area R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which were displayed in a variable manner, disappear from the first display area R1, and the left decorative pattern 8R disappears from the first display area R1. The variable displays of the pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L that once disappeared appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a) and moves downward in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. The display stops at an intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76(A)). That is, the enlarged left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Moreover, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper left part of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the left decorative pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative pattern 8R that once disappeared appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76(A)). Then, while moving further slowly downward at a position slightly above the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, a check is made as to whether or not to form a reach state in conjunction with the left decorative symbol 8L (number "3" symbol). Perform reach-inciting performances.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(F), the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. As a result, a reach state is formed between the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3" pattern) and the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern). At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76(A)). That is, the enlarged right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed so that a portion thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative pattern 8R. Note that another ready-to-win effect may be performed after the ready-to-win state is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(G), an effect is performed in which the medium decorative pattern 8C that once disappeared appears. Specifically, the medium decorative pattern 8C (number "2" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and moves downward in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. The display stops at an intermediate position. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76(A)). That is, the enlarged medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Moreover, the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper center part of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(H), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R move from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1 while gradually becoming smaller (shrinking).

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(I), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R gradually become smaller from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1 ( move (while zooming out). Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed within the first display area R1 (returned). In this way, in the first display area R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing mode (losing pattern).

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern variable area presentation will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the first display area R1 (first area) of the display screen 7a (display means) of the display device 7, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, A first effect in which 8R is displayed in a variable manner, and after the first effect, a decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a second display area R2 (second area) including the first display area R1 on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. , 8C, and 8R are enlarged and variably displayed compared to the first performance. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the second performance, at least a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are enlarged and variably displayed are in the first display area R1. are displayed in an overlapping manner. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner in the first display area R1 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. After that, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R disappear from the first display area R1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the second selection, an effect is performed to determine whether or not the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a ready-to-win state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, after the second performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a ready-to-reach state in the second display area R2 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. It is further possible to perform a third performance. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, after the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear in the second display area R2 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. It is further possible to perform a fourth performance in which a losing symbol is stopped and displayed without forming a state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, after the fourth performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move while shrinking from the second display area R2 to the first display area R1. It is further possible to perform a fifth effect that is displayed as follows. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the decorative pattern variation area presentation will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 74 to 76, the first display area R1 on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 has a rectangular shape in the decorative pattern variation area productions A to C, but is not limited to this, and may have a circular shape, It may be elliptical, square, or the like. Moreover, various shapes can be adopted for the shape of the second display area R2. Further, the second display area R2 may be the same as the display screen 7a of the display device 7, or may be a part thereof.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 74 to 76, in the decorative pattern variation area productions A to C, at least a portion of the enlarged left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed overlapping the first display area R1. , may be displayed so as not to overlap with the first display area R1. For example, it may be displayed so as to fit within the second display area R2.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 74 to 76, in the decorative pattern variation area productions A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are enlarged and displayed in a variable manner in the reach promotion production to determine whether or not to form a ready-to-reach state. In various effects, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be enlarged and displayed in a variable manner.
[Modification 4]
In FIGS. 74 to 76, the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed in this order, but the order of stop display is not limited to this, and any order may be used. Good too.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first effect in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner in a first area of the display means;
a second performance in which, after the first performance, the decorative pattern is enlarged and variably displayed in a second area of the display means including the first area; is executable,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1,
In the second performance, at least a part of the decorative pattern that is enlarged and displayed in a variable manner is displayed overlapping the first area.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1 or aspect A6-2,
In the first performance, after the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the first area of the display means, the decorative pattern disappears from the first area.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-3,
In the second selection, an effect is performed as to whether or not the decorative pattern forms a ready-to-reach state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-4,
After the second performance, it is further possible to perform a third performance in which the decorative pattern forms a ready-to-reach state in the second area of the display means;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-4,
After the second performance, it is further possible to perform a fourth performance in which the decorative pattern does not form a reach state and is stopped and displayed as a losing pattern in the second area of the display means;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-6,
After the fourth performance, it is further possible to perform a fifth performance in which the decorative pattern is displayed so as to move from the second area to the first area while shrinking.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The operation promotion effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 77 to 79. This operation promotion performance can be executed during the variation performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the operation promotion effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the main display device. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Operation promotion performance A]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining operation promotion effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 77(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, a state in which the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner is shown. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special symbols, and here three pending images 9B are displayed. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently being changed on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the fluctuation occurs during a time-saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R have stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 77(C), a battle start effect is executed. In the battle start production, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle takes place between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and when the friendly character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a jackpot. At this time, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(D), a size change effect is executed. The size change performance is a performance in which the size of the button image BG is enlarged and displayed. This suggests the level of expectation for a jackpot. Here, an ally character CRA appears.
Next, as shown in FIG. 77(E), a button rotation effect is executed. The button rotation performance is a performance in which a button image BG, which is an image imitating the performance button 63 seen from the direction perpendicular to the top surface, is displayed and rotated as shown by an arrow YG around the direction perpendicular to the top surface.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(F), a button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged to the extent that the entire button image BG does not fit on the display screen 7a. Therefore, there is a portion that is not displayed at the end of the button image BG. Note that the rotation of the button image BG continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(G), a press promotion effect is executed. In the push promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and by rotating around the left-right direction, the top surface that was facing toward you gradually becomes upward. A button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a message image MG saying "Press" is also displayed.

When the player presses the effect button 63, a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed, as shown in FIG. 77(H). In the confirmed stop performance (jackpot), the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double number. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R all stop at "7". A message image MG saying "Victory" is also displayed, indicating that the ally character CRA has won against the enemy character CRB.

[Operation promotion performance B]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining operation promotion effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 78(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, a state in which the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner is shown. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special symbols, and here three pending images 9B are displayed. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently being changed on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the fluctuation occurs during a time-saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R have stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 78(C), a battle start effect is executed. In the battle start production, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle takes place between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and when the friendly character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a jackpot. At this time, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(D), a button movement effect is executed. The button movement performance is a performance that moves the button image BG at high speed. The button image BG moves from one peripheral edge of the display screen 7a to the other peripheral edge of the display screen 7a so as to cross the display screen 7a. Here, an ally character CRA appears.
Next, as shown in FIG. 78(E), a button rotation effect is executed. The button rotation performance is a performance in which a button image BG, which is an image imitating the performance button 63 seen from the direction perpendicular to the top surface, is displayed and rotated as shown by an arrow YG around the direction perpendicular to the top surface.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(F), a button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged to the extent that the entire button image BG does not fit on the display screen 7a. Therefore, there is a portion that is not displayed at the end of the button image BG. Note that the rotation of the button image BG continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(G), a press promotion effect is executed. In the push promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and by rotating around the left-right direction, the top surface that was facing toward you gradually becomes upward. A button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a message image MG saying "Press" is also displayed.

When the player presses the effect button 63, a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed, as shown in FIG. 78(H). In the confirmed stop performance (jackpot), the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double number. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R all stop at "7". A message image MG saying "Victory" is also displayed, indicating that the ally character CRA has won against the enemy character CRB.

[Operation promotion performance C]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the operation promotion effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 79(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, a state in which the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner is shown. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special symbols, and here three pending images 9B are displayed. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently being changed on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the fluctuation occurs during a time-saving game. Further, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R have stopped at "7". Note that a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 79(C), a battle start effect is executed. In the battle start production, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle takes place between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and when the friendly character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a jackpot. Note that a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change performance is a performance that changes the color of the top surface of the button image BG. For example, a white top surface may be changed to blue, green, or red. This suggests the level of expectation for a jackpot. Here, an ally character CRA appears.
Next, as shown in FIG. 79(E), a button rotation effect is executed. In the button rotation performance, a button image BG, which is an image imitating the performance button 63 seen from the direction perpendicular to the top surface, is displayed, and the button image BG is rotated as shown by an arrow YG around the direction perpendicular to the top surface.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(F), a button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged to the extent that the entire button image BG does not fit on the display screen 7a. Therefore, there is a portion that is not displayed at the end of the button image BG. Note that the rotation of the button image BG continues.

When the player presses the performance button 63, a pressing promotion performance is executed as shown in FIG. 79(G). In the push promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and by rotating around the left-right direction, the top surface that was facing toward you gradually becomes upward. A button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a message image MG saying "Press" is also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(H), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the confirmed stop performance (loss), both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "7", and the middle performance symbol 8C is stopped at "8". Note that a message image MG saying "defeat" is also displayed, indicating that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB. Note that there may be a transition from the color change effect shown in FIG. 79(D) to the confirmed stop effect (loss) shown in FIG. 79(H).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation promotion effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, a button rotation effect is executed. In the button rotation effect, the button image BG, which is an image imitating the effect button 63 seen from the direction perpendicular to the top surface, is displayed, and the button image BG is rotated as shown by the arrow YG around the direction perpendicular to the top surface (FIG. 77) E), FIG. 78(E), FIG. 79(E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to contribute to promoting the operation of the performance button 63 and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, a button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged to such an extent that the entire button image BG cannot fit on the display screen 7a, and there are parts that are not displayed at the ends (FIGS. 77(F), 78(F), and 79(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to promoting the operation of the performance button 63 and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, a button movement effect is executed. The button movement performance is a performance that moves the button image BG at high speed. The button image BG moves from one peripheral edge of the display screen 7a to the other peripheral edge so as to cross the display screen 7a (FIG. 78(D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to promoting the operation of the performance button 63 and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, a press promotion effect is executed. In the push promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and by rotating around the left and right directions, the top surface that was facing toward you gradually becomes upward. A button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a message image MG saying "Press" is also displayed (FIG. 77(G), FIG. 78(G), FIG. 79(G)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to promoting the operation of the performance button 63 and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an effect in which the button image BG is displayed is first performed (FIGS. 77(C)(D), FIG. 78(C), FIGS. 79(A) to (D)). According to this configuration, attention can be directed to the performance button 63 prior to operating the performance button 63, contributing to improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the color change effect shown in FIG. 79(D) may shift to the confirmed stop effect (loss) shown in FIG. 79(H). That is, after the effect of displaying the button image BG is executed, the button rotation effect, the button confirmation effect, and the pressing promotion effect may not be executed. According to this configuration, the range of performances can be expanded and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the operation promotion effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the button rotation effect and the button enlargement effect are performed as a series of effects, but either the button rotation effect or the button enlargement effect may be performed.

[Modification 2]
Although the above was an example of the performance in the variation during the time-saving game, it may also be applied to the variation during the normal game where the player is left-handed.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the size change effect (FIG. 77(D)) and color change effect (FIG. 79(D)) are performed following the battle start effect. Such size change performance and color change performance may be performed, for example, when a game ball enters the game ball. For example, it is conceivable to set it as the timing when the second special figure reservation increases. Further, for example, it is possible to set the timing to be an over-win.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine that is equipped with an operation section that can be operated by a player and that can perform performances based on the operation of the operation section,
The operation promotion effect that promotes operation of the operation section includes displaying an operation section image imitating the operation section on the display screen as an image of the operation section viewed from a predetermined direction, and rotating the operation section about the predetermined direction. Includes a rotating effect that
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
The operation promotion performance includes an enlargement performance in which the entire operation unit image does not fit on the display screen and its edges are not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2,
The operation promotion performance includes a movement performance in which the operation unit image moves from one peripheral part to the other peripheral part so as to cross the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-3,
The operation promotion performance includes a promotion performance that displays the operation unit image and urges the user to press the operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4,
After a display effect in which the operation unit image is displayed on a display screen, the operation promotion effect is transferred to.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-5,
Even if the display effect is executed, the transition to the operation promotion effect may not occur;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-5 or aspect B1-6,
In the display performance, the entry of the game ball into a predetermined ball entry hole is used as an opportunity to suggest the expectation of a jackpot.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-5 to B1-7,
The display performance is executed from the start of variation of the performance symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The winning/losing notification performances A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 80 to 82. This winning/losing notification performance can be executed during the variation performance of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the winning/losing notification performance, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the main display device. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Win/lose announcement performance A]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification performance A.
First, after the variation start effect is executed and the variation of the effect symbols is started, the battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80(A). The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. Here, an effect is performed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80(B). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the battle performance. The obtained button images BG are piled up and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, two button images BG are obtained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(C), a battle effect is performed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. Here, an effect is performed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80(D). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the battle performance. The obtained button images BG are piled up and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, three button images BG are obtained, and a total of five button images BG are stocked. Note that the number of button images BG in stock suggests the degree of expectation for a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(E), a press promotion effect (initial stage) is executed. In the push promotion effect (initial stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG "Press" is displayed above it. Further, a stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the performance button 63, a performance is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are digested in order from the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(F), a press promotion effect (final stage) is executed. In the push promotion effect (final stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "Press" is displayed above it. Further, a stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the performance button 63, a performance is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are digested in order from the top. The push-down promotion effect (final stage) indicates a state in which the number of button images BG stocked on the right side is running low.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(G), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation performance is a performance in which the ally character CRA appears and the background becomes a rainbow background RB that is displayed in seven colors of the rainbow. The rainbow background RB is a background that guarantees a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(H), a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the confirmed stop performance (jackpot), the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double number. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R all stop at "7".

[Win/Lose Announcement Performance B]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification performance B.
First, after the variation start effect is executed and the variation of the effect symbols is started, the battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81(A). The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. Here, an effect is performed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81(B). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the battle performance. The obtained button images BG are piled up and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, two button images BG are obtained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), a battle effect is performed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. Here, an effect is performed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81(D). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the battle performance. The obtained button images BG are piled up and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, one button image BG is obtained, and a total of three button images BG are stocked. Note that the number of button images BG in stock suggests the degree of expectation for a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(E), a press promotion effect (initial stage) is executed. In the push promotion effect (initial stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG "Press" is displayed above it. Further, a stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the performance button 63, a performance is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are digested in order from the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(F), a press promotion effect (final stage) is executed. In the push promotion effect (final stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "Press" is displayed above it. Further, a stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the performance button 63, a performance is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are digested in order from the top. The push-down promotion effect (final stage) indicates a state in which the number of button images BG stocked on the right side is running low. Here, a situation is shown in which the stocked button images BG are used up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(G), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the confirmed stop performance (loss), both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "7", and the middle performance symbol 8C is stopped at "8".

[Win/Lose Announcement Performance C]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification performance C.
First, after the variation start effect is executed and the variation of the effect symbols is started, the battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82(A). The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. Here, an effect is performed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82(B). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the battle performance. The obtained button images BG are piled up and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, two button images BG are obtained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), a battle effect is performed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. Here, an effect is performed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82(D). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the battle performance. The obtained button images BG are piled up and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, three button images BG are obtained, and a total of five button images BG are stocked.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(E), a battle effect is performed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. Here, an effect is performed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82(F). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the battle performance. The obtained button images BG are piled up and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, three button images BG have been obtained, and a total of eight button images BG are in stock. Note that the number of button images BG in stock suggests the degree of expectation for a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(G), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation performance is a performance in which the ally character CRA appears and the background becomes a rainbow background RB that is displayed in seven colors of the rainbow. The rainbow background RB is a background that guarantees a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(H), a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the confirmed stop performance (jackpot), the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double number. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R all stop at "7".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the winning/losing announcement performance is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button get effect is performed in which button images BG are stocked (FIGS. 80(B)(D), FIGS. 81(B)(D), FIGS. 82(B)(D)(F)). )) After that, when the player presses the performance button 63, a pressing promotion performance is performed to digest the stocked button image BG (FIGS. 80(E)(F), FIGS. 81(E)(F)). In the middle of the pressing promotion performance, a jackpot confirmation performance is performed (FIG. 80(G)). According to this configuration, since the jackpot is announced by pressing the performance button 63, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, a button get effect in which button images BG are stocked is performed multiple times. In addition, one or more button images BG are stocked in one button get effect (Fig. 80(B)(D), Fig. 81(B)(D), Fig. 82(B)(D)(F)) ). According to this configuration, the stock of button images BG that allow the operation of the performance button 63 increases in stages, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the number of stocked button images BG in the button get effect suggests the degree of expectation for a jackpot. According to this configuration, the stock number of button images BG in the button get performance becomes an important factor, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to execute a jackpot confirmation performance that notifies the confirmation of a jackpot (FIGS. 80(G) and 82(G)). According to this configuration, when the jackpot confirmation performance is executed, the player can feel a sense of superiority, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after executing the button get effect, it is possible to execute the jackpot confirmation effect without pressing the effect button 63 (FIG. 82(B)(D)(F)(G) )). According to this configuration, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the winning/losing announcement performance is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the ally character CRA appears and the rainbow background RB is used as the jackpot confirmation effect. On the other hand, any kind of presentation may be used to notify the confirmation of the jackpot. For example, a full rotation performance may be performed in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R rotate in a so-called double-roll state. Furthermore, for example, it may be a premium effect that displays a premium image that guarantees a jackpot. For example, it may be an effect such as vibrating the effect button 63, sending air toward the player, or lighting a specific lamp.

[Modification 2]
In the above, when the player presses the performance button 63 in the push promotion performance, a performance is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are digested in order from the top (FIG. 81(F)). Here, if the jackpot confirmation performance is not executed and the stocked button images BG have been used up, the winning will be unsuccessful (FIG. 81(G)). On the other hand, it may be possible to perform a performance that clearly indicates that the selection has been rejected during the push promotion performance.

[Modification 3]
The above was an example of notifying the winners and losers of the jackpot lottery, but it is also possible to notify the winners and losers of the lottery for the number of rounds when a jackpot occurs, and the hearth win of the lottery that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot game. good.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine that is equipped with an operation section that can be operated by a player and that can perform performances based on the operation of the operation section,
a first effect in which an operation unit image imitating the operation unit is stocked on the display screen; a second effect in which the operation unit image stocked by the first effect is consumed by the operation of the operation unit; In the middle of the second performance, it is possible to execute a third performance that can announce a win or loss in a specific lottery,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The first performance is a performance in which one or more of the operation unit images are stocked multiple times;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2,
Suggesting the degree of expectation of winning in the specific lottery based on the stock number of the operation unit images in the first performance;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-3,
The specific lottery in the third performance is a jackpot lottery;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4,
The third performance is a confirmation performance that notifies the confirmation of a jackpot,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-5,
It is possible to perform the third performance after the first performance without executing the second performance;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-5,
The confirmed performance includes a full rotation performance in which the performance symbols are aligned.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The operation section image display effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 83 to 85. This operation unit image display effect can be executed in various types of effects such as a variation effect of a decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the operation section image display effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and executes the main control board. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Operation unit image display effect A]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image display effect A. In the operation unit image display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 83(A), during a round game after a jackpot is confirmed, a effect ( A MAX acquisition challenge performance) will be held. Here, in a state where 4R has already been obtained as the number of rounds for a jackpot, it is a performance (round promotion performance) that aims to promote the number of rounds from 4R to the upper limit number of rounds 16R. On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, a character image MG1 of "MAX Acquisition Challenge!" is displayed. Note that MAX indicates the upper limit of the total number of rounds in this jackpot (for example, 16R). Further, the MAX acquisition challenge effect may be performed during the round game or may be performed before the round game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(B), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, below the character image CG, the type of MAX acquisition challenge is displayed, and here, a character image MG2 of "Ippatsu!" is displayed. This suggests that a performance will be performed to determine whether or not MAX can be obtained with a single operation. Further, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end portion of the sword member 64. Button image BG represents the appearance of production button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the button image BG, and the portion of the button image BG where the sword image KG overlaps is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(C), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, a character image MG3 of "Please!" is displayed. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX acquisition. A button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is difficult to see.
Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than when they were displayed in FIG. 83(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), the button image BG and sword image KG of FIG. 83(C) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(E), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is difficult to see. Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when they were displayed in FIGS. 83(C) and (D). Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(F), the button image BG and sword image KG of FIG. 83(E) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(G), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is difficult to see. Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when they were displayed in FIGS. 83(E) and (F). Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(H), the button image BG and sword image KG in FIG. 83(G) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(I), a sword image KG, a timer bar TB, and an operation promotion image SG are displayed. The sword image KG is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The timer bar TB indicates the valid period for accepting operation of the sword member 64. The timer bar TB is displayed in front of the sword image KG, overlapping the lower part of the sword image KG. The operation promotion image SG is an image that prompts the player to operate the sword member 64, and here a character image MG4 of "Push in!!!" is displayed. The operation promotion image SG is displayed in front of the sword image KG, overlapping the top of the sword image KG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(J), when the player presses the sword member 64 and confirms that MAX acquisition is achieved, a character image MG5 of "MAX acquisition!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. .

[Operation unit image display effect B]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image display effect B. In the operation unit image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 84(A), during a round game after a jackpot is confirmed, a display ( A MAX acquisition challenge performance) will be held. Here, in a state where 4R has already been obtained as the number of rounds for a jackpot, it is a performance (round promotion performance) that aims to promote the number of rounds from 4R to the upper limit number of rounds 16R. On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, a character image MG1 of "MAX Acquisition Challenge!" is displayed. Note that MAX indicates the upper limit of the total number of rounds in this jackpot (for example, 16R). Further, the MAX acquisition challenge effect may be performed during the round game or may be performed before the round game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(B), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, below the character image CG, the type of MAX acquisition challenge is displayed, and here, a character image MG2 of "Ippatsu!" is displayed. This suggests that a performance will be performed to determine whether or not MAX can be obtained with a single operation. Further, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end portion of the sword member 64. The button image BG represents the appearance of the sword button 65, and is the same image as the sword button image KBG, except for the size difference. Button image BG represents the appearance of production button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the button image BG, and the portion of the button image BG where the sword image KG overlaps is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(C), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, a character image MG3 of "Please!" is displayed. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX acquisition. A button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than when they were displayed in FIG. 83(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(D), the button image BG and sword image KG of FIG. 84(C) gradually disappear at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(E), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when they were displayed in FIGS. 84(C) and (D). Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(F), the button image BG and sword image KG of FIG. 84(E) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(G), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap with the front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when they were displayed in FIGS. 84(E) and (F). Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(H), the button image BG and sword image KG in FIG. 84(G) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap with the front of the sword image KG. Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(I), a sword image KG, a timer bar TB, and an operation promotion image SG are displayed. The sword image KG is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The timer bar TB indicates the valid period for accepting operation of the sword member 64. The timer bar TB is displayed in front of the sword image KG, overlapping the lower part of the sword image KG. The operation promotion image SG is an image that prompts the player to operate the sword member 64, and here a character image MG4 of "Push in!!!" is displayed. The operation promotion image SG is displayed in front of the sword image KG, overlapping the top of the sword image KG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(J), when the player presses the sword member 64 and confirms that MAX acquisition is achieved, a character image MG5 of "MAX acquisition!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. .

[Operation unit image display effect C]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image display effect C. In the operation unit image display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 85(A), during a round game after a jackpot is confirmed, a display ( MAX acquisition challenge performance) will be held. Here, in a state where 4R has already been obtained as the number of rounds for a jackpot, it is a performance (round promotion performance) that aims to promote the number of rounds from 4R to the upper limit number of rounds 16R. On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, a character image MG1 of "MAX Acquisition Challenge!" is displayed. Note that MAX indicates the upper limit of the total number of rounds in this jackpot (for example, 16R). Further, the MAX acquisition challenge effect may be performed during the round game or may be performed before the round game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(B), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, below the character image CG, the type of MAX acquisition challenge is displayed, and here, a character image MG2 of "Ippatsu!" is displayed. This suggests that a performance will be performed to determine whether or not MAX can be obtained with a single operation. Further, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end portion of the sword member 64. Button image BG represents the appearance of production button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the button image BG, and the portion of the button image BG where the sword image KG overlaps is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(C), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, a character image MG3 of "Please!" is displayed. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX acquisition. A button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than when they were displayed in FIG. 85(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(D), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than when they were displayed in FIG. 85(B). Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(E), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when they were displayed in FIGS. 85(C) and (D). Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(F), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when they were displayed in FIGS. 85(C) and (D). Note that the character image CG and character image MG on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(G), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when they were displayed in FIGS. 85(E) and (F). Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(H), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when they were displayed in FIGS. 85(E) and (F). Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(I), a button image BG, a timer bar TB, and an operation promotion image SG are displayed. The button image BG is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG represents the appearance of the production button 63, and is larger than the button images BG in FIGS. 85(B) to (H). The timer bar TB indicates the valid period for accepting the operation of the production button 63. The timer bar TB is displayed in front of the button image BG, overlapping the bottom of the button image BG. The operation promotion image SG is an image that prompts the player to operate the performance button 63, and here a character image MG6 of "Press!!!" is displayed. The operation promotion image SG is displayed in front of the button image BG, overlapping the top of the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(J), when the player presses down the performance button 63 and cannot obtain the MAX, a character image MG7 of "MAX acquisition failed!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Ru.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation unit image display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the first button image BG (first operation section image) and the sword image KG (second operation section image) are displayed so as to overlap. It is possible to perform the following effects and a second effect in which either one of the button image BG and the sword image KG is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, in the first effect, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap with the front of the sword image KG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, in the first effect, the part of the sword image KG located behind the button image BG is visible through the button image BG. displayed as possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, before the first effect, a third effect is further executed in which the sword image KG is displayed in front of the button image BG so as to overlap. It is possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, in the third effect, the part of the button image BG located behind the sword image KG is difficult to see due to the sword image KG. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the size of the button image BG displayed in the first performance is different from the size of the button image BG displayed in the third performance. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the operation unit image display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, the operation section image display effects A to C are performed during a round game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be performed during a normal game, before a round game, during a jackpot game, etc.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, the operation unit image display performances A to C are performed in the performance (MAX acquisition challenge performance) that determines whether or not the maximum number of rounds can be obtained as the total number of rounds for a jackpot. It is not limited to this. For example, it may be performed in a performance that determines whether or not a particular performance will be successful, a performance that determines whether or not a particular performance is a jackpot, a performance that determines whether a normal jackpot or a variable probability jackpot, etc.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, in the operation unit image display effects A to C, the size of the button image BG and the sword image KG gradually increases each time they are displayed. They may be displayed in the same size, or they may be displayed in the same size.
[Modification 4]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, in the operation unit image display effects A to C, the button image BG is the same as the image representing the appearance of the effect button 63 and the sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end of the sword member 64. Although images are used, images representing the appearance of the performance button 63, the sword member 64, the sword button 65, and various other operation sections can be used as the operation section images.
[Modification 5]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, a background image may be displayed in the background of the button image BG and the sword image KG, and the button image BG and the sword image KG may be displayed in front of the background image. Further, a portion of the background image where the button image BG and the sword image KG overlap may be made visible through the button image BG and the sword image KG.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B3-1]
a first operation section and a second operation section that can be operated by the player;
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first operation unit image representing the first operation unit,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second operation unit image representing the second operation unit,
a first effect in which the first operation unit image and the second operation unit image are displayed so as to overlap;
a second effect in which either one of the first operation unit image and the second operation unit image is displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
In the first effect, the first operation unit image is displayed so as to overlap in front of the second operation unit image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2,
In the first effect, a portion of the second operation unit image located behind the first operation unit image is displayed so as to be visible through the first operation unit image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2 or aspect B3-3,
Before the first effect, it is further possible to perform a third effect in which the second operation part image is displayed in front of the first operation part image so as to overlap.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4,
In the third effect, a portion of the first operation unit image located behind the second operation unit image is difficult to see due to the second operation unit image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4 or aspect B3-5,
The size of the first operation unit image displayed in the first performance is different from the size of the first operation unit image displayed in the third performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The appearance/disappearance effects A to C of the effect buttons will be explained below using FIGS. 86 to 88. In FIGS. 86 to 88, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings, and the image display Various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing the drawing, and decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing the drawing. be.

This production button appearance/disappearance production is performed during the variation production of decorative symbols (for example, the period from the start of variation to the stop of variation of the decorative symbols), during a jackpot game (jackpot production) in which a profit is given to the player, etc. This allows the player's intention to operate (press) the performance button 63 to be reflected in the progress of the performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 receives various commands from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable performance start command, a preliminary determination command, an opening command for various jackpot games, a round designation command for a jackpot game, and an ending command for a jackpot game). If the analysis includes an instruction to execute the appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, first, the effect button appearance/disappearance effect A will be explained, followed by the effect button appearance/disappearance effect B, and then the effect button appearance/disappearance effect C will be explained in order.

[Production button appearance/disappearance production A]
First, the appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button will be explained with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button. The appearance/disappearance performance A of the performance button is selected from among a plurality of types of ready-to-reach performances when a reach is formed during the fluctuating performance of decorative symbols. In the appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button, first, as shown in FIG. 86(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") starts in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is then stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number) (temporarily stopped at the number "7" here), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach. ing.

When a reach is formed, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the performance button 63, a first performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner. The English word "PUSH" is engraved in the portion of the first performance button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the performance button 63. In addition, the "predetermined lighting mode" may be based on the expectation of a jackpot (variable performance start command), for example, white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing) The expectation level for a jackpot is set high in the order of blinking (high chance of jackpot).

Once the reach is formed, it is the beginning of the performance button appearance/disappearance performance execution period in which the production button appearance/disappearance performance can be performed, and timing starts and the performance button is not pressed until the end of the performance button appearance/disappearance performance execution period. It is now possible to perform the appearance and disappearance of. In other words, the performance button appearance/disappearance performance execution period determines the effective period during which the performance button appearance/disappearance performance can be performed, and determines the player's intention to operate (press) the performance button 63. This is the period during which the appearance and disappearance of the production button can be reflected in the progress of the production. In this embodiment, the appearance/disappearance effect execution period of the effect button is set to, for example, 6 seconds, but it may be shorter (e.g., 4 seconds) or longer (e.g., 8 seconds). good.

The first performance button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and when the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the display on the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. 86(B) On the upper left side of the screen 7a, there is an image that is the same as the first production button image BTN (an image with all the same characteristic information such as button shape, size, and light emitting mode) or a similar image (a part or all of the characteristic information is the same). The second effect button image BTN2 is displayed as a similar image (the light emitting mode may be the same or different), and the player is prompted to operate (press) the effect button 63. A first performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is placed at the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is displayed in a state in which a predetermined light emission mode continues. .

When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 again, the second performance button image BTN2 displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 disappears, as shown in FIG. 86(C). (Disappear). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN is displayed as an image with the predetermined light emission mode continued. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a second effect button image BTN2 appears on the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 86(D). A first performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the performance button 63. and the predetermined light emitting mode is displayed continuously.

When the player further operates (presses) the effect button 63, the second effect button image BTN2 displayed on the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed as shown in FIG. 86(E). Disappear (disappear). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN is displayed as an image with the predetermined light emission mode continued. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

After that, when the end of the performance execution period for the appearance and disappearance of the performance button, that is, when the valid period in which the appearance and disappearance of the performance button can be performed ends, as shown in FIG. 86(F), the left decorative pattern 8L is a number. "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "9", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "7" are stopped and displayed, and the miss is confirmed and displayed. In this embodiment, in the appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button, the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "9", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "7" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. "7" was stopped and displayed, and the error was confirmed, but on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern (for example, the number " 7'') are all stopped and displayed, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a jackpot is awarded and a profit is given to the player will be performed.

Note that in a state where the reach shown in FIG. 86(A) is formed and the first performance button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player does not operate (press) the performance button 63 at all. (operation)), the appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button shown in FIGS. 86(B) to 86(E) performed within the effect button appearance/disappearance effect execution period is not performed, and the effect button appearance/disappearance effect is executed. At the end of the period, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R shown in FIG. 86(F) are stopped and displayed.

In this way, the second performance button image BTN2 appears at a random position (arbitrary position) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as not to overlap with the first performance button image BTN. There is.

[Production button appearance/disappearance production B]
Next, the appearance/disappearance effect B of the effect button will be explained with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining appearance/disappearance effect B of the effect button. The appearance/disappearance performance B of the performance button is selected from among a plurality of types of ready-to-reach performances when a reach is formed during the fluctuating performance of decorative symbols. In the appearance/disappearance effect B of the effect button, first, as shown in FIG. 87(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") starts in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before the decorative pattern stops, it decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, and is then stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number) (temporarily stopped at the number "7" here), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach. ing.

When a reach is formed, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the performance button 63, a first performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner. The English word "PUSH" is engraved in the portion of the first performance button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the performance button 63. In addition, the "predetermined lighting mode" may be based on the expectation of a jackpot (variable performance start command), for example, white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing) The expectation level of winning the jackpot is set high in the order of blinking (high chance of jackpot).

When the reach is formed, it is the beginning of the appearance/disappearance effect execution period of the effect button in which the effect button appearance/disappearance effect can be performed, and timing starts and the effect button is not pressed until the end of the effect button appearance/disappearance effect execution period. It is now possible to perform the appearance and disappearance of. In other words, the performance button appearance/disappearance performance execution period defines a valid period in which the performance button appearance/disappearance performance can be performed, and it does not reflect the player's intention to operate (press) the performance button 63. This is a period during which the appearance and disappearance of the production button can be reflected in the progress of the production. In addition, in this embodiment, the appearance/disappearance effect execution period of the effect button is set to, for example, 6 seconds, but it may be shorter (e.g., 4 seconds) or longer (e.g., 8 seconds). good.

The first performance button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and when the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the display on the image display device 7 is displayed as shown in FIG. 87(B). Hole images MH imitating a mole's hole are displayed on the left and right sides near the top of the screen 7a, respectively, and a hole image MH imitating a mole's hole is formed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, Hole images MH resembling mole holes are displayed on the left and right sides near the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively, and five holes resembling mole holes are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Image MH is displayed. Here, the five hole images MH have the same shape, the same size, and the same color.

An image imitating a mole with a smiling face (hereinafter referred to as "smiling mole image") is displayed from the hole image MH on the left side near the top of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner in which MCH1 shows its face. , an image that is the same as the first effect button image BTN (an image whose characteristic information such as button shape, size, and light emitting mode are all the same) or a similar image (the characteristic information and the same The second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed as a similar image (the light emitting mode may be the same or different). At this time, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the performance button 63, a first performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A predetermined light emitting mode is displayed continuously.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, as shown in FIG. Disappear (disappear). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an image imitating a mole with a dizzy and dizzy face (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as "Kurakura Mole Image") is displayed in a changed form to MCH2. Note that while the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the image display device while the predetermined light emitting mode continues. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a.

When the player further operates (presses) the production button 63, as shown in FIG. An image imitating a mole with a masked face (hereinafter referred to as a "glasses mole image")" MCH3 is displayed in a manner that shows its face. At this time, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the performance button 63, a first performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A predetermined light emitting mode is displayed continuously. Note that the second performance button image BTN2 may be displayed in a manner that it is placed above the spectacled mole image MCH3 together with the spectacled mole image MCH3.

When the player again operates (presses) the production button 63 multiple times (three times in this case), the display changes from the spectacled mole image MCH3 to the light-headed mole image MCH2, as shown in FIG. 87(E). Ru. Unlike the smiling mole image MCH1, the glasses mole image MCH3 is resistant to being hit, and when the glasses mole image MCH3 is appearing, unless the production button 63 is operated (pressing operation) multiple times (here, 3 times), it is not easily hit. The spectacled mole image MCH3 does not change to the light-headed mole image MCH2. Note that the first performance button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state where a predetermined light emission mode is continued. In addition, if the second performance button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed above the spectacled mole image MCH3 together with the spectacled mole image MCH3, the player presses the performance button 63 multiple times (in this case, 3 times). When the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is displayed in a changed form from the spectacled mole image MCH3 to the light-headed mole image MCH2. be done.

When the player further operates (presses) the effect button 63, the smiling mole image MCH1 appears from the hole image MH on the right side near the top of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 87(F). At the same time, the second effect button image BTN2 is displayed in a manner that it appears above the smiling mole image MCH1. At this time, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the performance button 63, a first performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A predetermined light emitting mode is displayed continuously.

When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 again, the second performance button image BTN2 that was displayed on the right side near the top of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed as shown in FIG. 87(G). Disappear (disappear). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is displayed in a changed form from the smiling mole image MCH1 to the light-headed mole image MCH2. Note that while the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the image display device while the predetermined light emitting mode continues. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the smiling mole image MCH1 appears from the hole image MH in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 87(H). Is displayed. At this time, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the performance button 63, a first performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A predetermined light emitting mode is displayed continuously.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 again, the display changes from the smiling mole image MCH1 to the light-headed mole image MCH2, as shown in FIG. 87(I). Note that the first performance button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state where a predetermined light emission mode is continued.

After that, when the end of the performance execution period for the appearance and disappearance of the performance button, that is, when the valid period in which the appearance and disappearance of the performance button can be performed ends, as shown in FIG. 87(J), the left decorative pattern 8L is a number. "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "9", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "7" are stopped and displayed, and the miss is confirmed and displayed.

In this embodiment, in the appearance/disappearance effect B of the effect button, the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "9", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "7" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. "7" was stopped and displayed, and the error was confirmed, but on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern (for example, the number " 7'') are all stopped and displayed, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a jackpot is awarded and a profit is given to the player will be performed.

Note that in a state where the reach shown in FIG. 87(A) is formed and the first performance button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player does not operate (press) the performance button 63 at all. operation), the button appearance/disappearance effect shown in FIGS. 87(B) to 87(I), which is performed during the effect button appearance/disappearance effect execution period, is not performed, and the effect button appearance/disappearance effect is executed. At the end of the period, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R shown in FIG. 87(J) are stopped and displayed.

In this way, the second effect button image BTN2 appears at a fixed position where the smiling mole image MCH1 and the spectacled mole image MCH3 appear.

[Production button appearance/disappearance production C]
Next, the appearance/disappearance effect C of the effect button will be explained with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining appearance/disappearance effect C of the effect button. The appearance/disappearance performance C of the performance button is performed during a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a profit is given to the player, and is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the jackpot performance is This will not be done if there is a so-called "holding series" in which there is a jackpot among the held balls before the end of the game). The presence or absence of this pending series is determined based on the jackpot preliminary determination result (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type preliminary determination result) and the fluctuation pattern preliminary determination result, which are included in the preliminary determination command. In addition, if the performance of the held series is not performed, in other words, before the jackpot performance ends, there is no held ball that will become a jackpot.

In the appearance/disappearance performance C of the performance button, first, as shown in FIG. During the period, a performance mode selection screen is displayed that allows the player to select a performance mode after the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game). During the specific period, there is a first period for selecting a production mode (production mode selection period), and a mode transition to the selected production mode after the first period (production mode selection period) has elapsed. A second period (performance mode confirmation notification period). In this embodiment, in a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game) (that is, in a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game)), The beginning of this predetermined period coincides with the end of the specific period in order to carry out a catchphrase display in which the catchphrase of the gaming machine manufacturer is displayed, and an addictive prevention display in which a warning against dependence (addiction) on the game is displayed. ing.

When the performance mode selection screen is displayed, a first performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is displayed in order to prompt the player to select the performance mode by operating (pressing) the performance button 63. It is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the device 7 and displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner. The English word "PUSH" is engraved in the portion of the first performance button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the performance button 63. Note that the "predetermined light emission mode" is, for example, blinking white light.

The production modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate, and each time the production button 63 is operated (pressed), the reels rotate and a specific area is displayed. A selection section SEL in which the performance mode that has reached 1 is displayed larger than other performance modes is displayed in a rectangular area from the center to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The performance mode located in this specific area becomes the selected performance mode. Note that when the production mode selection screen is displayed for the first time, A mode is placed in a specific area as a default, but the next time the production mode selection screen is displayed, the default ( In other words, mode A) may always be arranged in a specific area, or the selected production mode may be arranged in a specific area when the production mode selection screen was displayed last time.

To the right of the selection section SEL, there is a demonstration area DS, which explains the contents of the currently selected production mode using various images and various characters, in a rectangular area from the center to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is displayed. The demo area DS is formed as a rectangular area, and the characters "DEMO" indicating the demonstration screen of the production mode are displayed on the upper left side of the demo area DS.

In mode A, a production with the theme of "sun" is promoted, and a theme image PM imitating the "sun" is displayed as an animation on the left side of the demo area DS, and the same image as the first production button image BTN is displayed. (Images with all the same characteristic information such as button shape, size, lighting mode, etc.) or similar images (images with some or all similarity to the characteristic information (the lighting modes may be the same or different) )), the second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the demonstration area DS. Note that an explanatory text MME regarding the progress of the performance in the A mode is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, as shown in FIG. 88(B). As the A mode moves downward, the D mode, which is placed below the A mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and the B mode, which is placed above the A mode, is identified from above. The reels are displayed as rotating towards the area. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the first performance button image BTN continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In B mode, a performance with the theme of "clouds" is advanced, and a theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed as a moving image in the center of the demonstration area DS, and an explanatory text MME about the progress of the performance in B mode is displayed. is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, as shown in FIG. 88(C), the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL. As the B mode moves downward, the A mode, which is placed below the B mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and the C mode, which is placed above the B mode, is identified from above. The reels are displayed as rotating towards the area. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the first performance button image BTN continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In C mode, a performance with the theme of "rain" is progressed, and a theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed as an animation in the center of the demo area DS, and an explanatory text MME about the progress of the performance in C mode is displayed. is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in a specific area of the selection part SEL, as shown in FIG. 88(D), the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL. As the C mode moves downward, the B mode, which is placed below the C mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and the D mode, which is placed above the C mode, is identified from above. The reels are displayed as rotating towards the area. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the first performance button image BTN continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In D mode, a performance with the theme of "snow" is progressed, and a theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed as a moving image in the center of the demonstration area DS, and an explanatory text MME about the progress of the performance in D mode is displayed. is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, as shown in FIG. 88(E). As the D mode moves downward, the C mode, which is placed below the D mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and the A mode, which is placed above the D mode, is identified from above. The reels are displayed in a manner that they rotate toward the area, and the A mode becomes a display manner in which the reels are located in the specific area again. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the first performance button image BTN continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, in the state where the A mode is in the display mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL, the first period for selecting the production mode (production mode selection period) has elapsed, and the display mode is changed to the selected production mode. At the beginning of the second period (production mode confirmation notification period) for notifying the mode transition, as shown in FIG. is displayed in a manner that spreads toward the four corners (enlarged manner), and on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a theme imitating the "sun" that is being performed based on the theme of "sun" in A mode. The image PM is displayed in a large size, and a message MG informing that the selected production mode is A mode is displayed in a large size on the right side of the theme image PM from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center of the right side. , the second performance button image BTN2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, the second period (production mode confirmation notification period) has elapsed, and the start of this predetermined period arrives in a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot production (jackpot game) (that is, At the beginning of a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot effect (jackpot game), the catchphrase of the gaming machine manufacturer is displayed, warning against dependence (addiction) on the game. is displayed, and at the end of the predetermined period, that is, at the end of the jackpot effect (jackpot game), as shown in FIG. A theme image PM imitating an advancing "sun" is displayed in a large size on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a second effect button image BTN2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It will be displayed.

Then, based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, entry of the game ball into the second starting hole (second starting winning hole, second ball entering hole, variable starting hole) 21), the front of the theme image PM is The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as decorative patterns (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. Fluctuation display starts. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the theme image PM, which is a background image placed behind the decorative pattern, can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is then stopped and displayed.

In this way, in the appearance/disappearance effect C of the effect button, each time the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the reels rotate in the effect mode consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode. The effect mode that reaches the specific area as the reels rotate is displayed larger than other effect modes. At this time, when the A mode reaches the specific area, the second effect button image BTN2 appears in the demo area DS, and when the B mode reaches the specific area, the second effect button image BTN2 appears from the demo area DS. It will disappear (disappear). In other words, in the effect button appearance/disappearance effect C, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the second effect button image BTN2 appears on the display screen 7a (demonstration area DS) of the image display device 7. It is designed to appear or disappear (disappear).

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86(A) to 86(E) of the appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button, the effect button 63 (operating means) that can be operated by the player, The image display device 7 includes an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images, and a first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is provided on the image display device 7. (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second effect button image BTN2) imitating the effect button 63 (operating means) is generated based on the effect that the effect button 63 (operating means) is operated (pressing operation). 2 operation means image) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means), and the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means). At least one of the second effect that is hidden (disappeared from the image display device 7 (display means)) can be executed. According to this configuration, based on the fact that the production button 63 (operation means) has been operated (press operation), the second production button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the production button 63 (operation means) is generated. ) can be displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means) or hidden (disappeared (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means)). It is possible to entertain people and improve their interest. The same applies to the effect button appearance/disappearance effect B shown in FIGS. 87(A) to 87(I) and the appearance/disappearance effect C of the effect button shown in FIGS. 88(A) to 88(E).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86(A) to 86(E) of appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) in the first effect in which the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means). (means image) is displayed in a different position. For example, while the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second performance button image BTN2 (second (operating means image) is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and on the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. According to this configuration, the image display device 7 (display Since the game is displayed on the screen (means), it is possible to visually entertain the players and increase their interest.
In the effect button appearance/disappearance effect B shown in FIGS. 87(A) to 87(I), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is placed in the lower center of the image display device 7 (display means). In contrast, the second production button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 7 (display means) or on the lower right side of the image display device 7 (display means). It is the same because it is displayed.
In the effect button appearance/disappearance effect C shown in FIGS. 88(A) to 88(E), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is placed in the lower center of the image display device 7 (display means). In contrast, a second production button is displayed in the demo area DS (lower right side of the demo area DS) located in the rectangular area from the center to the upper right corner of the image display device 7 (display means). The same applies because image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86(A) to 86(E) of appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button, the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) when a reach is formed during the fluctuating effect of decorative symbols (during a predetermined effect), and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). can be displayed after the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, when a reach is formed during a fluctuating performance of decorative symbols (during a predetermined performance), the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means ), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) can be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). After the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is actually displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). When displayed on the display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) appears in a display mode, which can visually entertain the player and add interest. It is possible to improve the The same applies to the appearance/disappearance effect B of the effect buttons shown in FIGS. 87(A) to 87(I).
In the appearance/disappearance performance C of the performance buttons shown in FIGS. 88(A) to 88(E), the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game) during a specific period from the beginning to the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game) When a performance mode selection screen that allows the player to select a subsequent performance mode is displayed (during a predetermined performance), the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device. After being displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) when the A mode is selected. Therefore, after the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the A mode can be actually selected. A display mode in which the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) appears when the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) As a result, players can be visually entertained and their interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86(A) to 86(E) of appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button, the image display device 7 (display means) has the left decorative pattern 8L, A reach effect can be displayed in the variable effect display of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). The predetermined performance is a reach performance. According to this configuration, the timing at which the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) can be set to the period during which the reach effect is being performed. , In addition to the image by the reach effect, after the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) appears, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) further appears. Therefore, it is possible to visually entertain the players and increase their interest. The same applies to the appearance/disappearance effect B of the effect buttons shown in FIGS. 87(A) to 87(I).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 88(A) to 88(E) of the appearance/disappearance effect C of the effect button, the image display device 7 (display means) displays the jackpot effect (the winning game The predetermined performance in which the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) is a jackpot performance (performance of a winning game). It is. According to this configuration, the timing at which the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) is during the period in which the jackpot performance (performance of the winning game) is performed. This can be a specific period of time, and in addition to the image from the jackpot effect (the effect of the winning game), after the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) appears, the second effect button is displayed. Since the image BTN2 (second operating means image) can appear, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be increased.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86(A) to 86(E) of appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button, the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) The color and the color of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) are the same color. According to this configuration, the color of the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) and the color of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) are displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). ), it is possible to visually entertain the players and increase their interest. The same applies to the effect button appearance/disappearance effect B shown in FIGS. 87(A) to 87(I) and the appearance/disappearance effect C of the effect button shown in FIGS. 88(A) to 88(E).

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the effect button appearance/disappearance effect A shown in FIG. 86, the effect button appearance/disappearance effect B shown in FIG. 87, and the effect button appearance/disappearance effect C shown in FIG. The first production button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and based on the fact that the production button 63 (operation means) has been operated (pressing operation), A first effect in which a second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means), and a second effect A second effect in which the effect button image BTN2 (second operating means image) is not displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)); I was able to do one or the other. However, the sword member 64 or the sword button 65 may be used instead of the production button 63 (operating means). In this case, on the image display device 7 (display means), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) are displayed on the sword member 64. The image imitates the sword button 65.

[Modification 2]
In the appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button A shown in FIG. 86, when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). (disappeared), and when the production button 63 was operated (pressed) again, the second production button image BTN2 (second operation means image) was displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means). . However, after the second effect button image BTN2 (second operating means image) disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means), the effect button 63 is pressed multiple times (for example, twice, three times, ..., a predetermined fixed number of times out of 9 and 10 times, or a random number of times set in real time by lottery in the production control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) from 2 to 10 times). You may also perform an operation (press operation). In this way, each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is erased (disappeared) or displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). This can contribute to eliminating the monotony of having to (appear). Also, depending on the number of times the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) may disappear (disappear) on the image display device 7 (display means). , are displayed (appeared), etc., so that the player himself/herself can discover the correspondence relationship such as , display (appearance), etc., so that the act of operating (pressing) the production button 63 is less likely to feel monotonous, thereby suppressing a decrease in the desire to play. It can also contribute to this.

[Modification 3]
In the effect button appearance/disappearance effect A in FIG. 86 and the effect button appearance/disappearance effect B in FIG. 87, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). (disappears) and is displayed (appears), the size of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is gradually increased toward the maximum size. Good too. In this case, each time the production button 63 is operated (pressed), the size of the second production button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is gradually increased toward the maximum size. Alternatively, the size may be stopped at a constant size from just before reaching the maximum size (some steps before the maximum size (in the middle)). In this way, it is possible to increase the expectation that a jackpot game (jackpot effect) that gives a profit to the player will occur due to the operation (press operation) of the effect button 63, and This can contribute to making it difficult for players to become passive.

[Modification 4]
In the effect button appearance/disappearance effect A in FIG. 86 and the effect button appearance/disappearance effect B in FIG. 87, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). (disappears) and is displayed (appears), the expectation is that a jackpot game (jackpot performance) will occur in which the color of the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) gives a profit to the player. It may also be possible to change the color stepwise to a color that enhances the feeling. For example, the color gradually changes from white → blue → green → red → golden yellow → seven colors (rainbow colors). This can contribute to making it difficult for the player to become passive in operating (pressing) the performance button 63.

[Modification 5]
In the appearance/disappearance effect C of the effect button shown in FIG. 88, a theme image PM imitating the theme of each mode is displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demonstration area DS. Such videos are videos that explain the flow of the production of each mode, characters, backgrounds, scenes, etc., and may be 3D CG videos, animation videos, or movie videos. It may be a one-shot scene. Note that a still image may be used instead of a moving image.

[Modification 6]
In the effect button appearance/disappearance effect A in FIG. 86, the effect button appearance/disappearance effect B in FIG. 87, and the effect button appearance/disappearance effect C in FIG. 88, a first effect button image imitating the effect button 63 (operating means) is used. With the BTN (first operation means image) being displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the production button 63 (operation means) is pressed based on the production button 63 (operation means) being operated (pressing operation). The second effect button image BTN2 (second operating means image) imitating the first effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means), and the second effect button image BTN2 ( It was possible to execute a second effect in which the second operation means image) is hidden from the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)). . However, in a state where the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating the performance button 63 (operation means) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the performance button 63 (operation means) Every time is operated (pressing operation), a second production button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the production button 63 (operation means) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means). For example, when the production button 63 (operation means) is operated (pressed) 10 times, the second production button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is executed. It may be possible to perform a second effect in which the image is hidden from the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)). 63 (operation means) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the production button 63 (operation means) is operated (pressed). operation), a second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the performance button 63 (operation means) is hidden on the image display device 7 (display means). 7 (display means)), and for example, when the presentation button 63 (operation means) is operated (pressed) 10 times, the second presentation button 63 (disappears) is executed. It may be possible to perform a first effect in which the image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means).

[Modified example 7]
In the appearance/disappearance effect C of the effect button shown in FIG. 88, the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) during the jackpot effect (the effect of the winning game). Afterwards, the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) was displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). However, as a performance of a winning game, in addition to a jackpot performance, during a performance of a small winning game, after the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). The second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) may be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), or during the performance in a small winning game instead of the jackpot performance, the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) may be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). After the first production button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the second production button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 ( display means).

[Modified example 8]
The appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button A shown in FIG. 86, the appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button B shown in FIG. 87, and the appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button C shown in FIG. A production may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B4-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of displaying various images,
Based on the operation of the operation means in a state where a first operation means image imitating the operation means is displayed on the display means,
a first effect in which a second operating means image imitating the operating means is displayed on the display means;
a second effect in which the second operation means image is not displayed on the display means;
capable of performing at least one of the following;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
The second operating means image is displayed at a different position from the first operating means image in the first effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1 or aspect B4-2,
The first operating means image is displayed on the display means during a predetermined performance,
The second operating means image can be displayed after the first operating means image is displayed on the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3,
The display means is capable of displaying a reach effect in a variable effect display of the decorative pattern,
The predetermined performance is the reach performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3,
The display means is capable of displaying a performance of a winning game,
The predetermined performance is a performance of the winning game,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-5,
The color of the first operating means image and the color of the second operating means image are the same color,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The winning notification performances A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 89 to 91. This winning notification performance can be executed during the variation performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the winning notification effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the main display device. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

For all winning notification performances A to C, when the performance button 63 is activated during the battle performance and the number of operations of the performance button 63 reaches 1, 5, 8, 12, or 14 times, the jackpot is confirmed. This is a performance that carries out the following. If the jackpot confirmation effect is not executed even after reaching the 14th time, the loss is confirmed.

[Winner announcement performance A]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 89(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, a state in which the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner is shown. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special symbols, and here three pending images 9B are displayed. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently being changed on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the fluctuation occurs during a time-saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R have stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 89(C), a battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle performance (start), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle takes place between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and when the friendly character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a jackpot. In the battle performance (start), the input of the performance button 63 becomes valid. That is, although there is no display on the display screen 7a that prompts the user to press the production button 63, the production control microcomputer 91 controls the production button 63 based on the signal from the production button detection switch 63a that is input via the relay board 108. Detects operations. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the operation has been performed a total of five times so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(D), a battle effect (initial stage) is executed. In the battle performance (initial stage), the enemy character CRB has the upper hand and is driven to corner the ally character CRA to the right. In the battle performance (initial stage), the input of the performance button 63 becomes valid. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 10 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(E), a battle performance (middle stage) is executed. In the battle performance (middle stage), an ally character CRA becomes dominant and a performance is performed in which the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left. In the battle performance (mid-term), the input of the performance button 63 becomes valid. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 12 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(F), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation performance is a performance in which the ally character CRA appears and the background becomes a rainbow background RB that is displayed in seven colors of the rainbow. The rainbow background RB is a background that guarantees a jackpot. In addition, a message image MG saying "Jackpot" is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. In other words, when the performance button 63 was operated 12 times in the battle performance (middle stage), the jackpot confirmation performance was executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(G), a battle performance (final stage) is executed. The battle performance (final stage) is a performance that notifies the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center and a message image MG saying "Victory" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 89(H), a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the confirmed stop performance (jackpot), the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double number. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R all stop at "7".

[Winner notification performance B]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification performance B.
First, as shown in FIG. 90(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, a state in which the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner is shown. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special symbols, and here three pending images 9B are displayed. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently being changed on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the fluctuation occurs during a time-saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R have stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), a battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle performance (start), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle takes place between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and when the friendly character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a jackpot. In the battle performance (start), the input of the performance button 63 becomes valid. That is, although there is no display on the display screen 7a that prompts the user to press the production button 63, the production control microcomputer 91 controls the production button 63 based on the signal from the production button detection switch 63a that is input via the relay board 108. Detects operations. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the operation has been performed a total of five times so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(D), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation performance is a performance in which the ally character CRA appears and the background becomes a rainbow background RB that is displayed in seven colors of the rainbow. The rainbow background RB is a background that guarantees a jackpot. In addition, a message image MG saying "Jackpot" is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. In other words, when the performance button 63 has been operated five times in the battle performance (mid-term), the jackpot confirmation performance is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(E), a battle effect (initial stage) is executed. In the battle performance (initial stage), the enemy character CRB has the upper hand and is driven to corner the ally character CRA to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(F), a battle performance (middle stage) is executed. In the battle performance (middle stage), an ally character CRA becomes dominant and a performance is performed in which the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(G), a battle performance (final stage) is executed. The battle performance (final stage) is a performance that notifies the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center and a message image MG saying "Victory" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 90(H), a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the confirmed stop performance (jackpot), the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double number. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R all stop at "7".

[Winner notification performance C]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 91(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, a state in which the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner is shown. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special symbols, and here, three pending images 9B are displayed. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently being changed on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the fluctuation occurs during a time-saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R have stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 91(C), a battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle performance (start), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle takes place between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and when the friendly character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a jackpot. In the battle performance (start), the input of the performance button 63 becomes valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed and the words "Press" are displayed. The performance control microcomputer 91 detects the operation of the performance button 63 based on a signal from the performance button detection switch 63a input via the relay board 108. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the operation has been performed a total of five times so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(D), a battle effect (initial stage) is executed. In the battle performance (initial stage), the enemy character CRB has the upper hand and is driven to corner the ally character CRA to the right. In the battle performance (initial stage), the input of the performance button 63 becomes valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed and the words "Press" are displayed. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 10 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(E), a battle performance (middle stage) is executed. In the battle performance (middle stage), an ally character CRA becomes dominant and a performance is performed in which the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left. In the battle performance (mid-term), the input of the performance button 63 becomes valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed and the words "Press" are displayed. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 14 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(F), a battle performance (final stage) is executed. The battle performance (final stage) is a performance that notifies the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center and a message image MG saying "defeat" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 91(G), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the confirmed stop performance (loss), both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R stop at "7", and the middle performance symbol 8C stops at "8".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the winning notification effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, by repeatedly operating (pressing) the production button 63 during the battle production, it is possible to execute the jackpot confirmation production when a predetermined number of operations is reached. (Fig. 89(E)(F), Fig. 90(C)(D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to contribute to promoting the operation of the performance button 63 and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, a plurality of operation times, such as 1, 5, 8, 12, and 14 times, are set as the predetermined number of operations. According to this configuration, there are a plurality of timings at which the jackpot confirmation performance may be executed, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, if the jackpot confirmation effect is not executed after 14 operations, which is the upper limit of the number of operations (FIG. 91(E)), a failure in the jackpot lottery is determined. According to this configuration, the player does not have unnecessary expectations and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 63 is not performed during the period when the performance button 63 is activated (FIGS. 89(C) to (E), FIG. 90(C)). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by providing a hidden command-like performance only for players who know the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the period in which the effect button 63 is enabled, there are cases where an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 63 is performed (FIGS. 91(C) to (E)), and cases where the effect is not performed. (FIGS. 89(C) to (E), FIG. 90(C)). According to this configuration, the range of performances can be expanded and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the winning notification effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the operation of the performance button 63 was exemplified, but it can be similarly applied to the operation of a lever, a sword, etc.

[Modification 2]
The above was an example of notifying the winning of a jackpot lottery, but it can also be applied to winning the maximum number of rounds in a lottery for the number of rounds at the time of a jackpot, or winning in a lottery that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot. be.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B5-1]
A gaming machine that is equipped with an operation section that can be operated by a player and that can perform performances based on the operation of the operation section,
By repeatedly operating the operating unit during a predetermined performance, when the number of operations of the operating unit reaches a predetermined number of operations, it is possible to notify the winning of a specific lottery.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1,
A plurality of times of operations are set as the predetermined number of operations,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1 or aspect B5-2,
If the number of operations of the operating unit exceeds the predetermined upper limit of the number of operations and there is no notification of the winning, it is determined that the lottery is unsuccessful.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-3,
not performing a promotion performance that prompts the operation of the operating unit during the predetermined performance;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-3,
During the predetermined performance, there are cases where a promotion effect that prompts the operation of the operation section is performed, and cases where it is not performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-5,
The particular lottery is a jackpot lottery;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The external and external effects A to C of the stereoscopic image will be explained below using FIGS. 92 to 94. In FIGS. 92 to 94, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings. Decorative patterns and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a are also omitted for ease of viewing the drawing.

This outer and outer appearance of the three-dimensional image is performed during the fluctuating performance of the decorative symbols (for example, during the period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols until they stop fluctuating), during a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a profit is given to the player, etc. It can be done. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable performance start command, an opening command for various jackpot games, a round designation command for a jackpot game, and an ending command for a jackpot game), and selects a button. When an instruction to execute an effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, first, the external and external effects A of the stereoscopic image will be explained, followed by the external and external effects B of the stereoscopic image, and the external and external effects C of the stereoscopic image in order.

[Outline and exterior production of stereoscopic images A]
First, the external and external effects A of the stereoscopic image will be explained with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a diagram illustrating the outer-interior rendering A of a stereoscopic image. In the external and external rendering A of a stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. When it appears as an FRM, it is displayed in a manner that it approaches, moves away, stops, or swings (including rotation; the same applies hereinafter). At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has an outer area (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a boundary, and an inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). , and an area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). Here, the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is the background image.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (outline) as a boundary, an area FRMa inside the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and an outside area FRMb of the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). compartmentalized. Further, an area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes a background image.

When the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") approaches, the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is displayed large and the image As the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases, the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes smaller, and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases. Become. On the other hand, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a receding manner, the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed smaller and occupies a lower proportion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes larger and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes smaller. will account for a higher proportion of

After this, if the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 will have the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approach. 7a, or when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a receding manner, the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") As the proportion of the inner region FRMa occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases or decreases, the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") increases or decreases. The proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases or increases.

An area FRMa inside the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is decorated with a pattern not shown. In the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), rectangles are arranged in a matrix shape as a first geometric pattern, spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and aligned in the vertical and horizontal directions. is displayed. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image, the frame of the stereoscopic image is displayed as a colored opaque frame. When the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, one or both of the vertical and horizontal lengths of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM may become larger, or one or both may become smaller. displayed in a manner that At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has an outer area (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary, an inner area FRMa of the outer edge (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and a frame-shaped stereoscopic image. It is divided into an area FRMb, which is an outer area of the outer frame (outline) of the FRM. Here, an area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is the background image.

After this, if the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will be displayed with the outline of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as the boundary. , an area FRMa inside the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and an area FRMb outside the outline (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. Further, an outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes a background image.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. ) was displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of A second geometric pattern in which bricks are piled up is displayed in an area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM. The second geometric pattern is a still image. Further, in the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, the character CRA appears and moves within the inner region FRMa, and a moving image of the character CRA is played back.

The frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is increased, so that the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed inside the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. When the area FRMa is displayed in a large size, the area occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases, so that the outer area FRMb of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller and the display on the image display device 7 becomes smaller. The proportion occupied by the screen 7a becomes lower. On the other hand, the outline of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller. When the inner region FRMa of the outline (outline) is displayed small, the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases, and the outer region FRMb of the outer outline (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger and the image The proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases.

After this, when the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is small. Similarly, when the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM has a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, the proportion of the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases or decreases. The proportion of the area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM of the shape that occupies the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases or increases.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92(C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image, then the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") again. When the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches, recedes, stops, or oscillates. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the outer area FRMb of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is The second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) that was displayed in 3D image FRM (number "4") is inherited and displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the 3D image FRM (number "4"), and is a still image. It does not switch to the geometric pattern.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92(D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image, then a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM again. When the frame-shaped 3D image FRM appears, one or both of the vertical and horizontal lengths of the frame-shaped 3D image FRM is displayed in such a manner that one or both of them becomes larger, or one or both of them become smaller. Ru.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. ) from the second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of The octagons are arranged vertically and horizontally, spaced apart from each other at predetermined intervals, and arranged in a matrix pattern. The third geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, the character CRB newly appears in the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and moves within the inner region FRMa, and a moving image of the character CRB is played back.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92(E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image, then the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") again. When the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches, recedes, stops, or oscillates. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the outer area FRMb of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is The third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions) that was displayed on the 3D image FRM (number "4") ) is taken over and displayed as is in the outer area FRMb, and is not switched to other geometric patterns that are still images.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92(F), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a predetermined image from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. When the frame-shaped 3D image FRM is switched and the frame-shaped 3D image FRM appears, one or both of the vertical and horizontal lengths of the frame-shaped 3D image FRM is displayed in such a manner that one or both becomes larger or one or both of them becomes smaller. .

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. ) from the third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions) displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the frame. In the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM, a fourth geometric pattern in which alphabetical letters V-shaped are successively arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions is displayed. The fourth geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, two characters CRA and CRB appear in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and approach each other within the inner area FRMa, and the moving images of the two characters CRA and CRB are played. Ru.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92(G), the two characters CRA and CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, an action performance by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed. That is, in addition to the two characters CRA and CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, the background images of the two characters CRA and CRB are also displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. will be displayed in large size.

If the series of effects from FIG. 92(A) to FIG. 92(G) are performed during the reach effect after the reach is formed (as part of the reach effect), the action effect is developed and the image is displayed. When all the symbols with the same decorative pattern are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7, it becomes a jackpot and a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is performed in which a profit is given to the player. If the same decorative symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the error will be determined and displayed.

In addition, when a series of effects from FIG. 92(A) to FIG. 92(G) are performed during a jackpot game (jackpot effect), an action effect is developed, for example, character CRA competes with character CRB. When character CRA wins, a right-handed game is started (or continued), whereas, for example, when character CRA loses in a match with character CRB, a left-handed game is started (or a right-handed game is started). (The player is then returned to a left-handed game).

Note that as one or both of the vertical and horizontal lengths of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger, the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger, or the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger. As one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller, the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller. However, as the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger, the size of the character displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM also increases. Rather than being displayed in a large size (enlarged display), the area around the character is expanded, allowing the background around the character and other characters and items existing around the character to be seen in addition to the character. Furthermore, as the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller, the size of the character displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM also decreases. Rather than being displayed small (reduced display), the area around the character described above becomes smaller, and furthermore, the area where the character itself can be visually recognized becomes smaller. Of course, if the character displayed in the area FRMa inside the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM approaches (moves toward the player) in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. When the character moves away from the player (moves away from the player), the size of the character is displayed small.

[Outer and outer appearance of 3D image B]
Next, the external and external effects B of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the external and external effects B of a stereoscopic image. In the external/interior rendering of the stereoscopic image B, first, as shown in FIG. When it appears as an FRM, it is displayed in various ways, such as approaching, receding, stopping, and oscillating. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has an outer area (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a boundary, and an inner area FRMa of the outer outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). , and an area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). Here, the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is the background image.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (outline) as a boundary, an area FRMa inside the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and an outside area FRMb of the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). compartmentalized. Further, an area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes a background image.

When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner that the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approaches, the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed large and the image As the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases, the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes smaller and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower. Become. On the other hand, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a receding manner, the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed smaller and occupies a lower proportion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes larger and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes smaller. will account for a higher proportion of

After this, if the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 will have the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approach. 7a, or when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a receding manner, the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") When the proportion of the inner region FRMa occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes higher or lower, the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes more or less displayed as an image. The proportion that occupies the display screen 7a of the device 7 becomes lower or higher.

An inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is decorated with a pattern not shown. In the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), rectangles are arranged in a matrix shape as a first geometric pattern, spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and aligned in the vertical and horizontal directions. is displayed. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image, the stereoscopic image board is changed to the colored opaque board. When the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches, recedes, stops, or rotates in a predetermined direction. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has an outer area (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary, an inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and an area FRMa of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. It is divided into an area FRMb, which is an outer area (outline) of the FRM. Here, an area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is the background image.

After this, if the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will be displayed with the outline of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as the boundary. , an area FRMa inside the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and an area FRMb outside the outline (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. Further, an outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes a background image.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. ) was displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of A second geometric pattern in which bricks are piled up is displayed in an area FRMb outside the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM. The second geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, the character CRA appears in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and moves within the inner area FRMa, and a moving image of the character CRA is played back. Note that the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a surface, and the shape of the character CRA displayed in the inner area FRMa according to the angle of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM in the three-dimensional space. has also been transformed.

When the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM approaches, the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in a large size, and the display screen of the image display device 7 As the proportion occupied by 7a becomes higher, the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller, and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower. On the other hand, when the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a receding manner, the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed small and the image is displayed As the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the device 7 decreases, the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger, and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases.

After this, if the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM will be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that it approaches, When the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a receding manner, similarly, the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7. As the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases or decreases, the proportion of the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM decreases. It can get expensive.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the colored opaque plate-like stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image, and then the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") again. When the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches, recedes, stops, or oscillates. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is The second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) that was displayed in 3D image FRM (number "4") is inherited and displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the 3D image FRM (number "4"), and is a still image. It does not switch to the geometric pattern.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93(D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to the colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM again as a predetermined image. When the screen changes to , and a plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, it is displayed in a manner that it approaches, moves away from, stops, or rotates.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. ) from the second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of The octagons are arranged vertically and horizontally, spaced apart from each other at predetermined intervals, and arranged in a matrix pattern. The third geometric pattern is a still image. Further, in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, the character CRB newly appears and moves within the inner area FRMa, and a moving image of the character CRB is played back. Note that the inner region FRMa of the outline (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a plane, as described above, and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in the inner region FRMa according to the angle in the three-dimensional space. The shape of the character CRB is also modified.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93(E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the colored opaque plate-like stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image, then the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") again. When the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a manner such that it approaches, recedes, stops, or oscillates. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is The third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions) that was displayed on the 3D image FRM (number "4") ) is taken over and displayed as is in the outer area FRMb, and is not switched to other geometric patterns that are still images.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93(F), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a predetermined image from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. When the change occurs and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, it is displayed in a manner such that it approaches, recedes, stops, or rotates.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. ) was displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) In the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM, a fourth geometric pattern in which alphabetical letters V-shaped are successively arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions is displayed. The fourth geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, two characters CRA and CRB appear in the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and approach each other within the inner region FRMa, and the moving images of the two characters CRA and CRB are played. Ru. Note that the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a plane, as described above, and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in the inner region FRMa according to the angle in the three-dimensional space. The shapes of the two characters CRA and CRB have also been modified.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93(G), the two characters CRA and CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, an action performance by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed. That is, in addition to the two characters CRA and CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, the background images of the two characters CRA and CRB are also displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It will be displayed in a large size.

If the series of effects from FIG. 93(A) to FIG. 93(G) are performed during the reach effect after the reach is formed (as part of the reach effect), the action effect is developed and the image is displayed. When all the symbols with the same decorative pattern are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7, it becomes a jackpot and a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is performed in which a profit is given to the player. If the same decorative symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the error will be determined and displayed.

In addition, when a series of effects from FIG. 93(A) to FIG. 93(G) are performed during a jackpot game (jackpot effect), an action effect is developed, for example, character CRA competes with character CRB. When character CRA wins, a right-handed game is started (or continued), whereas, for example, when character CRA loses in a match with character CRB, a left-handed game is started (or a right-handed game is started). (The player is then returned to a left-handed game).

Note that as the plate-shaped 3D image FRM approaches (moves toward the player), the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped 3D image FRM becomes larger, and the plate-shaped 3D image FRM moves away ( (moving away from the player), the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller. However, as the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped 3D image FRM becomes larger, the size of the character displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped 3D image FRM also increases. Rather than being displayed in a large size (enlarged display), the area around the character is expanded, allowing the background around the character and other characters and items existing around the character to be seen in addition to the character. Furthermore, as the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped 3D image FRM becomes smaller, the size of the character displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped 3D image FRM also decreases. Rather than being displayed small (reduced display), the area around the character described above becomes smaller, and furthermore, the area where the character itself can be visually recognized becomes smaller. Of course, if the character displayed in the area FRMa inside the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped 3D image FRM approaches (moves toward the player) in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped 3D image FRM. When the character moves away from the player (moves away from the player), the size of the character is displayed small.

[Outer and outer appearance of stereoscopic images C]
Next, the outer/interior rendering C of a stereoscopic image will be explained with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the outer-interior rendering C of a stereoscopic image. In the external and external rendering of the stereoscopic image C, first, as shown in FIG. When it appears as an FRM, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches, moves away, stops, or oscillates. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has an outer area (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a boundary, and an inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). , and an area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). Here, the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is the background image.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (outline) as a boundary, an area FRMa inside the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and an outside area FRMb of the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). compartmentalized. Further, an area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes a background image.

When the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") approaches, the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is displayed large and the image As the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases, the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes smaller, and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases. Become. On the other hand, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a receding manner, the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed smaller and occupies a lower proportion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes larger and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes larger. will account for a higher proportion of

After this, if the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 will have the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approach. 7a, or when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a receding manner, the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") As the proportion of the inner region FRMa occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases or decreases, the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") increases or decreases. The proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases or increases.

An inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is decorated with a pattern not shown. In the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), rectangles are arranged in a matrix shape as a first geometric pattern, spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and aligned in the vertical and horizontal directions. is displayed. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(B), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as predetermined images. '') is switched to the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (hereinafter referred to as the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4")), and when the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it will move closer or further away. It is displayed in such a manner that it moves, stops, and moves up, down, left, and right. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 uses the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front as a boundary, and the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. ) and an outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is the background image.

If the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 after this, the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, and the outer contour of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, with the outline (contour) of "4") as the boundary. (contour) and an outer region FRMb. Further, an outer area FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes a background image.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. The first geometric pattern (a pattern in which rectangles are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and aligned in the vertical and horizontal directions and arranged in a matrix) was displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the FRM (number "4") ), a second geometric pattern in which bricks are piled up is displayed in an area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. The second geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, the character CRB appears in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front and moves within the inner area FRMa, and a moving image of the character CRB is played back.

When the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner approaching, the inner area of the outer frame (outline) of the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") As FRMa is displayed larger and occupies a higher proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes smaller and the image display device 7 occupies a lower proportion of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a receding manner, the outline of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front ( As the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (contour) is displayed smaller and occupies a lower proportion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes larger. Therefore, the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases.

After this, if the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approaches the image. When a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7, or when a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a receding manner, the stereoscopic image viewed from the front is similarly displayed. As the proportion of the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of FRM (number "4") occupies the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases or decreases, the stereoscopic image FRM (as viewed from the front) increases or decreases. The proportion of the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the number "4" that occupies the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower or higher.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image, which is colored and opaque as viewed from the front, and then a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM again. (Number "4"), and when the stereoscopic image FRM (Number "4") appears, it is displayed in a manner such as approaching, receding, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is switched again. The second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) that was displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of ``4'') is now displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number ``4''). It will continue to be displayed and will not switch to other geometric patterns that are static images.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image, and then a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM viewed from the front again. (Number "4"), and when the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (Number "4") appears, it is displayed in various ways, such as approaching, receding, stopping, and moving up, down, left and right.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. The outline of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front from the second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outline (outline) of FRM (number "4") In the outside area FRMb of (contour), a third geometric pattern is displayed in which octagons are arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions, spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval. The third geometric pattern is a still image.

In addition, here, when the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approaches and a part of it protrudes (pops out) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approaches. Two independent inner regions FRMa, FRMa are formed as discontinuous regions on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and straddle these two independent inner regions FRMa, FRMa. In this mode, a character CRA holding a sword newly appears and moves within two independent inner regions FRMa, FRMa, and a moving image of the character CRA is played.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image, which is colored and opaque as viewed from the front, and then a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM again. (Number "4"), and when the stereoscopic image FRM (Number "4") appears, it is displayed in a manner that it approaches, moves away from, stops, or swings. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is switched again. The third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions) displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of The area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of the image FRM (number "4") is taken over and displayed as it is, and is not switched to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(F), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image to a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front appears, it is displayed in a manner that it approaches, moves away from, stops, or moves up, down, left, and right.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. The third geometric pattern (octagons arranged vertically and horizontally at a predetermined distance from each other and arranged in a matrix) was displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the FRM (number "4"). (pattern) to one in which alphabetic letters V-shaped are consecutively arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions as a fourth geometric pattern in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. Is displayed. The fourth geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, the character CRB appears again in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, and moves within the inner area FRMa, and the moving image of the character CRB is played back.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(G), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image, which is colored and opaque as viewed from the front, and then a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM again. (Number "4"), and when the stereoscopic image FRM (Number "4") appears, it is displayed in a manner such as approaching, receding, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is switched again. The fourth geometric pattern (a pattern in which alphabetic V-shapes are consecutively arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions) that was displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") The area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) continues to be displayed as it is, and is not switched to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(H), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image to a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front appears, it is displayed in a manner that it approaches, moves away from, stops, moves up, down, left and right, and stops.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. A 3D image viewed from the front from the fourth geometric pattern (a pattern in which alphabetic V shapes are arranged consecutively in the vertical and horizontal directions) that was displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of FRM (number "4") A fifth geometric pattern in which tiles are arranged vertically and horizontally is displayed in an area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of FRM (number "4"). The fifth geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, the character CRA appears again in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, and moves within the inner area FRMa, and the moving image of the character CRB is played back.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(I), the two characters CRA and CRB that were displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front appear on the image display device 7. It is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a, and an action performance by two characters CRA and CRB is developed. In other words, in addition to the two characters CRA and CRB that were displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, the background images of the two characters CRA and CRB are also displayed as images. It will be displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

If the series of effects from FIG. 94(A) to FIG. 94(I) are performed during the reach effect after the reach is formed (as part of the reach effect), the action effect is developed and the image is displayed. When all the symbols with the same decorative pattern are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7, it becomes a jackpot and a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is performed in which a profit is given to the player. If the same decorative symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the error will be determined and displayed.

In addition, when a series of effects from FIG. 94(A) to FIG. 94(I) are performed during a jackpot game (jackpot effect), an action effect is developed, for example, character CRA competes with character CRB. When character CRA wins, a right-handed game is started (or continued), whereas, for example, when character CRA loses in a match with character CRB, a left-handed game is started (or a right-handed game is started). (The player is then returned to a left-handed game).

Note that as the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front approaches (moves toward the player), the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes larger. The inner area FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes larger, or the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front moves away (moves away from the player's side). As a result, the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes smaller. However, as the inner region FRMa of the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes larger, the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes larger. The size of the character displayed in the inner area FRMa is not displayed in a large size (enlarged display), but in addition to the character, the background around the character and other characters and items existing around the character are visible. The area around the character that can be played expands. In addition, since the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes smaller, the outer frame (outline) of the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes smaller. The size of the character displayed in the inner area FRMa is not displayed small (reduced display), but the area around the character described above is reduced, and furthermore, the area where the character itself can be visually recognized is also reduced. Of course, the character displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. When the character approaches (moves toward the player), the character's size is displayed large; when it moves away (moves away from the player), the character's size is displayed small. .

[Effect example]
Below, examples of effects of external and external effects on stereoscopic images are shown.
[Effect 1]
The game machine 1 of the above embodiment has an image display capable of displaying various images, as shown in FIGS. A device 7 (display means) is provided, and when the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the image is formed inside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). The character CRA and character CRB (first effect image) to be displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM to be displayed, and the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image ) A background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns to be displayed in an outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM formed outside of The frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is movably displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, the character CRA or Character CRB (first effect image) and an outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped 3D image FRM (predetermined image) formed outside the frame-shaped 3D image FRM (predetermined image). Since it is possible to perform effects using a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns to be displayed, it is possible to visually entertain the players and improve their interest.
In the outer-interior/exterior rendering B of the stereoscopic image in FIGS. 93(B), 93(D), and 93(F), the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed inside the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) Character CRA and character CRB (first effect image) to be displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer frame (outline) of Since it is possible to perform a performance using a background image (second performance image) having various geometric patterns to be displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer frame (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM of the shape, The same is true.
In the outer-interior/inside-outside rendering C of the stereoscopic image in FIGS. 94(B), 94(D), 94(F), and 94(H), the image is formed inside the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) when viewed from the front. The character CRA and character CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, and the stereoscopic image FRM viewed from the front A background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns to be displayed in an outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer frame (outline) of the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") formed outside of ) and the same effect can be performed.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92(B), 92(D), and 92(F) of the external and external effects of the stereoscopic image, the external outline of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM ( The character CRA and character CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outline) and the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. ) is different from the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns. According to this configuration, while the character CRA and the character CRB (first effect image) are displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, Since a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, the outer edge of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM The first effect image and the second effect image are different from each other with the (contour) as a boundary, and the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
93(B), FIG. 93(D), and FIG. 93(F), a character is placed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer edge (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. While the CRA and character CRB (first effect image) are displayed, a background image having various geometric patterns is displayed in an outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. (second effect image) is displayed, the first effect image and the second effect image are different and similar, with the outline of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as the boundary.
94(B), FIG. 94(D), FIG. 94(F), and FIG. 94(H). In the outer/internal/external outline of the stereoscopic image C, the outer outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is shown. While the character CRA and character CRB (first effect image) are displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area), the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is displayed. Since a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area), the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is used as the boundary. As such, the first effect image and the second effect image are different and similar.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in a large size on the image display device 7 (display means). Then, an outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in a small size on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, by moving and displaying the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) on the image display device 7 (display means), the character When the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM in which CRA and character CRB (first effect image) are displayed becomes larger, the background image (first region) having various geometric patterns becomes larger. Since the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM in which the effect image (2) is displayed becomes smaller, the player can be visually entertained and the interest is increased. You can improve your performance.
In the external and external effects B of the stereoscopic images shown in FIGS. 93(B), 93(D), and 93(F), a plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). As a result, the inner area of the outline (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, where the character CRA and the character CRB (first effect image) are displayed, with the outer outline (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as the boundary. When FRMa (first region) becomes larger, an outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer frame (outline) of plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM on which a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed increases. ) becomes smaller, so the same is true.
In the outer/internal/external rendering C of the stereoscopic images in FIGS. 94(B), 94(D), 94(F), and 94(H), the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) viewed from the front is displayed on the image display device 7( A front view in which the character CRA and the character CRB (first effect image) are displayed with the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front as a boundary by being moved and displayed on the display means). When the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer frame (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") becomes larger, a front view in which a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed. The same is true because the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes smaller.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. image) is a three-dimensional image. According to this configuration, by setting the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a three-dimensional image, as a boundary, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and , an outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer outline (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and an inner region FRMb (second region) of the outer outline (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are easily recognized as divided regions, and an inner region FRMb (second region) of the outer outline (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. Character CRA and character CRB (first effect image) displayed in the (first area) and various characters displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. Since this can contribute to improving the visibility of the background image (second effect image) having a geometric pattern, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
93(B), FIG. 93(D), and FIG. 93(F), the outline (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image, is used as the boundary to create a board. A region partitioned into an inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer contour (outline) of the shaped three-dimensional image FRM and an outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer contour (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. The characters CRA and CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and the plate-shaped three-dimensional image Because it can contribute to improving the visibility of the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer frame (outline) of the FRM, The same is true.
In the outer/internal/external rendering C of the stereoscopic images in FIGS. 94(B), 94(D), 94(F), and 94(H), the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image, is By setting the outer contour (contour) as a boundary, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer contour (contour) of the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") are separated. ), the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer frame (contour) of The character CRA and character CRB (first effect image) displayed in FRMa (first area) and the outer area FRMb (second This is similar because it can contribute to improving the visibility of the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the area).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92(B), 92(D), and 92(F) of the external and external effects of the stereoscopic image, the external outline of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM ( The inner region FRMa (first region) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is the inner region of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM whose boundary is the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image. A region FRMb (second region) outside the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM whose boundary is the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image. It is the outer area of the outer frame (contour) of According to this configuration, since the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image, can be used as the boundary, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM ) and an outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are more easily recognized as a partitioned region. As a result, the character CRA and character CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer contour (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and the outer contour of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM The background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of (contour) can contribute to improving the visibility of It is possible to visually entertain and improve interest.
In the outer-interior-interior rendering B of the stereoscopic images in FIGS. 93(B), 93(D), and 93(F), the outer edge (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is the stereoscopic image, can be used as the boundary. , an inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer contour (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and an outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer contour (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM are partitioned. This makes it easier to visually recognize the area. As a result, the character CRA and character CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and the outer contour of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM are It is similar because it can contribute to improving the visibility of the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of (outline). .
In the outer/internal/external rendering C of the stereoscopic images in FIGS. 94(B), 94(D), 94(F), and 94(H), the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image, is Since the outer contour (contour) can be used as a boundary, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer contour (contour) of the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") The outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer frame (outline) of “4”) is more easily recognized as a partitioned region. As a result, the character CRA and character CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, and The visibility of the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer frame (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") The same is true because it can contribute to improvement.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification example of the outer and outer appearance of a stereoscopic image will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the external and external rendering A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 92, the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a stereoscopic image, and in the external external rendering B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 93, the predetermined image is a plate-shaped stereoscopic image that is a stereoscopic image. FRM, in the external and external rendering of the stereoscopic image C in FIG. 94, the predetermined image is a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image. However, if the title (or characteristic words included in the title) of any of the multiple pieces of music used as a predetermined image indicates the world view of the production by the gaming machine 1, Alternatively, it may be a structure (which may be planar or three-dimensional) that can be associated with (image) the title of the music.

[Modification 2]
In the external and external rendering A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 92, the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a stereoscopic image, and in the external external rendering B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 93, the predetermined image is a plate-shaped stereoscopic image that is a stereoscopic image. FRM, in the external and external rendering C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 94, the predetermined image is a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image. However, the predetermined image may be written on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15 (for example, "OARO").

[Modification 3]
In the external and external rendering A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 92, the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a stereoscopic image, and in the external external rendering B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 93, the predetermined image is a plate-shaped stereoscopic image that is a stereoscopic image. FRM, in the external and external rendering of the stereoscopic image C in FIG. 94, the predetermined image is a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image. However, the reserved images 9A, 9B and the retained digested image 9C may be used as predetermined images. In this case, an area (first area) inside the outline (contour) of the retained images 9A, 9B or the retained digested image 9C, with the outer contour (contour) of the retained images 9A, 9B or the retained digested image 9C as the boundary, and the retained image It can be divided into an area (second area) outside the outline (contour) of the retained digested image 9A, 9B and the retained digested image 9C. Still images and moving images (3-dimensional CG moving images, animation moving images, and movie scenes) are displayed in the inner area (first area) of the outer edges (outlines) of the held images 9A, 9B and the held digested images 9C. , the outer area (second area) of the outer frame (outline) of the retained images 9A, 9B and the retained digested image 9C includes background images (still images, moving images (3-dimensional CG moving images, animation moving images, scenes from movies). )) is displayed.

[Modification 4]
In the external and external rendering A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 92, the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a stereoscopic image, and in the external external rendering B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 93, the predetermined image is a plate-shaped stereoscopic image that is a stereoscopic image. FRM, in the external and external rendering C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 94, the predetermined image is a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image. However, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be used as predetermined images. In this case, the inner area (contour) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is defined by the outer contours of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. 1 area) and an area outside the outer frame (outline) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (second area). The inner area (first area) of the outer outline (outline) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R contains still images, moving images (3-dimensional CG moving images, animation moving images, and scenes from movies). ) is displayed, and in the outer area (second area) of the outer frame (contour) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, background images (still images, moving images (3-dimensional CG moving images, An animated video, a scene from a movie)) is displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the external and external effects of the stereoscopic image A in FIG. 92, the inner area FRMa (first area) of the external frame (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image, is used as the predetermined image, and the external and external effects of the stereoscopic image in FIG. In B, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer frame (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image, is used as a predetermined image, and in C, the inner and outer outer contour of the stereoscopic image in FIG. The inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer frame (outline) of a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front was a background image having various geometric patterns that were still images. However, the background image may be a moving image instead of a still image, or may be a mixture of still images and moving images. For example, the moving image may be one in which various geometric patterns move, or may be a three-dimensional CG moving image, an animation moving image, or a scene from a movie.

[Modification 6]
In the external and external rendering A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 92, the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is one stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, and in the external and external rendering B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 93, a board is one stereoscopic image as the predetermined image. In the three-dimensional image FRM of the shape, and the outer/internal/external rendering of the three-dimensional image in FIG. was one stereoscopic image. However, the predetermined image may be a plurality of stereoscopic images. In this case, the outer area (second area) of the outer frame (contour) of each stereoscopic image may be the same image (background image) or different images, or one image may be used for each stereoscopic image. The image may be displayed so that the entire image of one image can be grasped through the inner area (first area) of the outer frame (contour) of each stereoscopic image, or the inner area (first area) of the outer frame (contour) of each stereoscopic image may be The same image may be displayed in the area) or different images may be displayed. In this way, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be increased.

[Modified example 7]
In the external/external rendering A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 92, the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image, is a predetermined image, and one or both of the vertical and horizontal lengths becomes large, or one or both of them becomes small. It was displayed in a manner that However, the vertical and horizontal lengths of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM may be constant. Even with this configuration, the character displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer contour (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) formed inside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) CRA, character CRB (first effect image), and outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) formed outside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). ) and a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed on the background image (second effect image), it is possible to visually entertain the players and improve their interest. can.

[Modified example 8]
In the outer/internal/external rendering C of the stereoscopic images in FIGS. 94(B), 94(D), 94(F), and 94(H), the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) viewed from the front is displayed on the image display device 7( Although the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed moving in a three-dimensional space, it is not limited to a front view, and even if the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed in a display mode in which it rotates in a three-dimensional space or in a display mode in which it rotates and moves. good. In this case, if the three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) in such a manner that a part of it protrudes (jumps out) from the image display device 7 (display means), the discontinuous three-dimensional image The image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed as a plurality of stereoscopic images on the image display device 7 (display means), and the inner area FRMa,... A plurality of independent inner regions where FRMa is discontinuous are formed in the image display device 7 (display means). In this manner, characters CRA and characters CRB appear and move within the plurality of independent inner regions FRMa, . , a moving image of the character CRA and the character CRB is played.

[Modification 9]
The external and external effects of the stereoscopic image A in FIG. 92, the external and external effects of the stereoscopic image B in FIG. 93, and the external and external effects of the stereoscopic image C in FIG. A production may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying various images,
When displaying a predetermined image on the display means, a first effect image is displayed in a first area formed inside the predetermined image, and a second effect image is formed outside the predetermined image. A second effect image displayed in the area can be executed.
the predetermined image is movably displayed on the display means;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
the first effect image and the second effect image are different;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1 or aspect C1-2,
When the predetermined image is moved and displayed on the display means and the first area is displayed on the display means in a large size, the second area is displayed on the display means in a small size.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3,
the predetermined image is a three-dimensional image;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-4,
The first area is an area inside the outline of the stereoscopic image whose boundary is the outline of the stereoscopic image,
The second area is an area outside the outline of the stereoscopic image whose boundary is the outline of the stereoscopic image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The selection display blocking effects A to C of the effect mode will be explained below using FIGS. 95 to 97. In FIGS. 95 to 97, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings, and the image display Some decorative patterns and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing the drawings.

The selection display prevention performance of this performance mode can be executed during a specific period from the start of variation of decorative symbols to the stop of variation, or during a specific period during a jackpot game (jackpot production) in which a profit is given to the player. , the player's intention to operate (press) the performance button 63 can be reflected in the progress of the performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 receives various commands from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable performance start command, a preliminary determination command, an opening command for various jackpot games, a round designation command for a jackpot game, and an ending command for a jackpot game). If the analysis includes an instruction to execute a button effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, selection display prevention performance A of the performance mode will be explained first, selection display prevention performance B of the performance mode, and selection display prevention performance C of the performance mode will be explained in order.

[Production mode selection display prevention production A]
First, the selection display prevention effect A of the effect mode will be explained with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the selection display prevention effect A of the effect mode. The selective display inhibiting performance A of the performance mode is performed during a specific period from the start of variation of decorative symbols to the stop of variation. In the selective display prevention performance A of the performance mode, first, as shown in FIG. A variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image (here, a "cloud" image) placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is then stopped and displayed.

As the decorative patterns start to change, a message MG "Change mode with production button" informing that the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

As the expiration of the special figure reservation, the pending extinguishing image 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R that are currently changing is arranged and displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. , To the left of the retained digested image 9C, here, for example, three reserved images 9A as three first special figures reserved are displayed on the image display device 7 in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. They are arranged and displayed at the bottom of the screen 7a. Further, the retained image 9A and the retained digested image 9C each have a circular shape, and the size of the retained digested image 9C is larger than that of the retained image 9A. Note that the size of the pending digested image 9C and the size of the pending image 9A may be the same size.

To the right of the pending digested image 9C, a selection section SEL from which a performance mode can be selected is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the selection section SEL, production modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate, and each time the production button 63 is operated (pressed), the reels rotate. By doing so, the production mode that has reached the specific area is displayed larger than other production modes. The performance mode located in this specific area becomes the selected performance mode, and the theme image PM of the selected performance mode is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, since the previously selected production mode was B mode, which will be described later, the B mode theme image PM (here, an image imitating "clouds") is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Ru.

Here, the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode will be briefly explained.

In mode A, a performance with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and a theme image PM imitating the "sun" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, and the A mode is set. The D mode, which is placed below the , is displayed in such a manner that the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the B mode, which is placed above the A mode, is displayed in such a manner that the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In mode B, a performance with the theme of "clouds" is advanced, and a theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 while the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, and the B mode is activated. The A mode placed below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the C mode placed above the B mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the C mode, a performance with a theme of "rain" is performed, and a theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in a specific area of the selection part SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby changing to the C mode. B mode, which is placed below, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and D mode, which is placed above the C mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from above toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the D mode, a performance with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and a theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 while the D mode is located in a specific area of the selection part SEL, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, and the D mode is activated. The C mode located below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the A mode located above the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. The A mode is displayed again in a display mode located in the specific area.

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 95(A) starts to fluctuate, there are cases in which no reach is formed and cases in which a reach is formed. Once a reach is formed, a reach effect is performed based on the expectation of a jackpot. There are multiple reach effects. When a reach is formed, following FIG. 95(A), as shown in FIG. 95(B), after the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pattern (number). (Here, it is temporarily stopped at the number "1"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are being changed. In this state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the four reserved images 9A are displayed as four first special symbols reserved in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. They are arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and the A mode located below the B mode moves upward from below. The reels are displayed in a rotating manner, and the C mode, which is placed above the B mode, is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. In the C mode, a theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 95(C). In addition, after the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pattern (number) following the left decorative pattern 8L (here, it is temporarily stopped at the number "3"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed. It is inside. In this state, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the number of reserved first special symbols does not increase because the upper limit of four reserved first special symbols has already been reached, and the five reserved images 9A They are arranged in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and are not displayed.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and the B mode arranged below the C mode moves upward from below. The reels are displayed in a rotating manner, and the D mode, which is placed above the C mode, is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. In the D mode, a theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 95(D). In addition, after the decorative pattern starts to change, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pattern (number) following the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R (temporarily stopped at the number "5" here), and then , the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3", which are stopped and displayed, and the miss is confirmed and displayed.

When the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3" and are stopped and displayed, the display continues until the next decorative pattern starts changing. During the period (hereinafter referred to as "interval"), even if the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL cannot be moved downward, and the production Mode selection is no longer possible. As a result, the already selected production mode is continued during the interval, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, unless the next decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the already selected production mode will continue and the theme image PM imitating "snow" will be displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. becomes. Note that even if a demonstration screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) is to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demonstration screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) ends, the production mode that has already been selected will be displayed. continues, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Thereafter, as the next decorative pattern starts to change, it is aligned to the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 95(E). When the rightmost held image 9A among the four held images 9A moves to the right as the held digested image 9C, the remaining three held images 9A move one by one to the right. displayed in a shifted manner. As the decorative patterns start to change, a message MG "Change mode with production button" informing that the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and allows selection of the production mode.

In the series of performances from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern in FIG. 95(A) to FIG. 95(D), no reach was formed; on the other hand, when a reach was formed, Following FIG. 95(A), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number) (temporarily stopped at the number "1" here), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is fluctuated. When the reach is displayed and the reach is formed, the selection section SEL is displayed at the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 at this point, as shown in FIG. When operated (pressing operation), the B mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL can be moved downward, and the production mode can be selected. In addition, after the variation of the decorative symbols starts, by entering the game ball into the first starting port 20, four reserved images 9A are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as four first special symbols reserved. The images are displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When a reach is formed and the reach effect progresses, car images GYK imitating cars as special images form a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 95(H). When the effect of running all at once is developed (so-called "group preview"), priority is given to displaying the special image, and the selection section SEL is selected from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Even if the player operates (presses) the production button 63 after it disappears (disappears), the selection section SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the production mode cannot be selected. It has become. Even if a group notice is given, the four pending images 9A and the pending digested images 9C do not disappear (disappear) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, the reach effect progresses, and the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "0", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "1", which are stopped and displayed, and the miss is confirmed and displayed. . Even in this state, the selection section SEL has disappeared (disappeared) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and even if the player operates (presses) the production button 63, The selection section SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, making it impossible to select the production mode.

During the period from when the group notice is given until the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, and the failure is confirmed and displayed, the player operates (presses) the performance button 63. Also, the production mode cannot be selected, and furthermore, the period from when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped until the next decorative pattern starts changing. Even during the period (hereinafter referred to as "interval"), even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the performance mode cannot be selected. As a result, in the two periods, the already selected production mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, when a group notice is given, the already selected production mode is continued unless the next decorative pattern starts changing, and the theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a will be displayed in a large size. Note that even if a demonstration screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) is to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demonstration screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) is finished, the production mode that has already been selected will be displayed. continues, and the theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Thereafter, as the next decorative pattern starts to change, it is aligned to the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 95(J). When the rightmost held image 9A among the four held images 9A moves to the right as the held digested image 9C, the remaining three held images 9A move one by one to the right. displayed in a shifted manner. As the decorative patterns start to change, a message MG "Change mode with production button" informing that the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the production mode can be selected.

[Production mode selection display prevention production B]
Next, the selection display prevention effect B of the effect mode will be explained with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining selection display prevention performance B of the performance mode. The selective display prevention performance B of the performance mode is performed during a specific period from the start of variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of variation. In the selection display prevention performance B of the performance mode, first, as shown in FIG. A variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image (here, a "cloud" image) placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before the decorative pattern stops, it decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, and is then stopped and displayed.

As the decorative patterns start to change, a message MG "Change mode with production button" informing that the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

As the expiration of the special figure reservation, the pending extinguishing image 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R that are currently changing is arranged and displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. , To the left of the retained digested image 9C, here, for example, three reserved images 9A as three first special figures reserved are displayed on the image display device 7 in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. They are arranged and displayed at the bottom of the screen 7a. Further, the retained image 9A and the retained digested image 9C each have a circular shape, and the size of the retained digested image 9C is larger than that of the retained image 9A. Note that the size of the pending digested image 9C and the size of the pending image 9A may be the same size.

To the right of the pending digested image 9C, a selection section SEL from which a production mode can be selected is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the selection section SEL, production modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate, and each time the production button 63 is operated (pressed), the reels rotate. By doing so, the production mode that has reached the specific area is displayed larger than other production modes. The performance mode located in this specific area becomes the selected performance mode, and the theme image PM of the selected performance mode is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, since the previously selected production mode was B mode, which will be described later, the B mode theme image PM (here, an image imitating a "cloud") is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Ru.

Here, the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode will be briefly explained.

In the A mode, a performance with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and a theme image PM imitating the "sun" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, and the A mode is activated. The D mode, which is placed below the , is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the B mode, which is placed above the A mode, is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In mode B, a performance with the theme of "clouds" is performed, and a theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where B mode is located in a specific area of the selection part SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby changing to B mode. The A mode placed below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the C mode placed above the B mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above towards a specific area. Is displayed.

In the C mode, a performance with a theme of "rain" is performed, and a theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in a specific area of the selection part SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby changing to the C mode. B mode, which is placed below, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and D mode, which is placed above the C mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from above toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the D mode, a performance with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and a theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 while the D mode is located in a specific area of the selection part SEL, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, and the D mode is activated. The C mode located below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the A mode located above the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. The A mode is displayed again in a display mode located in the specific area.

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 96(A) starts to fluctuate, an effect (so-called "look-ahead effect") suggesting the possibility that the pending information corresponding to the pending image 9A includes a jackpot may not be performed. A prefetch effect may be performed for the pending image 9A. If the look-ahead effect is not performed, as shown in FIG. 96(B) following FIG. 96(A), after the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pattern (number). (Here, it is temporarily stopped at the number "1"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are being changed. In this state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the four reserved images 9A are displayed as four first special symbols reserved in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. They are arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and the A mode located below the B mode moves upward from below. The reels are displayed in a rotating manner, and the C mode, which is placed above the B mode, is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. In the C mode, a theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 96(C). In addition, after the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pattern (number) following the left decorative pattern 8L (here, it is temporarily stopped at the number "3"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed. It is inside. In this state, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the number of reserved first special symbols does not increase because the upper limit of four reserved first special symbols has already been reached, and the five reserved images 9A They are arranged in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and are not displayed.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and the B mode arranged below the C mode moves upward from below. The reels are displayed in a rotating manner, and the D mode, which is placed above the C mode, is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. In the D mode, a theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 96(D). In addition, after the decorative pattern starts to change, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pattern (number) following the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R (temporarily stopped at the number "5" in this case), and then , the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3", which are stopped and displayed, and the miss is confirmed and displayed.

When the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3" and are stopped and displayed, the display continues until the next decorative pattern starts changing. During the period (hereinafter referred to as "interval"), even if the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL cannot be moved downward, and the production Mode selection is no longer possible. As a result, the already selected production mode is continued during the interval, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, unless the next decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the already selected production mode will continue and the theme image PM imitating "snow" will be displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. becomes. Note that even if a demonstration screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) is to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demonstration screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) ends, the production mode that has already been selected will be displayed. continues, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Thereafter, as the next decorative pattern starts to change, it is aligned to the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 96(E). When the rightmost held image 9A among the four held images 9A moves to the right as the held digested image 9C, the remaining three held images 9A move one by one to the right. displayed in a shifted manner. As the decorative patterns start to change, a message MG "Change mode with production button" informing that the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and allows selection of the production mode.

In a series of effects from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern in FIG. 96(A) to FIG. 96(D), an effect (so-called 96(G) following FIG. 96(A). After the decorative pattern starts to change, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pattern (number) (temporarily stopped at the number "1" in this case), and the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are being changed. It becomes. In this state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the four reserved images 9A are displayed as four first special symbols reserved in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. They are arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. If the held image 9A placed closest to the held digested image 9C is the first held image 9A, then the second held image 9A is placed to the left of the first held image 9A, and the second held image 9A is placed to the left of the first held image 9A. A third pending image 9A is placed to the left of the pending image 9A, and a pending image 9A added when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 this time is placed to the left of the third pending image 9A. is arranged as the fourth pending image 9A.

When an effect (pre-reading effect) that suggests the possibility that the pending information corresponding to this fourth pending image 9A includes a jackpot is performed, the display mode of the fourth pending image 9A is changed to another as a special image. are displayed in a manner different from the display mode of the pending images 9A (the first pending image 9A, the second pending image 9A, and the third pending image 9A). For example, in the look-ahead effect that is a special image, the display mode of the pending image 9A is, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)) based on the expectation level of a jackpot. Expectations for a jackpot are now set high. Here, the display mode of the fourth pending image 9A is a mode in which it emits red light, and the other pending images 9A (first pending image 9A, second pending image 9A, third pending image 9A) ) is a display mode that emits white light (this is the case where no look-ahead effect is performed, and the expectation of a jackpot is the lowest).

In addition, in the look-ahead effect that is a special image, the display mode of the circular pending image 9A is based on the expectation level of a jackpot, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)) ), the expectation level for winning the jackpot is set high, but the reserved image 9A having a circular shape may be replaced with a character. In this case, in the mode in which the pending image 9A is displayed as a character, the expectation level for a jackpot is at least higher than the expectation level for a jackpot set in the display mode for the pending image 9A, which is set to emit red light. It is set.

When a look-ahead effect that is a special image is performed, priority is given to displaying the special image, the selection section SEL disappears (disappears) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the player presses the effect button 63. Even if is operated (pressing operation), the selection section SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the production mode cannot be selected. Even if the pre-read effect is performed, the four pending images 9A and the pending digested images 9C do not disappear (disappear) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96(H), after the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pattern (number) following the left decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "3" is displayed). temporary stop), and the medium decorative pattern 8C is changing. In this state, even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the selection section SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the performance mode cannot be selected.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96(I), after the decorative patterns start to change, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pattern (number) following the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. After that, the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3", and the display stops, and the miss is confirmed. Is displayed.

Thereafter, as the next decorative pattern starts to change, it is aligned to the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 96(J). When the rightmost held image 9A among the four held images 9A moves to the right as the held digested image 9C, the remaining three held images 9A move one by one to the right. displayed in a shifted manner. Although the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, since the look-ahead effect has already been performed, even in this state, the selection section SEL disappears (disappears) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the selection section SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected.

In this way, if a look-ahead effect is performed during the specified period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the variation, the selection of the effect mode will be performed during the change if the look-ahead effect is performed before the look-ahead effect is performed. However, if a look-ahead effect is performed, the effect mode cannot be selected during the fluctuation. Furthermore, when a pre-reading effect is performed, the pending image 9A on which this pre-reading effect was performed moves to the right side as a pending digested image 9C, and the decorative patterns start to fluctuate, including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern. During the period from when 8R is displayed in a stopped state until the failure is confirmed and displayed, the player can press the performance button 63 even during a specific period from the start of variation of decorative symbols to the stop of variation during which the production mode can be selected. Even if you operate (press), you cannot select the production mode. Furthermore, there is a period (hereinafter referred to as an "interval") from when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in the reserved image 9A in which the look-ahead effect has been performed is stopped until the next decorative pattern starts to fluctuate. ), even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the performance mode cannot be selected. As a result, in such a series of periods, the already selected production mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating a "cloud" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, when the pre-read effect is performed, the pending image 9A on which the pre-read effect has been performed is digested as the pending digested image 9C. The selected production mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In addition, if the pending image 9A on which the pre-read effect has been performed is digested as the pending digested image 9C and becomes a jackpot, after the jackpot effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 96(A), the effect button 63 is operated ( A message MG "Change mode with production button" informing that the production mode can be changed by pressing the button (press operation) is placed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). will be displayed, allowing you to select the production mode.

In addition, even if a demonstration screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demonstration screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers ends, the production mode that has already been selected will be displayed. continues, and the theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Production mode selection display prevention production C]
Next, the selection display prevention effect C of the effect mode will be explained with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the selection display prevention effect C of the effect mode. The performance mode selection display prevention performance C is a performance that is performed during a specific period during a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a profit is given to the player, and is a performance that is not performed when a predetermined condition is met. (For example, this is not performed if there is a so-called "holding series" in which there is a held ball that becomes a jackpot before the jackpot performance ends). The presence or absence of this pending series is determined based on the jackpot preliminary determination result (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type preliminary determination result) and the fluctuation pattern preliminary determination result, which are included in the preliminary determination command.

Here, a case will be described in which a player plays a right-handed game, hits a jackpot, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) occurs, and continues the right-handed game after the jackpot game (jackpot performance) ends. In addition, if the performance of the held series is not performed, in other words, before the jackpot performance ends, there is no held ball that will become a jackpot.

The period from the beginning to the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game) includes a game performance period from the beginning of the jackpot performance (jackpot game) to the end after all the performances of each round game have been performed, and a game performance period during this game performance period. Next, there is a notification period that informs the game state (for example, a state of returning to left-handed hitting, a state of continuing right-handed hitting) after the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game), and following this notification period, a jackpot performance (jackpot game) A specific period in which a production mode selection screen is displayed that allows the player to select a production mode after the end of the production mode, and following this specific period, catchphrase productions and games in which the catchphrase of the gaming machine manufacturer is displayed. There is a predetermined period during which an addictive prevention effect is performed during which a warning is displayed to warn against dependence (absorption) on the game.

During the specific period, there is a first period for selecting a production mode (production mode selection period), and a mode transition to the selected production mode after the first period (production mode selection period) has elapsed. A second period (performance mode confirmation notification period).

The end of a predetermined period in which catch phrases from game machine manufacturers are displayed and addictive prevention effects in which warnings against dependence (addiction) on games are displayed, and the beginning and end of jackpot effects (jackpot games). The end of the period extending up to the end of the period coincides with

In the selection display prevention performance C of the performance mode, first, as shown in FIG. 97(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the performance of each round game in the jackpot performance (jackpot game), and then all the games are completed. This marks the end of the game performance period, and accordingly, at the start of the notification period, a message MG "Continue hitting right" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to continue hitting right. . In addition, the holding image 9A corresponding to the first special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of decorative patterns. , instead of the holding image 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the holding image 9B corresponding to the first special drawing holding based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a number HMG arranged at the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, for example, the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero and the number "0" is on the left, and the number "0" is set on the left side based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21. Four special figures are reserved and the number "4" is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 with the number "4" spaced apart from each other on the right side.

The message MG "Continue right-handed hitting" in FIG. 97(A) is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the notification period (for example, 3 seconds) comes to an end, and accordingly, the specific period ends. At the beginning of the game, there are cases where a performance mode selection screen is displayed that allows the player to select the performance mode after the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game), and cases where the performance mode selection screen is not displayed. .

When the production mode selection screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 97(B), the production button 63 is pressed to prompt the player to select the production mode by operating (pressing) the production button 63. The simulated first effect button image BTN is placed at the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner. The English word "PUSH" is engraved in the portion of the first performance button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the performance button 63. Note that the "predetermined light emission mode" is, for example, blinking white light. In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are displayed as numbers HMG on the image display device 7. continues to be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

Production modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate, and each time the production button 63 is operated (pressing operation), the reels rotate and a specific area is displayed. A selection section SEL in which the performance mode that has reached 1 is displayed larger than other performance modes is displayed in a rectangular area from the center to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The performance mode located in this specific area becomes the selected performance mode. Note that when the production mode selection screen is displayed for the first time, A mode is placed in a specific area as a default, but the next time the production mode selection screen is displayed, the default ( In other words, mode A) may always be arranged in a specific area, or the selected production mode may be arranged in a specific area when the production mode selection screen was displayed last time.

To the right of the selection section SEL, a demonstration area DS is displayed in a rectangular area from the center to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in which the contents of the currently selected production mode are explained using various images and various characters. be done. The demo area DS is formed as a rectangular area, and the characters "DEMO" indicating the demonstration screen of the production mode are displayed on the upper left side of the demo area DS.

In mode A, a production with the theme of "sun" is promoted, and a theme image PM imitating the "sun" is displayed as an animation on the left side of the demo area DS, and the same image as the first production button image BTN is displayed. (an image with all the same characteristic information such as button shape, size, light emission mode, etc.) or a similar image (an image partially or completely similar to the characteristic information) It is placed and displayed on the lower right side. Note that an explanatory text MME regarding the progress of the performance in the A mode is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, as shown in FIG. 97(C). As the A mode moves downward, the D mode, which is placed below the A mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and the B mode, which is placed above the A mode, is identified from above. The reels are displayed as rotating towards the area. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the first performance button image BTN continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are displayed as numbers HMG on the image display device 7. continues to be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

In B mode, a performance with the theme of "clouds" is advanced, and a theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed as a moving image in the center of the demonstration area DS, and an explanatory text MME about the progress of the performance in B mode is displayed. is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 while the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, and the B mode is activated. The A mode placed below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the C mode placed above the B mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. Is displayed. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the first performance button image BTN continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are displayed as numbers HMG on the image display device 7. continues to be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

In C mode, a performance with the theme of "rain" is progressed, and a theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed as an animation in the center of the demo area DS, and an explanatory text MME about the progress of the performance in C mode is displayed. is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in a specific area of the selection part SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby changing to the C mode. B mode, which is placed below, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and D mode, which is placed above the C mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from above toward a specific area. Is displayed. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the first performance button image BTN continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are displayed as numbers HMG on the image display device 7. continues to be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

In D mode, a performance with the theme of "snow" is progressed, and a theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed as a moving image in the center of the demonstration area DS, and an explanatory text MME about the progress of the performance in D mode is displayed. is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 and the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection section SEL, a first period (production mode selection period) for selecting the production mode has elapsed; At the start of the second period (performance mode confirmation notification period) for notifying the mode transition to the selected production mode, as shown in FIG. 97(D), the four corners of the rectangular demonstration area DS are displayed as images. It is displayed in a manner that spreads (enlarged manner) toward the four corners of the display screen 7a of the display device 7, and on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a production based on the theme of "clouds" in B mode is progressing. A theme image PM imitating a "cloud" is displayed in a large size, and a message MG informing that the selected production mode is B mode is displayed on the right side from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Displayed larger toward the center. Note that the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are displayed as numbers HMG on the image display device 7. continues to be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

After that, a second period (performance mode confirmation notification period) passes, and a catchphrase production in which the catchphrase of the gaming machine manufacturer is displayed, and an addictive prevention production in which a warning against dependence (addiction) on the game is displayed are performed. At the beginning of the period, and when this period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed and the jackpot performance (jackpot game) ends, a theme image imitating a "cloud" that progresses with the theme of "cloud" in B mode. An effect in which PM is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will be performed.

At the end of the notification period in which the message MG "Continue right-handed hitting" in FIG. 97(A) is displayed, and accordingly, at the beginning of the specific period, the series from FIG. 97(B) to FIG. 97(D) is displayed. In the performance, a performance mode selection screen is displayed, and the performance after the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game) is proceeded in the selected performance mode. On the other hand, the number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, is zero, which is the number "0". , since the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is four and the number "4", there are four second special symbols based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. When the reservation information corresponding to the special figure reservation includes a jackpot, the display of the special image is given priority and the selection screen of the performance mode is not displayed in order to perform the performance of the reservation series which is a special image. Therefore, when the production mode selection screen is not displayed, light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in all directions, as shown in FIG. 97(G) following FIG. 97(A). The emitted flash image FH is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are displayed as numbers HMG on the image display device 7. continues to be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, a suspended series image HRC having a three-dimensional V-shape indicating the existence of a suspended series is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 97(H). A first character HRC1 having a three-dimensional circular shape is arranged on the lower side of the first surface of the V-shaped retained series image HRC, whereas the V-shaped retained series image A second character HRC2 having a three-dimensional rectangular shape is arranged on the upper side of the second surface (the surface opposite to the first surface) of the HRC. The held continuous image HRC rotates around and around the vertical line passing through the center of the lower side of the held continuous image HRC, and the first surface of the held continuous image HRC and the second surface of the held continuous image HRC repeatedly appear. This is the display mode.

When an effect (pre-reading effect) that suggests the possibility that the pending information corresponding to the pending image 9A (for example, FIG. 1 and FIGS. 96(G) to 96(J)) includes a jackpot is performed, for example, a special The display mode of the fourth pending image 9A is different from the display mode of the other pending images 9A (first pending image 9A, second pending image 9A, third pending image 9A). The display mode of the first pending image 9A, the second pending image 9A, and the third pending image 9A has a circular shape, whereas the display mode of the fourth pending image 9A has a circular shape. The display mode of the image 9A may be the first character HRC1 or the second character HRC2 instead of having a circular shape. In other words, the first character HRC1 and the second character HRC2 arranged together with the reserved series image HRC are the same characters as the characters displayed as the display mode of the reserved image 9A when the prefetch effect is performed. There is.

Note that the characters displayed as the display mode of the reserved image 9A are smaller than the sizes of the first character HRC1 and the second character HRC2 that are arranged together with the reserved image HRC. In addition, although the character displayed as the display mode of the reserved image 9A is the same character as the first character HRC1 and the second character HRC2 arranged together with the reserved series image HRC, the orientation and posture of the characters are different. There is.

If the first side of the held series of images HRC having the first character HRC1 is stopped and displayed facing forward (towards the player), the second start gate is displayed, although it is not possible to tell the type of win. In contrast, it is possible to convey that the reservation information corresponding to the four second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into 21 includes a jackpot, whereas the reservation series image having the second character HRC2 When the second side of the HRC faces forward (towards the player) and is displayed stopped, reservation information corresponding to the four second special symbol reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed. It is possible to tell that a predetermined number or more (for example, two) of jackpots in 16 rounds (maximum round (MAX round)) are included.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97(I), the first side of the reserved series image HRC including the first character HRC1 is stopped and displayed facing forward (toward the player), and the game to the second starting port 21 is stopped. It is reported that a jackpot is included in the reservation information corresponding to the four second special symbol reservations based on the ball's entry. Note that the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are displayed as numbers HMG on the image display device 7. continues to be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

After that, the period for displaying the catchphrase of the gaming machine manufacturer and the anti-addiction effect, in which a caution against becoming addicted to games (addiction) is displayed, begins, and this period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed. This marks the end of the jackpot production (jackpot game). When the jackpot production (jackpot game) comes to an end, the theme image PM imitating the "sun" is changed to the production mode before the jackpot production (jackpot game) occurs, for example, the theme image PM imitating the "sun" in which the production proceeds with the theme of "sun" in A mode. An effect that is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 will proceed.

In addition, when the performance of the held series is performed, and then the jackpot performance (jackpot game) ends and the right-handed game starts, when the selection screen of the performance mode was displayed in the previous jackpot performance (jackpot game) If the production mode selected in the above is maintained and a jackpot game (jackpot production) occurs again and the production mode selection screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 97(B), the maintained production mode is Although it is arranged in a specific area, the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63.

In this embodiment, the selection display prevention performance C of the performance mode is performed during a specific period, but the performance of the pending series is also performed during the same period as this specific period. In other words, in the first period (performance mode selection period), in the performance mode selection display prevention performance C, a performance that allows the player to select the performance mode is performed, whereas in the hold series performance, a flash image is displayed. A performance is performed using FH and the suspended continuous image HRC. Then, in the second period (performance mode confirmation notification period), in the production mode selection display prevention production C, a production is performed that conveys the transition to the selected production mode, whereas in the suspension series production, there is a notification such as the presence of a jackpot, etc. Perform a performance that conveys the message. The specific period in which the selection display prevention performance C of the performance mode is performed and the specific period in which the performance of the suspended series is performed are the same period. As a result, the time required for a series of effects from FIG. 97(B) to FIG. 97(D) following FIG. 97(A), and from FIG. 97(G) to FIG. 97(I) following FIG. ) is the same as the time required for a series of effects, so the game machine manufacturer's catchphrase is displayed as a catchphrase effect or a predetermined effect to prevent addiction is displayed as a warning against dependence (addiction) on the game. The starting time of the period is also the same, and there is no difference at all in the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game) after this predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the selective display prevention effect of the effect mode is shown.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is equipped with an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images, as shown in FIG. , B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of production modes), a first production that displays a selection section SEL (selection image) on the image display device 7 (display means) that allows selection of one production mode; It is possible to perform at least one of a second effect of displaying a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car on the image display device 7 (display means), and when a reach is formed and the reach effect progresses, The arrival of the next generation (a predetermined event) in which a production (group preview) in which car images GYK (special images) imitating cars run all at once in a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is developed. (establishment of the condition), the display of the selection part SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 by the first effect is prevented, and a car image imitating a car is displayed on the image display device 7 by the second effect. GYK (special image) display can be executed. According to this configuration, the image display device 7 (display means) is provided with a selection section SEL (selection image) capable of selecting one of the production modes among A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of production modes). Even when displayed, a production (group preview) in which car images GYK (special images) imitating cars run all at once from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as if forming a group is developed. When this effect (group preview) is developed based on the arrival of the next period (establishment of a predetermined condition), the display of the selection section SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is prevented. As a result, the selection section SEL (selected image) is erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means), so that the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
In the performance mode selection display prevention performance B shown in FIGS. 96(H) to 96(J), one of the performance modes can be selected from A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of performance modes). Even if the part SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), this pre-reading effect is performed based on the arrival of the next period (establishment of a predetermined condition) in which the pre-reading effect which is a special image is performed. Then, the display of the selection part SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is blocked, so that the selection part SEL (selected image) disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means). The same is true.
In the production mode selection display prevention production C shown in FIGS. 97(G) to 97(I), one production mode can be selected from A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of production modes). Even if part SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), based on the arrival of the next period (establishment of predetermined conditions) in which the performance of the reserved series, which is a special image, is to be performed, the status of this reserved series is displayed. When the effect is performed, display of the selection portion SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is blocked, and the selection portion SEL (selected image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). The same applies because it will be deleted (disappeared).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95(A) to 95(J) of selection display prevention effect A of the effect mode, A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of The first performance, in which a selection part SEL (selected image) from which one of the performance modes can be selected (presentation mode) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), is a specific display that extends from the start of variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of variation. A second effect that can be executed during a period and displays a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car on the image display device 7 (display means) is a specific period that extends from the start of variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of variation. It can be executed in According to this configuration, the selection section can select one of the production modes from A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of production modes) during a specific period from the start of variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of variation. A first effect that displays SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means), and a second effect that displays a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car on the image display device 7 (display means). Since the game can be executed as follows, it is possible to visually entertain the players and increase their interest.
In the selection display prevention performance B of the performance mode shown in FIGS. 96(A) to 96(J), A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (multiple A first effect that displays a selection section SEL (selection image) from which one of the effect modes (presentation modes) can be selected on the image display device 7 (display means), and a first effect that displays a pre-read effect that is a special image on the image display device 7. The second effect displayed on the (display means) can be executed, so it is the same.
In the selection display prevention performance C of the performance mode shown in FIGS. 97(A) to 97(I), during a specific period during a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a profit is given to the player, A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (a plurality of production modes), a first production that displays a selection section SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) from which one production mode can be selected, and a reserved series that is a special image. It is possible to execute the second effect of displaying the effect on the image display device 7 (display means).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95(A) to 95(J) of the selection display prevention effect A of the effect mode, the effect button 63, the sword member 64, which can be operated by the player, A sword button 65 and a select button 68 (a plurality of operating means) are provided, and among the effect button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, and a select button 68 (a plurality of operating means), the effect button 63 (a specific operating means) is operated. Only when the user selects one of the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of presentation modes) can be selected. According to this configuration, among the production button 63, the sword member 64, the sword button 65, and the select button 68 (a plurality of operation means), those are arranged on the front frame (front frame portion) 53 and around the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61. Of the effect button 63 and select button 68 arranged in the display button 63, the effect button 63 is located closest to the player and is formed larger than the select button 68, so that the decorative pattern starts to change. It is most preferable as an operation means for selecting one production mode among A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of production modes) within a limited specific period extending from to the stop of fluctuation. The same applies to the selection display prevention performance B in the performance mode shown in FIGS. 96(A) to 96(J) and the selection display prevention performance C in the performance mode shown in FIGS. 97(A) to 97(I).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95(A) to 95(J) of selection display prevention effect A in the effect mode, when a reach is formed and the reach effect progresses, a car is imitated. The arrival of the next generation (with predetermined conditions When a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the car image GYK (special image) imitating a car is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). A selection section SEL (selection image) that allows selection of one production mode among A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of production modes) before the second production to be displayed on the device (means) is executed; The effect mode (here, B mode) that has already been selected in the first effect to display on the image display device 7 (display means) is maintained. According to this configuration, when the second effect of displaying the car image GYK (special image) imitating a car on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed and finished, the A mode, B mode, C mode and D Among the modes (multiple production modes), the production mode (here, B mode) that has already been selected before the second production is executed is maintained, so the player is visually entertained. You can improve your interest.
In the selection display prevention effect B of the effect mode shown in FIGS. 96(A) to 96(J), when the second effect of displaying a pre-reading effect, which is a special image, on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed and finished. , A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (multiple production modes), the production mode that has already been selected before the second production is executed is maintained, so the same is true. .
In the selection display prevention effect C of the effect mode shown in FIGS. 97(A) to 97(I), a second effect is executed to display the effect of the reserved series, which is a special image, on the image display device 7 (display means). When finished, the production mode that was already selected before the second production among A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (multiple production modes) is maintained, so the same It is.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. The first effect is to display on the image display device 7 (display means) a selection section SEL (selected image) from which one of the effect modes (presentation modes) can be selected, A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode ( The names of the plurality of presentation modes are arranged in a reel-like manner and are displayed in rotation, with the selected presentation mode being placed closest to the viewer. According to this configuration, since the names of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of production modes) are arranged in a reel shape, it is possible to distinguish between the type of selected mode that is rotated and the name of one production mode. It is easy to understand which production modes are to be arranged after that, and the display mode is such that the selected production mode is placed closest to you, so it is easy to select the production mode, and it is easy to visually guide the player. You can entertain yourself and improve your interest. The same applies to the selection display prevention performance B in the performance mode shown in FIGS. 96(A) to 96(E) and the selection display prevention performance C in the performance mode shown in FIGS. 97(B) to 97(C).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 97(G) to 97(I) of the selection display inhibiting effect C in the effect mode, a performance of a reserved series that is a special image is performed (a predetermined Conditions) include conditions that indicate the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a gaming state that provides a profit to the player. According to this configuration, by performing a holding series, it is possible to suggest the expectation level of the occurrence of a gaming state that will give a profit to the player, that is, there is a jackpot among the held balls before the jackpot effect ends. can.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the selective display prevention effect of the effect mode is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the selective display prevention effect A of the effect mode shown in FIG. When this performance (group preview) is developed based on the arrival of the next period for which the running performance (group preview) will be developed (establishment of a predetermined condition), the image display device 7 of the selection section SEL (selected image) The selection portion SEL (selected image) has been erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means) by preventing display on the image display device 7 (display means). However, even if the next period in which the effect (group preview) is developed arrives (even if the predetermined conditions are met), the effect (group preview) is not developed and the image in the selection section SEL (selected image) is displayed. The display on the device 7 (display means) may be continued. In this case, the sub-control board 90 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to develop the effect (group preview), and if it is won, the effect (group preview) will be developed, whereas if it is unsuccessful, the effect (group preview) will be developed. Group advance notice) will not be developed. Note that the image control microcomputer 101 may perform the lottery as to whether or not to develop the effect (group preview) instead of the sub-control board 90.
In the selective display prevention effect B of the effect mode shown in FIGS. 96(G) to 96(J), this pre-reading effect is performed based on the arrival of the next period in which the pre-reading effect, which is a special image, is to be performed (establishment of a predetermined condition). When the selected part SEL (selected image) is prevented from being displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the selected part SEL (selected image) disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means). was. However, even if the next period in which the look-ahead effect is performed (even if a predetermined condition is met), the look-ahead effect is not performed and the selection section SEL (selected image) is not displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). May be continued. In this case, the sub-control board 90 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to perform a pre-reading effect, and if it is won, the pre-reading effect is performed, whereas if it is unsuccessful, the pre-reading effect is not performed. Note that the image control microcomputer 101 may perform the lottery as to whether or not to perform the pre-read effect instead of the sub-control board 90.
In the selection display prevention effect C of the effect mode shown in FIGS. 97(G) to 97(I), based on the arrival of the next period in which the effect of the held sequence, which is a special image, is to be performed (the establishment of a predetermined condition), this held sequence is When this effect is performed, display of the selection portion SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is blocked, and the selection portion SEL (selected image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). (disappeared). However, even if the next period in which the performance of the suspended series is performed (even if a predetermined condition is met), the performance of the suspended series is not performed, and the image display device 7 (display means) of the selection section SEL (selected image) may continue to be displayed. In this case, the sub-control board 90 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to perform the performance of the suspended series, and if it is won, the performance of the suspended series is performed, whereas if it is unsuccessful, the performance of the suspended series is not performed. . Note that the image control microcomputer 101 may perform the lottery as to whether or not to perform the performance of the suspended series instead of the sub-control board 90.

[Modification 2]
In the selective display prevention effect A of the effect mode shown in FIG. 95(H), car images GYK imitating cars are arranged in groups from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means) as special images. When the effect of running all at once is developed (so-called "group preview"), the display of the special image takes priority and the selection section SEL disappears from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (disappeared). However, instead of the car image GYK imitating a car as a special image, a cut-in preview (additional It may also be an image inserted as a performance. In addition, when displaying an eye-catching image on the image display device 7 (display means) as the reach effect progresses, by making the eye-catching image a special image, priority is given to displaying the eye-catching image that is a special image. Then, the selection section SEL may disappear (disappear) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, when making the character of the manufacturer that produces the gaming machine 1 appear on the image display device 7 (display means), the character of this manufacturer is set as a special image, the display of the character of the manufacturer is given priority, and the selection section SEL is displayed on the image display device. 7 may be erased (disappeared) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a.

[Modification 3]
In the selection display prevention performance B of the performance mode shown in FIGS. 96(G) to 96(J), if a look-ahead performance is performed during the fluctuation in a specific period from the start of fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the fluctuation, the look-ahead performance is If it is before the change, the production mode can be selected during the fluctuation, but if the pre-reading effect is performed, the production mode cannot be selected during the fluctuation, and furthermore, the pre-reading effect cannot be selected during the change. Even during the period (interval) from when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in the held image 9A in which the effect has been performed are stopped and displayed until the next decorative pattern starts changing, the player Even if the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the production mode cannot be selected. However, the pending image 9A on which the look-ahead effect was performed moves to the right side as the pending digested image 9C, the decorative patterns start to fluctuate, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, and the deviation is It may be possible to make it impossible to select the production mode only during the period until the final display is made, and even if the pre-reading production is performed during the specified period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the variation. The effect mode may be selected during the period from when the reserved image 9A on which the reading effect has been performed moves to the right side as the suspended digested image 9C until the decorative symbols start to fluctuate.

[Modification 4]
In the selection display prevention performance A of the performance mode shown in FIG. 95 and the selection display prevention performance B of the performance mode shown in FIG. Unless otherwise specified, it was not possible to select the production mode. However, it may be possible to select the performance mode only at an interval in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is started after the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined performance among the plurality of types of ready-to-win performances. The predetermined effects include those that have a high degree of expectation that a jackpot game (jackpot effect) that is advantageous to the player will occur, and after the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the so-called normal reach, the variable display of the decorative pattern starts. During this interval, the production mode cannot be selected.

[Modification 5]
In the selective display prevention effect C of the effect mode shown in FIGS. 97(G) to 97(I), the first surface of the reserved series image HRC having the first character HRC1 is stopped and displayed facing forward (toward the player). In this case, the jackpot is included in the reservation information corresponding to the four second special symbol reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, although it is not possible to tell the type of win. However, it was not possible to convey the number of jackpots in the reservation information corresponding to the four second special drawing reservations. Therefore, the number of jackpots may be conveyed to the reservation information corresponding to the four second special symbol reservations. For example, when the number of jackpots is 3 in the reservation information corresponding to the 4 second special figure reservations, the first side of the reservation series image HRC having the first character HRC1 facing forward (towards the player) "+3" may be displayed on the right side of .

[Modification 6]
In the selective display prevention effect C of the effect mode shown in FIG. 97, a theme image PM imitating the theme of each mode is displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demonstration area DS. Such videos are videos that explain the flow of the production of each mode, characters, backgrounds, scenes, etc., and may be 3D CG videos, animation videos, or movie videos. It may be a one-shot scene. Note that a still image may be used instead of a moving image.

[Modified example 7]
In the performance mode selection display prevention performance C shown in FIG. 97, a selection section SEL (selection image) from which one of the performance modes can be selected from A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of performance modes) is displayed as an image. The first performance displayed on the device 7 (display means) was being executed during a jackpot performance (performance of a winning game). However, in addition to the jackpot performance, during the performance of the small win game (or during the performance of the small win game instead of the jackpot performance), the selection section SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). You can also do this. In this case, regarding the second performance that displays the special image of the reserved series performance on the image display device 7 (display means), in addition to the jackpot performance, during the performance of the small winning game (or instead of the jackpot performance, the second performance is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means)) (during the performance in a winning game), it may be executed.

[Modification 8]
The selection display prevention performance A in the performance mode shown in FIG. 95, the selection display prevention performance B in the performance mode shown in FIG. 96, and the selection display prevention performance C in the performance mode shown in FIG. 97 may not include some of the effects described. However, other effects may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying various images,
a first performance that displays on the display means a selection image that allows selection of one performance mode among a plurality of performance modes;
at least one of a second effect of displaying a special image on the display means,
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, displaying the selected image on the display means using the first effect can be prevented and displaying the special image on the display means using the second effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
The first performance and the second performance can be performed in a specific period,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1 or aspect C2-2,
Equipped with multiple operation means that can be operated by the player,
One of the plurality of presentation modes can be selected only when a specific operation means among the plurality of operation means is operated;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3,
When the special image is displayed on the display means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the effect mode already selected in the first effect is maintained before the second effect is executed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-4,
The first performance is a display mode in which the names of each of the plurality of performance modes are arranged in a reel shape and rotated, and the selected performance mode is placed closest to the front.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-5,
The predetermined conditions include conditions that indicate the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a gaming state that provides a profit to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The game ball image effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 98 to 100. This game ball image presentation can be executed during the variation presentation of presentation symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable production start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the game ball image production, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the main display. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Game ball image production A]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining game ball image production A.
First, as shown in FIG. 98(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, a state in which the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner is shown. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figures, and here three pending images 9B are displayed. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently being changed on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the fluctuation occurs during a time-saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R have stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 98(C), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Therefore, here, the number of reserved images 9B is increasing. Further, the game ball collision effect is a effect in which the game ball collides with a collision target. Here, the button image BG is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is a effect in which the color of the upper surface of the button image BG changes. Here, it is assumed that the white upper surface has become green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(E), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Here, the prize is over. Further, the game ball collision effect is a effect in which the game ball collides with a collision target. Here, the button image BG is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(F), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is a effect in which the color of the upper surface of the button image BG changes. Here, it is assumed that the upper surface of the green color has become red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(G), a press promotion effect is executed. In the push promotion effect, a button image BG whose top surface has been changed in color is displayed as a color change effect. Additionally, a message image MG saying "Press" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(H), a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the confirmed stop performance (jackpot), the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double number. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R all stop at "7".

[Game ball image production B]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining game ball image production B.
First, as shown in FIG. 99(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, a state in which the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner is shown. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figures, and here three pending images 9B are displayed. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently being changed on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the fluctuation occurs during a time-saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R have stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 99(C), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Therefore, here, the number of reserved images 9B is increasing. Further, the game ball collision effect is a effect in which the game ball collides with a collision target. Here, the first movable accessory 14 (left side movable accessory 14L) is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change performance is a performance that changes the light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14 (decorative member). Here, it is assumed that the light is lit in green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(E), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Here, the prize is over. Further, the game ball collision effect is a effect in which the game ball collides with a collision target. Here, the first movable accessory (the left movable accessory 14L) is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(F), a color change effect is executed. The color change performance is a performance that changes the light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14 (decorative member). Here, it is assumed that the light is lit in red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(G), a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the confirmed stop performance (jackpot), the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double number. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R all stop at "7".

[Game ball image production C]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the game ball image effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 100(A), a pending stock effect is executed. The pending stock performance is a performance that makes the number of second special symbol reservations stored to be the maximum "4" in this variation. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner at the upper left of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying ``Stick your reserves by hitting right'' is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figures, and here three pending images 9B are displayed. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently being changed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(B), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Therefore, here, the number of reserved images 9B is increasing. Further, the game ball collision effect is a effect in which the game ball collides with a collision target. Panel image PG is the object of collision.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(C), a character change effect is executed. The character change effect is a effect that changes the characters of the panel image PG. Here, the word "CHANCE" has been changed to "BIG CHANCE."

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(D), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Here, the prize is over. Further, the game ball collision effect is a effect in which the game ball collides with a collision target. Here, the panel image PG is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(E), a character change effect is executed. The character change effect is a effect that changes the characters of the panel image PG. Here, the words "BIG CHANCE" have been changed to "super hot."

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100(G), a battle victory effect is executed. The battle victory performance is a performance that notifies that the ally character CRA has won against the enemy character CRB. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and its background is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven colors of the rainbow. The rainbow background RB is a background that guarantees a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(H), a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the confirmed stop performance (jackpot), the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double number. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R all stop at "7".

[Effect example]
Below, examples of effects of game ball image presentation are shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a performance using the game ball image UG is executed (FIGS. 98(C)(E), FIG. 99(C)(E), FIG. 100(B)(D)), and a jackpot is achieved. It suggests the degree of expectation for transition to gaming (FIGS. 98(D)(F), FIGS. 99(D)(F), FIGS. 100(C)(E)). According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by the effect using the game ball image UG.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game ball image UG is caused to collide with the collision target (FIGS. 98(C)(E), FIG. 99(C)(E), FIG. 100(B)(D)), and the collision target is By changing the color, the expectation level of transition to a jackpot game is suggested (FIGS. 98(D)(F), FIGS. 99(D)(F), FIGS. 100(C)(E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by producing a color change due to the collision of the game ball images UG.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button image BG imitating the production button 63 (FIG. 98) and a panel image PG on which characters are displayed are used as collision targets of the game ball image UG (FIG. 100). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a unified presentation on the display screen 7a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first possible accessory 14 (left side movable accessory 14L) is adopted as the collision target of the game ball image UG (FIG. 99). According to this configuration, dynamic performance is possible and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game ball collision effect using the game ball image UG is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (FIGS. 98(C) and 98(E)) , FIG. 99(C)(E), FIG. 100(B)(D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to feel as if a game ball collision effect has been executed by the game balls that have entered the game, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the game ball image presentation will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the number of game balls represented in the game ball image UG is one, but a plurality of game balls may collide with the collision target.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the game ball collision effect is executed at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. On the other hand, the game ball collision effect may be performed at a timing unrelated to the game ball entering the second starting port 21.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the game ball collision effect is executed at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. On the other hand, the game ball collision effect may be executed only at the timing of over-winning after the second special figure reservation reaches the upper limit.

[Modification 4]
The above was an example of suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to a jackpot, but it may also be applied as a performance that suggests the degree of expectation of transition to a time-saving game with a high or low probability.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine,
It is possible to execute a game ball effect using a game ball image that is an image imitating a game ball, and to suggest the degree of expectation of shifting to an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1,
In the game ball effect, the game ball image is caused to collide with a collision target, and the display color or coloring mode of the collision target is changed, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation for transition to the advantageous game.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2,
The collision target is an image displayed on a display screen,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-3,
The collision target is an accessory placed in the game area,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-4,
The game ball performance is executed when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entrance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-5,
The advantageous game is a jackpot game,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-6,
The advantageous game is a time-saving game,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-5,
The predetermined ball entry port is a starting port, and the game ball is executed when the game ball enters the starting port after the reservation memory due to the ball entering the starting port reaches an upper limit.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific edge effects A to C of stereoscopic images will be explained below using FIGS. 101 to 103. In FIGS. 101 to 103, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings, and the decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are not shown in the drawings. Some items are omitted for the sake of simplicity, and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing the drawing. There is something that has been done.

This specific edge presentation of the stereoscopic image can be executed during the variation presentation of the decorative pattern (for example, during the period from the start of the variation to the stop of the variation of the decorative pattern). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a specific edge effect of a stereoscopic image is included, the corresponding command is executed from the ROM 103. The image data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and determines the position, inclination, and light emission of the second movable accessory 15 when an instruction to execute a specific end face effect of a stereoscopic image is included. Change the aspect.

Here, first, a specific edge rendering A of a stereoscopic image will be explained, followed by a specific edge rendering B of a stereoscopic image, and a specific edge rendering C of a stereoscopic image in order.

[Specific edge effect A of stereoscopic image]
First, specific edge effect A of a stereoscopic image will be explained with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining specific end face rendering A of a stereoscopic image. The specific edge effect A of the stereoscopic image is selected from among multiple types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as part of the reach effect. be. In other words, the plurality of types of reach effects include the specific edge effect A of the stereoscopic image.

In the specific edge effect A of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. A variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the right decorative symbols 8R are rotated from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the reel. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before the decorative pattern stops, it decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, and is then stopped and displayed. Here, as shown in FIG. 101(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same design (number) (temporarily stopped at the number "9" here), and the middle decoration is displayed. The symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach.

When the reach is formed, the medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image temporarily stops at the number "8", and the medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image rotates (for example, the medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image stops at the number "8"). When the display mode is set such that it moves away from the rear and gradually becomes smaller while rotating round and round from the upper side to the lower side), it is next rotated in another direction (for example, from the right side to the left side of the inner decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image). The left decorative pattern 8L approaches the front while rotating and gradually increases in size, and finally, as shown in FIG. 101(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R and becomes a display mode in which rotation is stopped. As will be described later, this is done in order to display in a large size a double-folding mode formed by the right side of the left side medium decorative pattern 8CL and the left side of the right side medium decorative pattern 8CR, which are obtained by dividing the medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image into left and right sides.

Thereafter, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image is divided into left and right sides with a vertical line (center line) passing through the midpoint of the upper side and the midpoint of the lower side of the three-dimensional image middle decorative pattern 8C as a boundary, and the middle decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image 8CL and a right-side center decorative pattern 8CR of the stereoscopic image, and as shown in FIG. 101(D), the right side of the left-side center decorative pattern 8CL and the left side of the right-side center decorative pattern 8CR are opened in a double-folded manner. Here, the right side end face of the left side middle decorative pattern 8CL becomes a specific end face 8CLa of the left side middle decorative pattern 8CL, which is a stereoscopic image where the right end face is the open side end face, and the left side end face of the right side middle decorative pattern 8CR becomes the open side end face. This is the specific end surface 8CRa of the right side middle decorative pattern 8CR.

The middle decorative pattern 8C is formed as colored and opaque, but when the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are opened in a double-folded display mode, the specific end surface 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the right side The specific end surface 8CRa of the medium decorative pattern 8CR is represented in a transparent manner. Here, the specific end surface 8CLa of the left-side medium decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right-side medium decorative pattern 8CR are transparent regions, respectively.

When the left side medium decorative pattern 8CL and the right side medium decorative pattern 8CR are opened in a double-folding manner, a predetermined image that should not exist in the background image is placed between the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CLa of the left side medium decorative pattern 8CL and the right side. It can be visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CRa of the medium decorative pattern 8CR.

Here, the "predetermined image" is two characters CRA and CRB, and is a still image of the two characters CRA and CRB facing each other with swords, which shows the world view of the production by the gaming machine 1. Even if the left-side medium decorative pattern 8CL and the right-side medium decorative pattern 8CR are gradually opened in a double-folded manner, the positions of the two characters CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance and size between them do not change either. . The character CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end surface 8CLa of the left-side medium decorative pattern 8CL, and the character CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end surface 8CRa of the right-side medium decorative pattern 8CR.

When the left center decorative pattern 8CL and the right center decorative pattern 8CR have just been opened in a double-folding manner, the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CLa of the left center decorative pattern 8CL and the transparency of the specific end surface 8CRa of the right center decorative pattern 8CR. Although the area is small and it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CLa of the left center decorative pattern 8CL and the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CRa of the right center decorative pattern 8CR are transparent, the left center decorative pattern As 8CL and the right-side middle decorative pattern 8CR are opened in a double-door pattern, the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CLa of the left-side middle decorative pattern 8CL and the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CRa of the right-side middle decorative pattern 8CR become larger. , a part of the character CRB can be visually recognized from the specific end surface 8CLa of the left-side medium decorative pattern 8CL, and a part of the character CRA can be visually recognized from the specific end surface 8CRa of the right-side medium decorative pattern 8CR.

When the left center decorative pattern 8CL and the right center decorative pattern 8CR are opened wide in a double-folded manner, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR becomes large enough to make the presence of the character CRA visible.

Following FIG. 101(E), as shown in FIG. 101(F), a flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in all directions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. , and then, as shown in FIG. 101(G), the character CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR. The character CRA visually recognized through the screen is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an action performance by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed. At this time, in addition to the character CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the character CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR, 2 The background images of the two characters CRA and CRB are also displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The action effect is developed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all the same and are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in this case, the number "9"). Then, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a jackpot is awarded and a profit is given to the player will be played.However, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "9", If the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "8" and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "9", and the same pattern (in this case, the number "9") is stopped and displayed without being aligned, the mismatch will be confirmed and displayed. Become.

[Specific end face production B of 3D images]
Next, specific edge effect B of a stereoscopic image will be explained with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining specific end face rendering B of a stereoscopic image. The specific edge effect B of the stereoscopic image is selected from among multiple types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as part of the reach effect. be. In other words, the plurality of types of reach effects include the specific edge effect B of the stereoscopic image.

In the specific edge effect B of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. A variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the right decorative symbols 8R are rotated from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the reel. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before the decorative pattern stops, it decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, and is then stopped and displayed. Here, as shown in FIG. 102(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same design (number) (temporarily stopped at the number "9" here), and the middle decoration is displayed. The symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach.

When the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 102(C), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front is moved to the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. It advances (moves) downward from a stationary state to a position near the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advance position (direction position)). When the second movable accessory 15 completes its advance (movement) to a position near the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advance position (direction position)), it moves clockwise from a horizontal state at a predetermined angle. It rotates by (for example, 30 degrees), stops, and becomes tilted.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 102(D), the character string "OARO" written on the front of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed as a colored opaque character string "OARO" in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This is a display mode that appears as a character string image LG of a stereoscopic image. Note that the appearance and color of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image may be the same as "OARO" written on the front of the second movable accessory 15, or may have the same appearance but a different color.

Thereafter, when the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). It stops, returns to its original horizontal state, and retreats (moves) upward from the advanced position (direction position) to the retracted position (home position).

The character string image LG of the stereoscopic image displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 rotates toward the rear while rotating (for example, rotating round and round from the upper side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image toward the lower side). When the display mode is set to move away and gradually become smaller, the display switches to another rotation (for example, rotation from the right side to the left side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image) and gradually approaches the front while rotating. As shown in FIG. 102(E), the rotation was stopped when it became larger than the size of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image that finally appeared in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This is the display mode. As will be described later, this is done in order to display in a large size the double-folding mode formed by the right side of the left side character string image LGL and the left side of the right side character string image LGR, which are obtained by dividing the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image into left and right parts.

Thereafter, the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is divided left and right into two character string images of the stereoscopic image, with "OA" as the left-hand character string image LGL and "RO" as the right-hand character string image LGR. As shown in (F), the right side of the left character string image LGL and the left side of the right character string image LGR are displayed in a double-folded manner. Here, the right end surface of the character "A", which is the right end surface of the left character string image LGL, becomes the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL, which is a stereoscopic image that is the open end surface, and the left side of the right character string image LGR. The left end surface of the character "R" which is the end surface becomes the specific end surface LGRa of the right side character string image LGR which is a stereoscopic image which becomes the open side end surface.

The character string image LG is formed as colored and opaque, but when the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are opened in a double-door display mode, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the right side A specific end face LGRa of the character string image LGR is represented in a transparent manner. Here, the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent regions, respectively.

When the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are opened in a double-folded display mode, a predetermined image that should not exist in the background image is placed between the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left side character string image LGL and the right side. It can be visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the character string image LGR.

Here, the "predetermined image" is two characters CRA and CRB, and is a still image of the two characters CRA and CRB facing each other with swords, which shows the world view of the production by the gaming machine 1. Even if the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are gradually opened in a double-folding manner, the positions of the two characters CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance and size between them do not change either. . The character CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the character CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

When the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR have just been opened in a double-folding manner, the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left side character string image LGL and the transparency of the specific end surface LGRa of the right side character string image LGR. Although it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent, the left character string image As LGL and the right-hand character string image LGR are opened in a double-folding manner, the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left-hand character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right-hand character string image LGR become larger. , a part of the character CRB can be visually recognized from the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and a part of the character CRA can be visually recognized from the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

When the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are opened wide in a double-folded manner, as shown in FIG. 102(G), the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left side character string image LGL is At the same time, the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR becomes large enough to make the presence of the character CRA visible.

Following FIG. 102(G), as shown in FIG. 102(H), a flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in all directions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. , and then, as shown in FIG. 102(I), the character CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR. The character CRA visually recognized through the screen is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an action performance by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed. At this time, in addition to the character CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left side character string image LGL, and the character CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right side character string image LGR, 2 The background images of the two characters CRA and CRB are also displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The action effect is developed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all the same and are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in this case, the number "9"). Then, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a jackpot is awarded and a profit is given to the player will be played.However, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "9", If the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "8" and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "9", and the same pattern (in this case, the number "9") is stopped and displayed without being aligned, the mismatch will be confirmed and displayed. Become.

[Specific end face production C of stereoscopic images]
Next, the specific edge effect C of a stereoscopic image will be explained with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining a specific edge effect C of a stereoscopic image. The specific edge effect C of the stereoscopic image is selected from among multiple types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as part of the reach effect. be. In other words, the plurality of types of reach effects include the specific edge effect C of the stereoscopic image.

In the specific edge rendering C of a stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. A variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the right decorative symbols 8R are rotated from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the reel. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before the decorative pattern stops, it decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, and is then stopped and displayed. Here, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same design (number) (temporarily stopped at the number "9" here), and the middle decoration is displayed. The symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach.

When the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 103(C), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front is moved to the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. It advances (moves) downward from a stationary state to a position near the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advance position (direction position)). When the second movable accessory 15 completes its advance (movement) to a position near the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advance position (direction position)), it moves clockwise from a horizontal state at a predetermined angle. It rotates by (for example, 30 degrees), stops, and becomes tilted.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 103(D), the character string "OARO" written on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed as a colored opaque character string "OARO" in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This is a display mode that appears as a character string image LG of a stereoscopic image. Note that the appearance and color of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image may be the same as "OARO" written on the front of the second movable accessory 15, or may have the same appearance but a different color.

Thereafter, when the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). It stops, returns to its original horizontal state, and retreats (moves) upward from the advanced position (direction position) to the retracted position (home position).

The character string image LG of the stereoscopic image displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 rotates toward the rear while rotating (for example, rotating round and round from the upper side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image toward the lower side). When the display mode is set to move away and gradually become smaller, the display switches to another rotation (for example, rotation from the right side to the left side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image) and gradually approaches the front while rotating. As shown in FIG. 103(E), the rotation was stopped when it became larger than the size of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image that finally appeared in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This is the display mode. This is because, as will be described later, the front side of the left side character string image LGL and the front side of the right side character string image LGR, which are obtained by dividing the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image into left and right sides, are displayed in a large size in a closed display mode so that they face each other and overlap. It will be held in

After that, the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is divided left and right into two character string images of the stereoscopic image, with "OA" as the left character string image LGL and "RO" as the right character string image LGR. As shown in (F), the left side of the left side character string image LGL rotates forward about the vertical direction of the right side of the left side character string image LGL, and the right side of the right side character string image LGR turns to the right side. The display mode is such that the character string image LGR rotates forward about the vertical direction to the left of the character string image LGR. Here, the side labeled "OA" of the left character string image LGL immediately before it is divided into two character string images (the character string image LG shown in FIG. 103(E)) is "left character string The front surface of the right character string image LGR immediately before it is divided into two character string images (the character string image LG shown in FIG. 103(E)), which is referred to as the "front surface of the image LGL," is divided into two character string images. , it is referred to as "the front side of the right side character string image LGR".

As the rotation of the left character string image LGL and the right character string LGR progresses, the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGL are rotated so that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap. This is a display mode in which the column image LGR rotates (hereinafter referred to as a "display mode in which the front side of the left side character string image LGL and the front side of the right side character string image LGR are closed so that they face each other and overlap").

As a result, the right end surface of the character "A", which is the right end surface of the left character string image LGL, becomes the closed end surface, and the left end surface of the character "O", which is the left end surface of the left character string image LGL, becomes the open end surface. Further, the left side end surface of the letter "R" which is the left side end surface of the right side character string image LGR is the closed side end surface, and the right side end surface of the letter "O" which is the right side end surface of the right side character string image LGR is the open side end surface.

The left side end face of the letter “O”, which is the left side end face of the left side character string image LGL, is the open side end face, and here becomes the specific end face LGLa of the left side character string image LGL, which is a stereoscopic image, and also serves as the specific end face LGLa of the left side character string image LGL, which is a stereoscopic image. The right end surface of the letter "O", which is the right end surface, is an open side end surface, and here becomes a specific end surface LGRa of the right side character string image LGR, which is a stereoscopic image.

The character string image LG is formed as colored and opaque, but when the front side of the left side character string image LGL and the front side of the right side character string image LGR are closed so that they face each other and overlap, the identification of the left side character string image LGL becomes difficult. The end surface LGLa and the specific end surface LGRa of the right side character string image LGR are represented in a transparent manner. Here, the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent regions, respectively.

When the front side of the left side character string image LGL and the front side of the right side character string image LGR are closed so that they face each other and overlap, a predetermined image that should not exist in the background image is displayed on the transparent side of a specific end face LGLa of the left side character string image LGL. It can be visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right side character string image LGR.

Here, the "predetermined image" is two characters CRA and CRB, and is a still image of the two characters CRA and CRB facing each other with swords, which shows the world view of the production by the gaming machine 1. Even if the left side character string image LGL and right side character string image LGR are gradually closed so that the front side of the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are closed so that the front side of the left side character string image LGL and the front side of the right side character string image LGR face each other and overlap, the two The positions of the characters CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance and size between them also do not change. The character CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the character CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

When the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR have just been closed so that the front side of the left side character string image LGL and the front side of the right side character string image LGR are closed so that they face each other and overlap, The transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are small, and the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are smaller. Although it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the left character string image LGL is transparent, as the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are closed, the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL When the transparent area and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR become larger, a part of the character CRB can be visually recognized from the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the transparent region of the right character string image LGR becomes larger. A part of the character CRA can now be visually recognized from the specific end surface LGRa.

When the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are closed until a display mode is reached in which the front side of the left side character string image LGL and the front side of the right side character string image LGR face each other and overlap, the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are closed, as shown in FIG. 103(G). As shown in , the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL becomes large enough to make the presence of the character CRB visible, and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR increases. , becomes large enough to make the presence of the character CRA visible.

Following FIG. 103(G), as shown in FIG. 103(H), a flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in all directions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, as shown in FIG. 103(I), the character CRB is visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR. The character CRA visually recognized through the screen is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an action performance by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed. At this time, in addition to the character CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left side character string image LGL, and the character CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right side character string image LGR, 2 The background images of the two characters CRA and CRB are also displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The action effect is developed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all the same and are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in this case, the number "9"). Then, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a jackpot is awarded and a profit is given to the player will be played.However, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "9", If the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "8" and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "9", and the same pattern (in this case, the number "9") is stopped and displayed without being aligned, the mismatch will be confirmed and displayed. Become.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of specific end face rendering of a stereoscopic image will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 101(A) to 101(E) of a specific edge effect A of a stereoscopic image, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images is provided. When displaying the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image on the image display device 7 (display means), the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is divided. The specific end surface 8CLa of the left-side center decorative pattern 8CL, which has been divided, and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right-side center decorative pattern 8CR, into which the three-dimensional image center decorative pattern 8C is divided, are represented in a transparent manner, and the left-side center A first performance in which two characters CRA and CRB (predetermined images) become visible can be performed through the specific end surface 8CLa of the decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right-side middle decorative pattern 8CR. According to this configuration, the two characters CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized through the specific end surface 8CLa of the left center decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right center decorative pattern 8CR, which are expressed in a transparent manner. Since it is possible to provide an unprecedented and novel performance in which players can play games, it is possible to visually entertain the players and improve their interest. In the specific edge rendering B of the stereoscopic image shown in FIGS. 102(A) to 102(G) and the specific edge rendering C of the stereoscopic image shown in FIGS. 103(A) to 103(G), the specific edge rendering LGLa of the left character string image LGL is Similarly, the two characters CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized through the transparent area of the character string image LGR and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 101(A) to 101(E) of specific edge effect A of the stereoscopic image, the first effect is expressed in a transparent manner. The medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is divided so that the area between the specific end surface 8CLa of the left medium decorative pattern 8CL, which is present in the image, and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right medium decorative pattern 8CR, which is represented in a transparent manner, becomes larger. The left-side medium decorative pattern 8CL and the right-side medium decorative pattern 8CR are designed to open (rotate) in a double-door pattern. According to this configuration, the left-side center decorative pattern 8CL and the right-side center decorative pattern 8CR open (rotate) in a double-folding manner, so that the specific end surface 8CLa of the left-side center decorative pattern 8CL is represented in a transparent manner. and the specific end face 8CRa of the right-side center decorative pattern 8CR expressed in a transparent manner, thereby increasing the area where the two characters CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to visually entertain the players and increase their interest.
In the specific edge rendering B of the three-dimensional images shown in FIGS. 102(A) to 102(G), the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are opened (rotated) in a double-door pattern, so that they have transparency. The areas of the specific end surface 8CLa of the left-side medium decorative pattern 8CL, which is represented in a transparent manner, and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right-side medium decorative pattern 8CR, which is represented in a transparent manner, are enlarged, and the two characters CRA, CRB Similarly, the area where the (predetermined image) can be viewed can be enlarged.
In the specific edge rendering C of the stereoscopic images shown in FIGS. 103(A) to 103(G), the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are in front of the left side character string image LGL and in front of the right side character string image LGR. are rotated to a display mode in which they are closed so that they face each other and overlap, so that the specific end face 8CLa of the left center decorative pattern 8CL is shown in a transparent manner, and the right center decoration is shown in a transparent manner. Similarly, the area of the specific end face 8CRa of the symbol 8CR becomes larger, and the area where the two characters CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized can be enlarged.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 101(C) of the specific end surface effect A of the stereoscopic image, before the first effect, the number "8" which is the inner decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is displayed. It is possible to perform a second effect of displaying the image on the image display device 7 (display means) in a larger size. According to this configuration, before the first performance, the size of the number "8" which is the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is displayed in a large size on the image display device 7 (display means), so that the decorative pattern 8CL Before and after the specific end surface 8CLa of the decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are expressed in a transparent manner, the player Since the game can contribute to directing the eyes of the players, it is possible to visually entertain the players and improve their interest.
In the specific edge effect B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 102(E), before the first effect, the image display device 7 ( display means), the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are displayed in a transparent manner. It is possible to contribute to directing the player's line of sight to LGLa and the specific end surface LGRa of the right side character string image LGR, and so on.
In the specific edge effect C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 103(E), before the first effect, the display mode is enlarged so that the front side of the left side character string image LGL and the front side of the right side character string image LGR face each other and overlap. By being able to display on the image display device 7 (display means), the left side character string is displayed before and after the specific end face LGLa of the left side character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right side character string image LGR are displayed in a transparent manner. Similarly, it can contribute to directing the player's line of sight to the specific end surface LGLa of the image LGL and the specific end surface LGRa of the right side character string image LGR.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 101(C) of the specific end surface effect A of the stereoscopic image, in the second effect, the number "8" which is the interior decoration pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is The size of the number "8", which is the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, is displayed smaller as it moves away toward the depth direction, and then the number "8", which is the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, becomes smaller as it approaches toward the front. The size of "8" is displayed larger. According to this configuration, it is possible to display in a large size the double-folding mode formed by the right side of the left side medium decorative pattern 8CL and the left side of the right side medium decorative pattern 8CR, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest is improved. can be achieved.
In the specific end surface rendering B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 102(E), it is possible to display in a large size the double-door pattern formed by the right side of the left side character string image LGL and the left side of the right side character string image LGR, and is similar.
In the specific edge rendering C of the stereoscopic image shown in FIG. 103(E), a closed display mode can be displayed in a large size so that the front side of the left side character string image LGL and the front side of the right side character string image LGR face each other and overlap, and the same is true. .

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 101(C) to 101(E) of the specific edge effect A of the stereoscopic image, in the first effect, the inner decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is on the left side. It is divided into a plurality of medium decorative patterns 8CL and right medium decorative patterns 8CR, and a specific end surface 8CLa of the divided left medium decorative pattern 8CL and a specific end surface 8CRa of the right medium decorative pattern 8CR (in each divided three-dimensional image It is possible to perform an effect in which the two characters CRA and CRB (predetermined images) are made visible through the specified end surface. According to this configuration, as a result of dividing the interior decoration pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image into a plurality of parts, the number of three-dimensional images increases, and the number of specific end faces in each divided three-dimensional image also increases. Since the player can be given many opportunities to visually recognize the two characters CRA and CRB (predetermined images) through a specific end face in the image, the player can be visually entertained and the interest is increased. can be achieved.
In the specific edge effect B of the stereoscopic image shown in FIGS. 102(E) to 102(G) and the specific edge effect C of the stereoscopic image shown in FIGS. 103(E) to 103(G), the character string image LG is "OA". As a result of being divided into two character string images, the left character string image LGL and "RO" as the right character string image LGR, the number of 3D images increases, and the number of specific end faces in each of the divided 3D images also increases. The same is true because the player can be given many opportunities to visually recognize the two characters CRA and CRB (predetermined images) through the specific end faces of each of the three-dimensional images that have increased in size.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 102(C) to 102(D) of the specific end surface effect B of the stereoscopic image, the front side of the image display device 7 (display means) A second movable accessory 15 (movable member) that can be moved to a position (predetermined position) is provided, and when the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) forms a reach during the fluctuating performance of the decorative pattern, When a reach effect including a specific end face effect of a stereoscopic image is performed from among multiple types of reach effects, a third effect that is activated (at a predetermined timing) and moves to an advance position (predetermined position) can be executed. , In the second performance, the character string "OARO" written on the front of the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) is changed so that the character string image LG of a colored opaque three-dimensional image "OARO" is displayed. It has become. According to this configuration, when the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) operates at a predetermined timing and moves to the advanced position (predetermined position), the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) Since the character string "OARO" written on the front side of the second movable accessory 15 (movable The character string "OARO" written on the front side of the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) is as if the character string "OARO" written on the front side of the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) has been shaken off to the image display device 7 (display means). Since it is possible to perform an innovative performance, it is possible to visually entertain the players and improve their interest. The same holds true for the specific edge rendering C of the stereoscopic images in FIGS. 103(C) to 103(D).

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of specific end face rendering of a stereoscopic image will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the specific end surface effect A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 101, the specific end surface 8CLa of the left medium decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right medium decorative pattern 8CR are transparent areas, and the specific end surface effect B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. In the specific end surface rendering C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 103, the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent areas. However, the specific end surfaces 8CLa and 8CRa in the specific edge rendering A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 101, the specific edge surfaces LGLa and LGRa in the specific edge rendering B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. , LGRa need only have translucency, and may be a material having translucency such as frosted glass. By doing this, for example, the specific end surface is represented in a translucent manner like frosted glass, and the specific end surface is gradually changed from a blurred manner in which a predetermined image cannot be clearly seen through the particular end surface to a transparent area. The predetermined image may be made easier to view through the specific end face as the transparency becomes higher. Even with this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Modification 2]
In the specific edge rendering A of a stereoscopic image in FIG. 101, the specific edge rendering B of a stereoscopic image in FIG. 102, and the specific edge rendering C of a stereoscopic image in FIG. 103, two characters CRA, CRB was visible, and it was a still image of two characters CRA and CRB facing each other holding swords. However, a moving image may be used instead of a still image. The video may be, for example, one that explains the flow of two characters CRA and CRB facing each other with swords, a three-dimensional CG video, an animation video, or a movie one-shot video. It may also be a scene.

[Modification 3]
In the specific edge rendering A of the stereoscopic image shown in FIG. 101, the specific edge rendering B of the stereoscopic image shown in FIG. 102, and the specific edge rendering C of the stereoscopic image shown in FIG. 103, the stereoscopic image is divided into two stereoscopic images. However, it may be divided into three or more stereoscopic images. In this way, as the number of 3D images increases due to the division, the number of specific end faces in each 3D image also increases, and as a result, there are many opportunities to view a given image through the transparent specific end faces. It can be given to the player.

[Modification 4]
In the specific edge effect A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 101, the left center decorative pattern 8CL and the right center decorative pattern 8CR are gradually opened in a double-door pattern, and in the specific edge effect B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 102, the left side character string image LGL and the right side The character string image LGR is gradually opened in a double-folding manner, and in the specific edge rendering C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 103, the front side of the left side character string image LGL and the front side of the right side character string image LGR are closed so that they face and overlap. The left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR were gradually closed so that. However, the stereoscopic images may be rotated in the same direction or in different directions. For example, in the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 101, the left center decorative pattern 8CL and the right center decorative pattern 8CR are rotated in the same direction (for example, a clockwise rotation mode, a counterclockwise rotation mode, For example, the left center decorative pattern 8CL may be rotated forward, while the right center decorative pattern 8CR may be rotated backwards. For example, the left side medium decorative pattern 8CL may be rotated backwards while the right side medium decorative pattern 8CR may be rotated clockwise. In addition, in the specific end face rendering B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 102, the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are rotated in the same direction (for example, a clockwise rotation mode, a counterclockwise rotation mode, For example, the left character string image LGL may be rotated forward, while the right character string image LGR may be rotated backwards. For example, the character string image LGL on the left side may be rotated backwards, while the character string image LGR on the right side may be rotated clockwise. In addition, in the specific edge rendering C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 103, the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are rotated in the same direction without closing the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR. (For example, a clockwise rotation mode, a counterclockwise rotation mode, a forward rotation mode, a backward rotation mode, etc.), or as rotations in mutually different directions, for example, a mode in which the left side character string image LGL is rotated forward. In contrast, the right character string image LGR may be rotated backwards, or the left character string image LGL may be rotated backwards, whereas the right character string image LGR may be rotated clockwise.

[Modification 5]
In the specific edge rendering A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 101, the specific edge rendering B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 102, and the specific edge rendering C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. It was a demonstration of his worldview. However, it may also be something that suggests where the reach performance will develop. Since there are multiple types of development destinations for reach effects, it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will occur depending on the development destination that can be seen through a specific end face, and it is possible to indicate to the player the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will occur based on the development destination that can be seen through a specific end face. It can also contribute to the players themselves discovering the relationship between the degree of expectation that a game will occur.

[Modification 6]
The specific edge effect A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 101, the specific edge effect B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 102, and the specific edge effect C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. there were. As a representation of the worldview of the production, for example, in addition to the two characters CRA and CRB holding swords, it may also be an item such as a sword or shield, or a vehicle, or the two characters CRA and CRB may be holding swords. It may also be something that can be expressed with two kanji characters, such as the characters "clash", the characters "ranbu", and the characters "musou", which indicate an action by the CRB.

[Modification 7]
The specific edge effect A of the stereoscopic image shown in FIG. 101, the specific edge effect B of the stereoscopic image shown in FIG. 102, and the specific edge effect C of the stereoscopic image shown in FIG. A production may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying various images,
When displaying a stereoscopic image on the display means, a first effect can be executed in which a specific end face of the stereoscopic image is displayed in a transparent manner, and a predetermined image is visible through the specific end face. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
In the first effect, the stereoscopic image is rotated so that the area of the specific end face becomes larger.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1 or aspect D1-2,
Before the first effect, a second effect can be executed in which the size of the stereoscopic image is increased and displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3,
In the second effect, the size of the 3D image is displayed small as it moves away in the depth direction, and then the size of the 3D image increases as it moves toward the front. Is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-4,
In the first effect, the three-dimensional image is divided into a plurality of parts, and the predetermined image is made visible through the specific end face of each of the divided three-dimensional images.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3 or aspect D1-4,
comprising a movable member movable to a predetermined position in front of the display means,
A third effect can be performed in which the movable member operates at a predetermined timing and moves to the predetermined position,
In the second performance, the three-dimensional image in which the movable member is three-dimensionally expressed is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The combination effects A to C of movable accessories will be explained below using FIGS. 104 to 106. 104 to 106, decorative patterns and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings, and are arranged around the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Some of the second movable accessories 15 are also omitted for ease of viewing the drawings.

This combined presentation of the movable accessories can be executed during the variation presentation of the decorative symbols (for example, during the period from the start of variation to the stop of variation of the decorative symbols). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a combined performance of movable characters is included, the corresponding command is sent from the ROM 103. The image data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a combination performance of movable accessories is included, The position, inclination, and light emitting mode of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2 may be changed, and the position, inclination, and light emitting state of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 may be changed. The light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 arranged around the left side of the opening of the front frame 53 and the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 (hereinafter referred to as ``light emission mode of the frame lamp 66'') (referred to as "mode").

In addition, the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light (a plurality of them are provided), and the light emitting mode of the left side movable accessory 14L can be made into a multicolor light emitting mode. The right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light (a plurality of LEDs are provided), and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R can be made into a multicolor light emitting mode. can. Further, the second movable accessory 15 is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting light in multiple colors (a plurality of LEDs are provided), and the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 can be made into a multicolor light emitting mode. The frame lamp 66 arranged around the left side of the opening of the front frame 53 and the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 are each equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light (a plurality of LEDs are provided). The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 can be a multicolor light emitting mode.

Here, first, movable accessory combination performance A will be explained, then movable accessory combination performance B, and movable accessory combination performance C will be explained in order.

[Combined production of movable characters A]
First, the combination effect A of movable accessories will be explained with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the combination effect A of movable accessories. As shown in FIG. 104(A), in the movable accessory combination production A, first, the left movable accessory 14L is moved to the left retracted position (home) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the left movable accessory light emitting mode. At the same time, the right side movable accessory 14R advances (moves) from the right side movable accessory light emitting mode (the left side movable accessory light emitting mode) to the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (in a different light emitting mode) from the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. . At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory, which is exactly the same light emission mode as the right side movable accessory 14R, and is the same as the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory of the left side movable accessory 14L. It's different.

The left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R each advance (move) toward the advancing position (in the direction of approaching each other) at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and as shown in FIG. As shown in B), at the front (front) central position (advance position (deployed position)) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L is displayed. The left side decorative part, which is a half, and the right side decorative part, which is a half of the annular decorative part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R, are combined, and the left side decorative part and the right side movable part of the left side movable accessory 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined accessory) is formed in which the right side decorative portion of the accessory 14R has an annular shape.

When the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the area formed within the annular shape is a circular area ( (hereinafter referred to as "circular area") 14D. An image expressing emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to this circular area 14D. Here, an image of a person smiling with wide-open eyes is displayed, and then the image changes to an image of a person smiling with narrowed eyes. By supplementing the circular area 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can be given emotion. This makes it possible to realize a rich variety of performances based on the emotions of the combined characters.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 104(C) and 104(D), the combined accessory tilts from the upper side to the lower side toward the front side (player side) and then returns to its original position. (The face of the person appears to be bowing.) At this time, images expressing emotions are also displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, as the combined accessory tilts toward the front side (toward the player) and returns to its original position. The expressions of the combined accessories also change in a three-dimensional manner.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104(E), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front surface stops at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. Advance (move) downward to a position near the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advance position (direction position)), and rotate clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). and comes to a stopped state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged so as to advance forward of the combined left movable accessory 14L and right movable accessory 14R, so that the upper side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are This will cover part of the upper side. The second movable accessory 15 may be configured to cover either a part of the left movable accessory 14L or a part of the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member).

When the second movable accessory 15 advances, the light emitting mode of the left side movable accessory 14L is controlled from the left side movable accessory light emitting mode to the light emitting mode of extinguishing, and the light emitting mode of the right side movable accessory 14R and the frame lamp 66 are controlled. The light emitting mode is controlled from the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (the light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory) to the light emitting mode in which the light is turned off. On the other hand, the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is controlled to the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory when the second movable accessory 15 advances. The light emission mode for the second movable accessory is a light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory and the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory (a light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104(F), the light emission mode of the left side movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emission mode of extinguishing to the left side movable accessory light emission mode again, and the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R and the frame lamp The light emitting mode 66 is controlled from the light emitting mode of extinguishing to the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). In other words, the light emission mode of the left side movable accessory 14L becomes the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory, the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 become the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory, and the second movable accessory Since the light emitting mode of the object 15 becomes the second movable accessory light emitting mode, the light emitting mode of the left side movable accessory 14L and the light emitting mode of the right side movable accessory 14R (the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as that of the right side movable accessory 14R). The same light emitting mode as the light emitting mode) and the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 are respectively different light emitting modes.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104(G), the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the second movable accessory light emitting mode, stops, and returns to the original horizontal state. When the state is reached and the retreat (movement) is completed upward from the advance position (direction position) to the retreat position (home position), the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory. or is controlled to another light emitting mode (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory), or controlled to a light emitting mode in which the light is turned off.

Subsequently, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R move in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the left side movable accessory 14L is displayed in the front side (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the left side movable accessory light emitting mode. ) The right movable accessory 14R retreats (moves) from the center advanced position to the left retreat position (home position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable accessory 14R changes to the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (the left movable accessory). (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for objects), the image display device 7 moves backward (backwards) from the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a to the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Moving. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104(H), the left side movable accessory 14L is displayed on the image display device 7 from the advancing position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the left side movable accessory light emitting mode. When the retreat (movement) is completed toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory to the light emitting mode in which the light is turned off, and the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled to the light emitting mode in which the light is turned off. The display screen of the image display device 7 is displayed when the accessory 14R is in a right-side movable accessory light-emitting mode (a light-emitting mode different from the left-side movable accessory light-emitting mode) from the forward center front (front) center position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the retreat (movement) is completed toward the right side evacuation position (home position) of 7a, the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R changes from the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory (the light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory). The light emission mode is controlled to turn off. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 becomes the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R, and the light emission mode is turned off from the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory (the light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory). controlled to.

In this way, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 changes when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated (during the period during which the right side movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). Accordingly, the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R. In other words, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated (during the period during which the right side movable accessory 14R advances toward the advancing position, retreats, and returns to the home position), In conjunction with the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R, the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R.

In addition, the light emission mode of the second movable accessory 15 progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the second movable accessory 15 defined in chronological order, and the light emission mode of the left movable accessory 14L is defined in chronological order. The light emitting mode of the right side movable accessory 14R progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the left side movable accessory 14L, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the right side movable accessory 14R defined in chronological order. The process progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 defined in chronological order. The light emission pattern data for the right side movable accessory 14R and the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emission pattern data.

The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 changes accordingly when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated (during the period when the right side movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). Since the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as that of the right side movable accessory 14R, when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated, the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emission pattern for the right side movable accessory 14R are controlled. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right side movable accessory 14R may be set separately according to the respective light emitting pattern data, or the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right side movable accessory 14R may be set separately. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed according to the light emitting pattern data for the movable accessory 14R.

[Combined production of movable characters B]
Next, the combination effect A of movable accessories will be explained with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the combination effect B of movable accessories. In the movable accessory combination production B, first, as shown in FIG. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 advances (moves) from the front (front) center position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable accessory 14R turns off in a light-emitting manner. It advances (moves) from the right side retreat position (home position) to the advance position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is an extinguished light emission mode, which is exactly the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R, and is the same as the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory of the left side movable accessory 14L. It's different.

The left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R each advance (move) toward the advancing position (in the direction of approaching each other) at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and as shown in FIG. As shown in B), at the front (front) central position (advance position (deployed position)) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L is displayed. The left side decorative part, which is a half, and the right side decorative part, which is a half of the annular decorative part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R, are combined, and the left side decorative part and the right side movable part of the left side movable accessory 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined accessory) is formed in which the right side decorative portion of the accessory 14R has an annular shape.

When the left side decorative part of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side decoration part of the right side movable accessory 14R are combined to form a ring-shaped combined accessory, the light emitting mode of the left side movable accessory 14L is changed to that for the left side movable accessory. The light emitting mode is controlled from the light emitting mode to the light emitting mode of extinguishing, and the area formed in the annular shape becomes a circular area (hereinafter referred to as a "circular area") 14D. An image expressing emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to this circular area 14D. Here, an image of a person smiling with wide-open eyes is displayed, and then the image changes to an image of a person smiling with narrowed eyes. By supplementing the circular area 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can be given emotion. This makes it possible to realize a rich variety of performances based on the emotions of the combined characters.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105(C), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front surface stops at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. Advance (move) downward to a position near the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advance position (direction position)), and rotate clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). and comes to a stopped state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged so as to advance forward of the combined left movable accessory 14L and right movable accessory 14R, so that the upper side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are This will cover part of the upper side. The second movable accessory 15 may be configured to cover either a part of the left movable accessory 14L or a part of the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member).

When the second movable accessory 15 advances, the light emission mode of the left movable accessory 14L is maintained such that the light is turned off, and the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 are both turned off. is maintained. On the other hand, the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is controlled to the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory when the second movable accessory 15 advances. The light emitting mode for the second movable accessory is different from the light emitting mode for the left side movable accessory, and the light emitting mode for the right side movable accessory is different from the light emitting mode for the left side movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory, which will be described later. The light emitting mode is different from the mode).

After that, in the combined accessory, as shown in FIGS. 105(D) and 105(E), the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light-emitting mode of extinguishing to the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory again, The light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R is controlled from the light emission mode of extinguishing to the right side movable accessory light emission mode (a light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory and the light emission mode for the second movable accessory). At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 becomes exactly the same as the light emitting mode for the right side movable accessory of the right side movable accessory 14R, and is controlled from the light-emitting state of extinguishing to the light emitting mode for the right side movable accessory, and the left side movable accessory The light emitting mode for the left side movable accessory of the accessory 14L and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory of the second movable accessory 15 are different. In other words, the light emission mode of the left side movable accessory 14L becomes the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory, the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 become the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory, and the second movable accessory Since the light emitting mode of the object 15 becomes the second movable accessory light emitting mode, the light emitting mode of the left side movable accessory 14L and the light emitting mode of the right side movable accessory 14R (the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as that of the right side movable accessory 14R). The same light emitting mode as the light emitting mode) and the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 are respectively different light emitting modes.

Then, the combined accessory performs a "nodding" motion (like a human face bowing) by tilting from the upper side to the lower side toward the front (to the player's side) and then returning to its original position. At this time, images expressing emotions are also displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, as the combined accessory tilts toward the front side (toward the player) and returns to its original position. The expressions of the combined accessories also change in a three-dimensional manner.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105(F), the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the second movable accessory light emitting mode, stops, and returns to the original horizontal position. When the state is reached and the retreat (movement) is completed upward from the advance position (direction position) to the retreat position (home position), the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory. or is controlled to another light emitting mode (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory), or controlled to a light emitting mode in which the light is turned off.

Subsequently, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R move in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the left side movable accessory 14L is displayed in the front side (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the left side movable accessory light emitting mode. ) The right movable accessory 14R retreats (moves) from the center advanced position to the left retreat position (home position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable accessory 14R changes to the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (the left movable accessory). (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for objects), the image display device 7 moves backward (backwards) from the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a to the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Moving. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105(G), the left side movable accessory 14L is displayed on the image display device 7 from the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the left side movable accessory light emitting mode. When the retreat (movement) is completed toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory to the light emitting mode in which the light is turned off, and the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled to the light emitting mode in which the light is turned off. The accessory 14R advances to the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a light emitting mode for the right side movable accessory (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left side movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory). When the retreat (movement) is completed from the position to the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R changes to the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory (the left side movable accessory). (different light emission mode from the light emission mode for the second movable accessory) to the light emission mode in which the light is turned off. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 also becomes the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R, and the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory (the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory and the light emission mode for the second movable accessory) The light emitting mode is controlled from a different light emitting mode) to a light emitting mode in which the light is turned off.

In this way, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 changes when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated (during the period during which the right side movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). Accordingly, the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R. In other words, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated (during the period during which the right side movable accessory 14R advances toward the advancing position, retreats, and returns to the home position), In conjunction with the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R, the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R.

In addition, the light emission mode of the second movable accessory 15 progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the second movable accessory 15 defined in chronological order, and the light emission mode of the left movable accessory 14L is defined in chronological order. The light emitting mode of the right side movable accessory 14R progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the left side movable accessory 14L, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the right side movable accessory 14R defined in chronological order. The process progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 defined in chronological order. The light emission pattern data for the right side movable accessory 14R and the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emission pattern data.

The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 changes accordingly when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated (during the period when the right side movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). Since the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as that of the right side movable accessory 14R, when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated, the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emission pattern for the right side movable accessory 14R are controlled. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right side movable accessory 14R may be set separately according to the respective light emitting pattern data, or the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right side movable accessory 14R may be set separately. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed according to the light emitting pattern data for the movable accessory 14R.

[Combined production of movable characters C]
Next, the combination effect C of movable accessories will be explained with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the combination effect C of movable accessories. As shown in FIG. 106(A), in the movable accessory combination production C, first, the left movable accessory 14L is moved to the left retracted position (home At the same time, the right side movable accessory 14R advances (moves) from the right side movable accessory light emitting mode (the left side movable accessory light emitting mode) to the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (in a different light emitting mode) from the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. . At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory, which is exactly the same light emission mode as the right side movable accessory 14R, and is the same as the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory of the left side movable accessory 14L. It's different.

The left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R each advance (move) toward the advance position (in the direction of approaching each other) at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and as shown in FIG. As shown in B), at the front (front) central position (advance position (deployed position)) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L is displayed. The left side decorative part, which is a half, and the right side decorative part, which is a half of the annular decorative part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R, are combined, and the left side decorative part and the right side movable part of the left side movable accessory 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined accessory) is formed in which the right side decorative portion of the accessory 14R has an annular shape.

When the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the area formed within the annular shape is a circular area ( (hereinafter referred to as "circular area") 14D. An image expressing emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to this circular area 14D. Here, an image of a person smiling with wide-open eyes is displayed, and then the image changes to an image of a person smiling with narrowed eyes. By supplementing the circular area 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can be given emotion. This makes it possible to realize a rich variety of performances based on the emotions of the combined characters.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 106(C) and 106(D), the combined accessory tilts from the upper side to the lower side toward the front side (player side), and then returns to its original position. (The face of the person appears to be bowing.) At this time, images expressing emotions are also displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, as the combined accessory tilts toward the front side (toward the player) and returns to its original position. The expressions of the combined accessories also change in a three-dimensional manner.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 106(E), the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R move toward the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the left side movable accessory 14L is displayed in the image display device in the left side movable accessory light emitting mode. At the same time, the right movable accessory 14R moves back to the right side from the advance position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The light emitting mode for the accessory (the light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory) moves from the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the retracted position on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Retreat (move) toward (home position). At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 106(F), the left side movable accessory 14L is displayed on the image display device 7 from the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the left side movable accessory light emitting mode. When the retreat (movement) is completed toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory to the light emitting mode in which the light is turned off, and the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled to the light emitting mode in which the light is turned off. The display screen of the image display device 7 is displayed when the accessory 14R is in a right-side movable accessory light-emitting mode (a light-emitting mode different from the left-side movable accessory light-emitting mode) from the forward center front (front) center position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the retreat (movement) is completed toward the right side evacuation position (home position) of 7a, the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R changes from the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory (the light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory). The light emission mode is controlled to turn off. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 becomes the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R, and the light emission mode is turned off from the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory (the light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory). controlled to.

In this way, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 changes when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated (during the period during which the right side movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). Accordingly, the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R. In other words, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated (during the period during which the right side movable accessory 14R advances toward the advancing position, retreats, and returns to the home position), In conjunction with the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R, the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R.

The light emission mode of the left side movable accessory 14L progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the left side movable accessory 14L defined in chronological order, and the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the left side movable accessory 14L defined in chronological order. The process proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the accessory 14R, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 defined in chronological order. The light emission pattern data for the right side movable accessory 14R and the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emission pattern data.

The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 changes accordingly when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated (during the period when the right side movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). Since the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as that of the right side movable accessory 14R, when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated, the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emission pattern for the right side movable accessory 14R are controlled. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right side movable accessory 14R may be set separately according to the respective light emitting pattern data, or the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right side movable accessory 14R may be set separately. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed according to the light emitting pattern data for the movable accessory 14R.

In addition, in the combination production A of movable accessories shown in FIG. 104 and the combination production B of movable accessories shown in FIG. The clock advances (moves) downward from a stationary state at the upper retracted position (home position) to a position near the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advance position (direction position)). The second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise at a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) and stops in the second movable accessory light emitting mode. ), then stopped and returned to its original horizontal state, and then retreated (moved) upward from the advancing position (direction position) to the retreating position (home position), whereas the movable accessory in Figure 106 In the combination effect C, there is no effect of the second movable accessory 15 appearing in front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This is the expectation level that a jackpot game (jackpot performance) will occur when executed during the fluctuating performance of the decorative pattern (for example, the period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the fluctuation). This is because the combination effect A is the highest, followed by the combination effect B of the movable accessories in FIG. 105, and the lowest combination effect C of the movable accessories shown in FIG. 106.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the combination of movable accessories is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, for example, as shown in FIGS. It includes a front frame 53 provided with LEDs capable of emitting color light, and a game board 2 provided with a game area 3 that is visible through an opening formed in the front frame 53, and displays various images. A displayable image display device 7 (display means) and a left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 that can be moved to a forward position (predetermined position) in front of the image display device 7 (display means) and combined. and a right side movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are provided on the game board 2, and a left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and a right side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14. The movable accessories 14R (a plurality of movable members) are each provided with a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light), and the movable accessories 14R on the left side of the first movable accessory 14 and the first When the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 is combined, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are combined. Light emitting mode and front of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the right side movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 (member) The light emitting mode is the same as that of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light)) provided in the frame 53. According to this configuration, the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right side movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 move to the advanced position and can be combined. As a result, the player can be visually entertained, and a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: multicolor light emitting means) provided on the right side movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light)) is the same, so that the player It is possible to visually entertain and improve interest. The same holds true for the combined presentation B of movable accessories in FIGS. 105(A) to 105(G) and the combined presentation C of movable accessories shown in FIGS. 106(A) to 106(F).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104(A) to 104(H) of the combination effect A of movable accessories, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the first When the right side movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the movable accessory 14 is combined, the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right side movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are combined. ), a plurality of LEDs ( The light emitting mode of the second light emitting means: an LED capable of emitting multicolor light and the frame lamp 66 provided in the front frame 53 (the first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LED capable of emitting multicolor light)) The light emission mode is different from the light emission mode. According to this configuration, the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right side movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 move to the advanced position and are combined. In addition to visually entertaining the player, a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: emit multicolor light) provided on the right side movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 The light emitting mode of the LED that can emit light in different colors is different from the light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs that can emit multicolor light) provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14. By adopting the light emitting mode, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved. The same is true for the combined effects B of movable accessories in FIGS. 105(A) to 105(G) and the combined effects C of movable accessories shown in FIGS. 106(A) to 106(F).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104(E) to 104(F) of the combination effect A of movable accessories, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the first A part of the right side movable accessory 14R (a specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 without being combined with the right side movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the movable accessory 14 and the left side of the first movable accessory 14 It includes a second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member) that is movable so as to cover one or both of the movable accessory 14L (another movable member). According to this configuration, a new second movable accessory is added separately from the left movable accessory 14L of the combined first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14. The object 15 (non-merging movable member) appears and does not combine with the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14, so the game It is possible to visually entertain people and improve their interest. The same holds true for the combined effects B of movable accessories shown in FIGS. 105(C) to 105(E).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104(E) to 104(F) of the combined effect A of the movable accessory, the second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member) has a plurality of A plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolor light) are provided, and a plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolor light) are provided on the second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member). When the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are combined, the first movable accessory A plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: multicolor The light emitting mode is different between the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light)) provided on the front frame 53. It is designed to be. According to this configuration, a new second movable accessory is added separately from the left movable accessory 14L of the combined first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14. The object 15 (non-combined movable member) appears, and a plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member) emit light. The aspect is that a plurality of LEDs (the first The light emitting mode of the second light emitting means: an LED that can emit multicolor light and the frame lamp 66 provided on the front frame 53 (the first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs that can emit multicolor light)) Since the light emission modes are different from each other, it is possible to visually entertain the players and increase their interest. The same holds true for the combined effects B of movable accessories shown in FIGS. 105(C) to 105(E).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, for example, as shown in FIGS. means), a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means) provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15. The plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means) provided are LEDs (light emitting means) capable of emitting multicolor light. According to this configuration, the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means) provided in the front frame 53, the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14, and the right side movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 Since the plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means) provided on the second movable accessory 15 and the plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means) provided on the second movable accessory 15 can emit multicolor light, it is possible to visually You can entertain yourself and improve your interest. The same is true for the combined effects B of movable accessories in FIGS. 105(A) to 105(G) and the combined effects C of movable accessories shown in FIGS. 106(A) to 106(F).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104(A) to 104(H) of the combination effect A of movable accessories, a jackpot game state (jackpot effect) that provides a profit to the player is created. Before displaying the occurrence on the image display device 7 (display means) (that is, during the fluctuating performance of the decorative pattern (for example, during the period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the fluctuation)), the left side of the first movable accessory 14 The movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 can be combined. According to this configuration, before the occurrence of the jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) (during the fluctuating presentation of decorative symbols (for example, during the period from the start of fluctuating to the stop of fluctuating the decorative symbols)) , the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right side movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 move to the advanced position and become combined, thereby creating an impact on the player. It is possible to provide a certain performance, visually entertain the players, and improve their interest. The same is true for the combined effects B of movable accessories in FIGS. 105(A) to 105(G) and the combined effects C of movable accessories shown in FIGS. 106(A) to 106(F).

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104(A) to 104(H) of the combination effect A of movable accessories, a jackpot game state (jackpot effect) that provides a profit to the player is created. During the period from occurrence to end (that is, during the jackpot performance), the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right side movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 It is now possible to combine. According to this configuration, during the period from when the jackpot game state (jackpot performance) occurs until it ends (during the jackpot performance), the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the first movable accessory 14 By moving the right side movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) to the advancing position and taking on a combined mode, it is possible to provide an impactful performance to the player and visually entertain the player. You can improve your interest. The same is true for the combined effects B of movable accessories in FIGS. 105(A) to 105(G) and the combined effects C of movable accessories shown in FIGS. 106(A) to 106(F).

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the combination of movable accessories is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the combination production A of movable accessories shown in FIG. 104, the combination production B of movable accessories shown in FIG. 105, and the combination production C of movable accessories shown in FIG. The right side movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the accessory 14 moved to the advanced position and was in a combined state. However, any or all of the movable members among the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 move to the advanced position. You may return to the retreat position (home position) on the way and move to the advance position again, or move back and forth between the retreat position (home position) and the advance position, and perform a merging performance of movable characters that do not merge as a result. . In this case as well, the light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the right side movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 The light emission mode by the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light)) is the same as the light emission mode, and the right side movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 (specific The light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the movable member) and the plurality of LEDs provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 The light emitting mode is different from the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means (LED capable of emitting multicolor light). In addition, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 reciprocate between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position, and as a result, Even if a new second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member) appears while performing a combination of movable accessories that do not combine with the second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member), The light emitting mode of the plurality of provided LEDs (third light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) is different from that of the right side movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 and the first movable accessory 14. Light emitting mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the left movable accessory 14L (another movable member) of the object 14 and a frame provided on the front frame 53 The light emitting mode is different from that of the lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light)).

[Modification 2]
In the combination production A of movable accessories shown in FIG. 104, the combination production B of movable accessories shown in FIG. 105, and the combination production C of movable accessories shown in FIG. Two movable accessories, the right movable accessory 14R of the accessory 14, moved to the advanced position and were combined. However, a mode may be adopted in which three or more movable accessories each move to the advance position and combine. In this case, the first movable accessory 14 is used as a specific movable accessory that has the same light emission mode as the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light)). It may be the right side movable accessory 14R, or it may be replaced with another movable accessory different from the right side movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14, or it may be a movable accessory selected from among all the movable accessories. It can also be used as a thing.

[Modification 3]
The left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the first When the right side movable accessory 14R of the movable accessory 14 is located (standby) at the retreat position (home position), a left side decorative member hides the presence of the left side movable accessory 14L and a left side decorative member hides the presence of the right side movable accessory 14R. A right side decorative member to be hidden is provided on the game board 2, and the left side decorative member is equipped with a plurality of full color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and the right side decorative member is equipped with a plurality of full color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. good. In this case, when the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 are respectively located (standby) at the retreat position (home position), the first movable accessory The plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the object 14 and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 are turned off. Even when the left side decorative member and the right side decorative member are equipped with light, the left side decorative member and the right side decorative member can produce a light emission effect by emitting light from a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the left side decorative member and the right side decorative member, respectively. For example, the light emission mode of the left side decorative member, the light emission mode of one or both of the right side decorative members, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66, and the light emission mode of the second movable accessory 15 may be the same. It can be a mode.

[Modification 4]
In the combination production A of movable accessories shown in FIG. 104, the combination production B of movable accessories shown in FIG. 105, and the combination production C of movable accessories shown in FIG. The light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) The light emission mode was the same as that of the LED). However, the light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the right side movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 and the front frame 53 The frame lamp 66 disposed around the left side of the opening has the same light emission mode, whereas the plurality of lamps provided on the right side movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 The light emitting mode of the LED (second light emitting means: an LED capable of emitting multicolor light) is different from the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 disposed around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53. Alternatively, the light emitting mode and front of the plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the right side movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 may be changed. While the frame lamp 66 disposed around the left side of the opening of the frame 53 has a different light emission mode, the plurality of lamps provided on the right side movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 The light emitting mode of the LED (second light emitting means: an LED capable of emitting multicolor light) is the same as the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 disposed around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53. You can also do this.

[Modification 5]
In the combination production A of movable accessories shown in FIG. 104, the combination production B of movable accessories shown in FIG. 105, and the combination production C of movable accessories shown in FIG. The left side decorative part, which is half of the part, and the right side decorative part, which is half of the annular decorative part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R, are combined to form the left side decoration part of the left side movable accessory 14L. When one decorative member (combined accessory) in which the right side decoration part of the right side movable accessory 14R has a ring shape is formed, the combined accessory is moved from the upper side to the lower side toward the front side (player side). It was performing a ``nodding'' motion (like a human face bowing) by tilting and then returning to its original position. However, the combined accessory may rotate the left side and right side toward the front side (player side) and return to its original position, ``like a person's face turning left and right''. . In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, an image in which the eyes are crossed out (for example, see FIG. 54) is displayed as an image expressing emotion. It may also be an image expressing emotion.

[Modification 6]
The degree of expectation that a jackpot game (jackpot performance) will occur when executed during the variation production of decorative symbols (for example, the period from the start of variation to the stop of variation of decorative symbols) is expressed as the combination production A of movable accessories in Fig. 104. was set highest, followed by movable accessory combination effect B in FIG. 105, and movable accessory combination effect C in FIG. 106 the lowest. However, in a jackpot game (jackpot effect) in which a profit is given to the player, the combined effect of movable characters A in FIG. 104, the combined effect of movable characters in FIG. 105, and the combined effect of movable characters in FIG. It may also be executed as a performance. It may be executed based on the player's operation of the production button 63 (pressing operation), or may be executed based on the player's operation of the sword member 64 (downward pushing operation), The execution may be performed based on the player's operation (pressing operation) of the sword button 65 provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64.

[Modification 7]
The light emission mode for the left side movable accessory of the left side movable accessory 14L and the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory of the right side movable accessory 14R are completely different light emission modes. The light emitting mode for the right movable accessory was exactly the same as that of the object 14R, and was different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory of the left movable accessory 14L. However, during the period during which the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R operate, advance toward the advance position, retreat, and return to the home position, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R to have the same light emission mode, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emission mode of the left side movable accessory 14L are different. The left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are linked to have the same light emission mode, for example, lighting in red, flashing, or gradation lighting, while the frame lamp 66 is turned off. Alternatively, the light emitting mode may be different from that of the left side movable accessory 14L, such as lighting in white or gradation lighting.

[Modified example 8]
In the combined performance A of movable characters shown in FIG. 104, the combined performance B of mobile characters shown in FIG. 105, and the combined performance C of mobile characters shown in FIG. A production may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D2-1]
a front frame provided with a first light emitting means;
a display means that is visible through an opening formed in the front frame;
A gaming machine comprising a plurality of movable members that can be moved to and combined with a predetermined position in front of the display means,
The plurality of movable members are each provided with a second light emitting means,
When the plurality of movable members are combined, the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means provided on a specific movable member among the plurality of movable members and the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means provided on the front frame have the same luminescence mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
When the plurality of movable members are combined, the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means provided on the other movable members excluding the specific movable member among the plurality of movable members and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means provided on the front frame are changed. The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means is different from the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-2,
comprising a non-combining movable member that does not combine with the plurality of movable members and is movable so as to cover either or both of a part of the specific movable member and a part of the other movable member;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-3,
a third light emitting means is provided on the non-combined movable member;
The light emitting mode of the third light emitting means provided on the non-combined movable member is such that when the plurality of movable members are combined, the second light emitting means provided on the specific movable member and the other movable member respectively The light emitting mode of the means is different from the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means provided in the front frame,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4,
The first light emitting means, the second light emitting means and the third light emitting means are light emitting means capable of emitting multicolor light;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-5,
The plurality of movable members can be combined before displaying the occurrence of the winning game effect on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-5,
The plurality of movable members can be combined during a period from when the performance of the winning game occurs to when it ends.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other variations]
Among the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include some effects or effects other than those described above may be included.

Although the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured as a so-called 1 type and 2 type mixing machine, the gaming machine 1 may have a configuration other than this. For example, the gaming machine 1 may be an ST machine, a VST machine, a loop machine, or the like. Further, although the above embodiment has been described using a pachinko game machine as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of a pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel type game machine such as a slot machine, an arranged ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

Although the game machine 1 of the above embodiment is provided with the effect button 63 as an operation section to be operated by a player, the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, a trigger, etc. may be used as an operation section to be operated by a player. . Further, in the display performance in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display performance may be executed using the button image representing the performance button 63, but instead of this, the display performance may be executed using the image representing the select button 68. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

Although the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1 described above, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses the image display device 7 to execute various effects, as shown in FIGS. 59 to 106. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. That is, out of the plurality of production examples and/or modifications described above, two or more production examples and/or modifications may be combined. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub-display device in addition to the image display device 7 (display screen 7a). At least a part of the display effect performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may be performed on the display screen of the sub-display device.

Although the present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modified examples, the embodiments of the above-described aspect are for facilitating understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

1...Game machine 3...Game area 5...Board lamp 7...Image display device 9A, 9B...Pending image (pending icon)
9C...The relevant pending image (the relevant pending icon)
14...First movable accessory 15...Second movable accessory 20...First starting port (first ball entry port)
21...Second starting port (second ball entry port)
66...Frame lamp 81...Microcomputer for game control 91...Microcomputer for production control 101...Microcomputer for image control

Claims (1)

A display means that is visible through an opening formed in the front frame;
A gaming machine comprising a plurality of movable members provided in front of the display means,
The plurality of movable members can each move and gather from a retreat position to a predetermined position without covering the front frame at the same timing ,
When the plurality of movable members gather, in the assembled state, the light emission mode of the first specific movable member among the plurality of movable members and the light emission mode of the front frame become the same light emission mode,
When the plurality of movable members are assembled, in the assembled state, a light emission mode of a second specific movable member among the plurality of movable members and a light emission mode of the front frame are different,
When the plurality of movable members are assembled, they are further activated in the assembled state, and then, when the assembled state is released, the light emission mode of the second specific movable member and the light emission mode of the front frame are the same. Become a mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images